Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
TRAINING COLLEGE
LIBRARY.
'Class......f4l
I. L. FINAR
I. L. FINAR
1958
1955
Vll
PAGE
CHAPTER
CONSTITUTION .... 1
III. NUCLEOPHILIC
SUBSTITUTION AT A
V. STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
DIPHENYL
COMPOUNDS 126
CONTENTS
CHAPTER PAGB
X. POLYCYCLIC AROMATIC
HYDROCARBONS . 339
XL STEROIDS 358
Introduction, 358. Sterols:
Cholesterol, 359. Stereochemistry
of the steroids, 376. Conformational
analysis, 380. Ergosterol, 382.
Vitamin D group, 384. Stigmasterol,
387. Biosynthesis of sterols, 389.
Bile Acids, 390. Sex Hormones :
Androgens, 395. (Estrogens, 398.
Gestagens, 409. Adrenal Cortical
Hormones, 415. Auxins, 418.
XII. HETEROCYCLIC
COMPOUNDS CONTAINING
CONTENTS
XI
XVIII. CHEMOTHERAPY
XIX. HEMOGLOBIN,
CHLOROPHYLL AND
PHTHALOCYANINES
627
643
667 674
Abbreviations Ann. Reports (Chem.
Soc.)
Ber.
Chem. Reviews
Experientia
J.C.S.
J. Pharm. Pharmacol.
Nature
Science
Tetrahedron
Journals
Annual Reports of the Progress of
Chemistry (The Chemical Society,
London).
Chemical Reviews.
Experientia.
Nature.
Science.
Tetrahedron.
Xll
CHAPTER I
CHjCO ^ , CH 3 Ca ,H
I
ring. In II, owing to the strong
repulsion between the negatively
charged oxygen atoms of the two
nitro-groups, the plane of each
nitro-group will tend to be
perpendicular to the plane of the
benzene ring, and consequently a
chelated planar six-membered ring
cannot be formed.
In aromatic disubstituted
compounds the boiling point of the
ortho-isomer is greater than that of
the meta-isomer which, in turn,
may have a higher boiling point
than the ^am-isomer, but in many
cases the boiling points are about
the same.
C 11-0 CI 22-8
H 5-5 Br 27-8
0(0H) 7-8
O(CO) = 12-2 , . , . , , 58
y = C(* - d a y
r* c *
dl dg
II
wa-1M
[«I = nrs or H! = ;
ccx
IXc
r _ fal X M L Ja 100
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. I
(ii) Distance Rule (Tschugaev,
1898): The effect of a given
structural change on the
contribution of an asymmetric
centre decreases the further the
centre of change is from the
asymmetric centre.
$
300 ny< 700mft
(a)
300 m/<
(*)
700 m//
Fig. 1.1.
P = P„ + Pa
IK=H
The magnetic induction, B, is given
by
Ultraviolet . . . 2000-4000
10*
v (cm. -1 ) =
v (cm.1 )
1 10 4 10 8
I = I 0 10-" or log 10 ^ = el
I = i 0 io-« rf
f oc d or f —M where k is the
stretching force constant of the
bond. It is possible to calculate the
values of these force constants from
infra-red (vibrational) spectra.
C (single) 0-77
C (double) 0-67
C (triple) 0-60
Micro-wave spectroscopy is
particularly useful for information
on the molecular structure of polar
gases, and is also used for showing
the presence of free radicals.
cells.
M=—
READING REFERENCES
OUj ouo.
CHAPTER II
OPTICAL ISOMERISM
§1. Stereoisomerism.
Stereochemistry is the " chemistry
of space ", i.e., stereochemistry
deals with the spatial arrangements
of atoms and groups in a molecule.
Stereoisomerism is exhibited by
isomers having the same structure
but differing in their spatial
arrangement, i.e., having different
configurations. Different
configurations are possible because
carbon forms mainly covalent
bonds and these have direction in
space. The covalent bond is formed
by the overlapping of atomic
orbitals, the bond energy being
greater the greater the overlap of
the component orbitals. To get the
maximum overlap of orbitals, the
orbitals should be in the same
plane. Thus non-spherical orbitals
tend to form bonds in the direction
of the greatest concentration of the
orbital, and this consequently
produces a directional bond (see
also Vol. I, Ch. II).
Geometrical isomerism is
characterised by compounds having
the same structure but different
configurations, and because of their
molecular symmetry these
compounds do not rotate the plane
of polarisation of plane-polarised
light. Geometrical isomers differ in
all their physical and in many of
their chemical properties. They can
also exhibit optical isomerism if the
structure of the molecule, apart
from giving rise to geometrical
isomerism, is also asymmetric. In
general, geometrical isomerism
involves molecules which can
assume different stable
configurations, the ability to do so
being due, e.g., to the presence of a
double bond, a ring structure, or the
steric effect (see Ch. IV and V).
Properties of enantiomorphs. It
appears that enantiomorphs are
identical physically except in two
respects:
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. II
k-
Fig. 2.1.
Fig. 2.2.
§3a]
OPTICAL ISOMERISM
23
a*-
T'A
Fig. 2.4.
!r*
(ii) If the molecule is pyramidal,
then six forms are possible; there
are three pairs of enantiomorphs.
Each of the forms in Fig. 4, drawn
as a pyramid, is not superimposable
on its mirror image, e.g., Fig. 5
shows one pair of enantiomorphs.
ei~
i Fig. 2.5.
Fig. 2.6.
In practice, compounds of the type
Cabde give rise to only one pair of
enantiomorphs; this agrees with the
tetrahedral configuration.
C 6 H 5 -CH 2 -CHD-C0 2 H.
CH 3 ,0H 8 CH 3 CH 3
CH ^CH
Y:
H 2 CHD CH 2 CHD
CH 2 CHD CH 2 CH 2
\)H CH
II
CH 3 CH 3
I II
Some other optically active
compounds with deuterium
asymmetry are, e.g., (Ill;
Streitwieser, 1955) and (IV; Levy et
al, 1957):
III IV
V VI
§3a]
OPTICAL ISOMERISM
25
C0 2 H
OH
CH-,
D-lactic acid
HO
CH 3 L-lactic acid
CONH 2 I H—C—GH(CH 3 ) 2
C0 2 H (+)-acid
Fig. 2.8. CONH 2 £MVH-C-CH(CH
3 ) 2 S^
C0 2 CH 3
C0 2 H H— C —CH(CH 3 )!j C0 2
CH 3
C0 2 H C0 2 H
CONHNH 2
CON,
CONH 2 (-)-acid
acid earned out a series of reactions
whereby the carboxyl and the
carbon-amide groups were
interchanged; the product was (-)-
wopropylmalonamic acid. It is most
important to note that in this series
of reactions no bond connected to
the asymmetric carbon atom was
ever broken (for an explanation, see
Walden Inversion, Ch. III). F
i u T x iS x Cl i an J ge , fr ? m one
enant iomorph into the other is in
agreement with the tetrahedral
theory. At the same time, this series
of reactions shows that optical
isomers have identical structures,
and so the difference must be due
to the spatial arrangement.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. II
HH
cccc
bbb
(a)
§4]
OPTICAI, ISOMERISM
27
CI
staggered (trattsoid)
CI
CI
Cl^-J^/H H \^-4-v/Cl
gauche or skew
fully eclipsed (cisoid)
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. II
3-6kg.cal. 2-9kg.cal.
--V/ 0-8kg.cal.
Me
Me
tt^^/Me Me^-^H
H2
H 2'
rotation about a single bond. In
practice, however, it may occur if
the potential barriers of the various
forms do not differ by more than
about 10 kg.cal./mole. Free rotation
about a single bond is generally
accepted in simple molecules.
Restricted rotation, however, may
occur when the molecule contains
groups large enough to impede free
rotation, e.g., in ortho-substituted
diphenyls (see Ch. V). In some
cases resonance can give rise to
restricted rotation about a " single "
bond.
originally introduced by W. N.
Haworth, 1929). In its widest sense,
conformation has been used to
describe different spatial
arrangements of a molecule which
are not superimposable. This
means, in effect, that the terms
conformation and configuration are
equivalent. There is, however, an
important difference in meaning
between these terms. The definition
of configuration, in the classical
sense (§1), does not include the
problem of the internal forces
acting on the molecule. The term
conformation, however, is the
spatial arrangement of the molecule
when all the internal'forces acting
on the molecule are taken into
account. In this more restricted
sense, the term conformation is
used to designate different spatial
arrangements arising by twisting or
rotation of bonds of a given
configuration (used in the classical
sense).
be designated + +, , and H . E.
Fischer (1891) pointed out that
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. II
CHO
CHO
CHO
CHO
OH HO-
CH 2 OH (d)
D-senes
L-senes
COjjH C0 2 H
H—C—OH HO —O—H
II
HO—C—H H—C— OH
II
C0 2 H C0 2 H
IV V
CHO CN
CN
I>|+I
CH 2 OH H -_ C _ 0H H _ c 0H
II
D(+)-glyceraldehyde CH 2 OH CH 2
OH
C0 2 H C0 2 H
II
H—C!—OH H — C.—OH
II1
C0 2 H G0 2 H
mesotartaric (-)-tartaric
acid acid
into tevorotatory tartaric acid via
the Kiliani reaction (see Vol. I)
Thus (-)-tartanc acid is D(-)-tartaric
acid (V). On the other hand, (+)-
tartaric ^.^te.conyjrtei into D(-)-
glyceric acid, and so (+)-tartaric
acid is D(+)-tartaric acid (IV). In
this reduction of (+)-tartaric acid to
(+)-malic
C0 2 H O0 2 H COiH.
I►I>|
HO-C-H CH 2 CH 2
e 0 2 H C0 2 H CONH 2
IV (+)-maIic (+)-p-malamic
acid acid
COaH C0 2 H CHO
III
III
CH 2 -NH 2 CH 2 OH CH 2 OH
C0 2 H Co 2 H C0 2 H
COJE C0 2 H
II
H—C 2 —OH CH 2 CH 2 OH
I ~> I "> I
CC
CHO C0 2 H C0 2 H C0 2 H
HO-
-h ae*. ho-
_ H J™°! ho-
_ H ™^ H0 -
-H
CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 NH 2 CH 2
Br
OPTICAL ISOMERISM
35
Na/Hg I
00 2 H
-H
CH 3
L(+)-lactic acid
Me Me Me
HO-
r>(—)-lactic acid
(i) KCN
HO-
-j H
CH 2 OH
D-
HO-
-J—H CH 2 Br
Me
HO-
-H
(iii)
(ii) hydrolysis
OH 2 -00 2 H
r>{—)-£-hydroxybatyric acid
Me
H-
-OH
CH 2 C0 2 H
*-(+)-£-hydroxybutyric acid
Me
Me
OH
HT
H-
CH 2 CH 2 OH
Me H OH
-OH CH 2 CH2l
CH 2 *CH3
L(+)-butan-2-ol
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. II
/ -Cr-~
(I)
■>
Fig. 2.13.
pattern is indicated by R and S
respectively (R; rectus, right: S;
sinister, left).
b CI
Br-
H (II)
-C0 2 H
Hence by the conversion rule, (II) is
the (R)-form {a —> b —»■ c is
clockwise).
H-
-OH
CH 2 OH-
-OH HO■
-CH 2 OH a-
CH 2 OH
III
IV
d
VI
C0 2 H
H-
r- OH CHOH-C0 2 H
H-HO-
C0 2 H -OH H
= HO-
CH0H-C0 2 H
-H
C0 2 H
C0 2 H
(2 interchanges)
I (2 interchanges)
HO-
C0 2 H
-y-CHOHC0 2 H H
HO-
CO-H
-CHOHCO.H
§6]
OPTICAL ISOMERISM
37
H-
HO-
H-
H-
CHO
a-d-
-d d--a a~
b (+)-form
-a -d
b
(-)-form
a-a-
b meso form
- plane of symmetry
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. II
to three-dimensional formulae,
particularly those of ring systems,
e.g., 2 : 4-dimethylcycfobutane-1: 3-
dicarboxylic acid (Fig. 14). The form
shown possesses a centre of
symmetry which is the centre of the
ring. This form is therefore optically
inactive.
CH 3 CH 3
I CO NH|
| N NH—ccy |
<?H 3 B
I XX> NHI
H
cts
?H 3 ,CO NHl
<•>
| N NH—CO |
H CH 3
trans
HSCA
H
CH 3 / CH 3 H3C
(a)
Fig. 2.15.
§6]
OPTICAL ISOMERISM
39
H
I
II
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. II
Conversion of molecule Ca 2 bd
into Cabde. Let us consider as an
example the bromination of
propionic acid to give oc-
bromopropionic acid.
CO z H
C0 2 H
CQ 2 H
41
§7b]
a-a-
-d
-e
d-e-
bV
-a
-a
a-e-
b VI
-d
-a
d-a-
b VII
-a -e
b VIII
or
+ - ». Li
DL
C0 2 H
H-H-
COjjH
D»
-Br
C2H5X
CH,
3-H-
C0 2 H
D4
C2H5 IX
-H -CHj
Br-
C 2 H 5 XI
-CH,
in both cases, the positions of the
bromine atoms with respect to the
methyl group are the same.
Similarly, the amount of XIV from
XII will be the same as that of XI
from IX. Thus bromination of (±)-
/?-methylvaleric
C0 2 H
Br-
CHr
C0 2 H
-H
L,
-H
H-CHo-
COj-H
-H
Lx
-H
H-CH,-
Lx
-Br -H
C2HSC2H5C2H5
DL
DL
DL
OPTICAL ISOMERISM
43
§7d]
is known as the meso-form, and is a
diastereoisomer of the pair of
enantio-morphs I and II. The meso-
iorm is also known as the inactive
form and is represented as the t'-
form; the meso-torm cannot be
resolved (see also §10). Thus there
are four forms possible for the
molecule Cabd'Cabd: one pair of
enantiomorphs, one racemic
modification and one tneso- (*-)
form. These forms for tartaric acid
are:
COjH
HO-H-
C0 2 H
-H H-
-OH HO-
CQjH
L-
C0 2 H
-OH -H
H-H-
CO s H
-OH , plane of
_ 0 jj symmetry
COgH meso~(i-)
DL-
C0 2 H-CHOH-CHOH-CHOH-
CHOH-CO a H.
The rotatory powers of the two
terminal asymmetric carbon atoms
are the same, and so are those of
the middle two (the rotatory powers
of the latter are almost certainly
different from those of the former;
equality would be fortuitous). The
possible optical isomers are as
follows (V-XIV):
Li *>a d 2
VII VIII IX
L a »l
D,
Li La
DL
DL
XI XII
DL
»1
La
Li
XIII
"1 La D 2
Li
XIV
meso-iorms
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. II
Cabd d l d d
DL
is said to be pseudo-asymmetric,
and is designated " d " and " L " (or
© and 0 if the + and — convention
is used; §7b). There will, however,
be two meso-ioims since the
pseudo-asymmetric carbon atom
can have two different
configurations (see XV-XVIII).
Thus there are five forms in all: two
optically active forms
(enantiomorphs), one racemic
modification, and two meso-ioxms.
The following are the corresponding
trihydroxyglutaric acids, all of
which are known.
C0 2 H
HO
H-
H-
CO ? H
C0 2 H
CO,H
-H H-
-OH H--H H-
-H H-
-OH H--OH HO--OH H-
-OH
-H
-OH
C0 2 H D
C0 2 H L
C0 2 H meso
C0 2 H meso
"d'
D,
meso
meso
DL
DL
II
, , ,i ,11
I II III
0H O ° H .0 HO, o-
,—C— Of *J£»» CH 3 —C— of < >
s 0 X 0 CH 3 X X 0-
(-)
H .0
H+ - i-c/
CH.
AhV
(+)
Racemisation of compounds
capable of exhibiting keto-enol
tautomerism is catalysed by acids
and bases. Since keto-enol
tautomerism is also catalysed by
acids and bases, then if
racemisation proceeds via
enolisation, the rates of
racemisation and enolisation
should be the same. This
relationship has been established
by means of kinetic studies, e.g.,
Bartlett et al. (1935) found that the
rate of acid-catalysed iodination of
2-butyl phenyl ketone was the same
as that of racemisation in acid
solution. This is in keeping with
both reactions involving the rate-
controlling formation of the enol
(see Vol. I, Ch. X):
OH
slow I fast
Ph-CO-CIMeEt
O OH
o
PhC=CMeEt
(+)-Pll-CO'CHMeEt + OIT^sHOD +
PhCOCMeEt
Ph-CO-CDMeEt (-)-Ph-CO-CHMeEt
+ OD~
? »' H
■2H ^ I +o H |
(+)-
B-
C 6 H B -CHC1-CH S ^ C 6 H 5 -CH-
CH 3 + Cl~ ^ C 6 H 5 -CHC1-CH 3
(+)" (-)-
C 6 H 5 -CHC1-CH 3 -^> C 6 H 5 -
CH-CH 3 + Cl~
C 6 H 5 -CH-CH 3 -^ C 6 H 5 -CH =
CH 2 + H+
C 6 H 5 -CHC1-CH 3 ^ C 6 H 5 -CH
= CH 2 + HC1 ^ C 6 H 6 -CHC1-CH
3 (+) (-)-
R 3 CH + 2H 2 S0 4 —► R 3 C+ +
HSO,- + SO a + 2H 2 0 R 3 C+ + R 3
CH —>■ R 3 CH + R 3 C+, etc.
CH 3 CH S
C 2 H 6 -—CH—C 4 H, + C 2 H 5 —
C+—C 4 H 9
(+)-
CH a
C 2 H 6 —C+—C 4 H 9 + C 2 H 5 —
CH—C 4 H 9
OPTICAL ISOMERISM
49
Melting point
Water of crystallisation .
Density
L-Tartaric acid
170°
None
1-7598
170°
None
1-7598
206°
lH s O
1-697
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. II
ioo%(->
(«)
100%(+) 100%B
100%(+)
100%(-)
(c)
Id
a e— C— j
-f
d II
H-
C0 2 H
oh;
HS-
C0 2 H
-J—H
C0 2 H
H—I—Me
CH 2 -C0 2 H III
IV
CH 2 C0 2 H
(—)-form (+)-form
VI VII
Resolution by means-of
diastereoisomer formation may be
used for a variety of compounds,
e.g.,
C 10 H 19 NHSO 2 -^^^~COCl
Asymmetric transformation.
Resolution of racemic
modifications by means of salt
formation (the diastereoisomers are
salts; cf. acids and bases) may be
complicated by the phenomenon of
asymmetric transformation. This
phenomenon is exhibited by
compounds that are optically
unstable, i.e., the enantiomorphs
are readily interconvertible
(+)-c^(-)-c
There are two types of asymmetric
transformation, first order and
second order. These were originally
defined by Kuhn (1932), but were
later redefined by Jamison and
Turner (1942).
[(+)-Base-(+)-Acid] ^ [(+)-Base-(-)-
Acid]
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. II
C 6 H 5 -SOa CHjj-COsjH
NO,
0H-CO 2 H
O00 2 H
II
COH
CH 3 CO-CH 3
s ° r "^3 >cH3
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. II
(+)- or (—)-form depending on the
nature of the seed. Furthermore,
crystallisation of tri-o-thymotide
(dl) from a solvent which is itself a
racemic modification (d'l') and
which forms a clathrate, produces
crystals of the
Me,CH
CHMe 2
CHMe
tri-o-thymotide
(c)
§11]
OPTICAL ISOMERISM
57
to fairly large rotations, and that if
the refractive index for the
laevocircularly polarised light is
greater than that for the dextro
component, the substance will be
dextrorotatory. The difficulty of
Fresnel's theory is that it does not
explain why the two circular
components should travel with
different velocities. It is interesting
to note, however, that Fresnel
(1824) suggested that the optical
activity of quartz is due to the
structure being built up in right-
and left-handed spirals (cf. §2).
Fig. 2.21.
Fig. 2.22.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. II
C0 2 H
CQ 2 H
HO
OH
-OH
-OH HO
C0 2 H
optically inactive. On the other
hand, wesotartaric acid is usually
represented by the plane-diagram
formula in Fig. 23 (b). This
corresponds to the eclipsed form,
and has a plane of symmetry. In
this conformation the individual
molecules are optically active
except when the direction of the
light is perpendicular (or parallel)
to the plane of symmetry; the net
rotation is zero by " external
compensation ". It is possible,
however, for the molecule to
assume, at least theoretically, many
conformations which have no
elements of symmetry, e.g., Fig. 23
(c). All molecules in this
conformation will contribute in the
same direction to the net rotation.
If the total number of molecules
present were in this conformation,
then mesotartaric acid would have
some definite rotation. On the
theory of probability, however, for
every molecule taking up the
conformation in Fig. 23 (c), there
will also be present its mirror image
molecule, thereby giving a net zero
rotation due to " external
compensation ". As we have seen,
raesotartaric acid is optically
inactive (as shown experimentally),
and by common usage the inactivity
is said to be due to internal
compensation (§7b).
READING REFERENCES
CHAPTER III
NUCLEOPHILIC SUBSTITUTION
AT A SATURATED CARBON ATOM
S N 2 Y- + R-X-^Y-"R-«X-^Y-R + X-
T.S.
S N 1 R—X-^>R---X-^!>R+ + X-
T.S.
R+ + Y--^>RY
§2a]
NUCLEOPHILIC SUBSTITUTION
61
Me^
8 >V OS-
Me'
Me
: CH 2 *-^
<3-cH 2C ,^cr + ^3-6h 2 ~ <^3= (
fa a^>£WJ
I I a+l I
COi C0£
s ^° t26 t 35 -
co 2 col
.» ? -i -i r } _ t f* ., . t f t
A «1 -1 "4.
ci
III IV
fast
A A s+ s _
HO"'RNR 3 ** HO-~R—NR 3
—»~HOR + R 3 N
RY «-^— RX —%- RZ
I > I "AgOH" j
acid acid
I II III
This conversion of the (—)-form
into the (+)-form constitutes a
Walden inversion. The Walden
inversion was " defined " by Fischer
(1906) as the conversion of the (+)-
form into the (—)-form, or vice
versa, without recourse to
resolution. In one, and only one, of
the two reactions, must there be an
)-L(M* H-^5
Me C0 2 Et Me CI
W OTs W N C0 2 Et
\>H-
R \ ,. . ^ ,. R
- *\ ♦ ^
Hy ^H 3
Me Me
Reagent Substrate
2. Y- + RX+ —► YR + X negative
positive
CHMePh-SMe 2 + + N,- -►
CHMePh-N 3 + Me 2 S
Me 3 N + MeSMe 8 + —► Me 3
NMe+ + Me^S
HCIO
EtMeCHOH + H+ . EtMeCHOH 2 +
(3)
fast v '
slow ^+ 0+
EtMeCHOH 2 + =^ i= EtMeCH—
OH a (4)
H 2 0* + EtMeCH—OH 2 =<—=*H
2 0*—EtMeCH—OH 2
+ fast
H 2 0*—CHMeEt .. HO*—CHMeEt
+ H+ (6)
, „ slow 8+ 6+ f nai
H 2 0* + EtMeCHOH 2 + , H 2 Q*—
EtMeCH—OH 2 >,
H 2 0*—CHMeEt + H 2 0
CI CI
S=0
R-^-0^
s=o
->■ RCl + S0 2
In practice, the a-
chloroethylbenzene obtained has
almost complete retention of
configuration, and consequently the
mechanism must be Sn*. A point of
interest here is that it is apparently
difficult to postulate the nature of
the transition state in this
mechanism.
R0S0C1 + C 5 H 6 N -* CI- +
ROSONC 5 H 8 -►
Cl—R—OSONC 6 H 6 -> CI—R + S0
2 + C 5 H 5 N Optically active a-
phenylethanol reacts with
phosphorus trichloride, phosphorus
pentachloride, and phosphoryl
chloride, in the presence or absence
of pyridine, and with hydrochloric
acid, to give the inverted chloride.
Thus all these proceed by the Sn2
mechanism. It is reasonable to
assume that the chloride ion attacks
some intermediate other than a
pyridinium ion, since inversion
occurs whether pyridine is present
or absent.
^^ \h Nx>/ \h
protection
O x X—OH
XXX \
Me OI H
retention
COi J C0 2 H
H N h 2 -™^6^I + -^ H OH
Me Y * 2 Me
Me d(-) -alanine d(-) -lactic acid
Me Me (^
I . .CH—Nj CH +
■N 2
/ /\} /
CH 2 O *-CH 2 f N 0
I CH
CH 2 ?
/CO
TT (
OH
H-Y Br
(—)-form
If no neighbouring group
participation of bromine occurred
in the above reactions, then if the
reaction were S N 2, complete
inversion would have
Br S N 2 — C 2 —Ci— —^-» — C 2 —
(V- + H 2 0 Br +OH 2 Br
-H s 0 I + Br-
Br+OH, Br Br Br Br
*2
-X X
-OBs"
AcOH
OAc
trans
X
BsO.
:OBs~
as
oh:
H20+
-cr
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. Ill
Me
,0
<$
-BsO"
-OBs
(I)
A.c
AcO"
OAc
(II)
Me HO^JU-0 /°
OAc
HO.
>Br
EtO
ASYMMETRIC SYNTHESIS
CH, C0 2 H[B-brucine] CH 3 G0 2
H
I II
„, y OIK /C0 2 H[(-)-brucine] CH 3
^ ^H
III IV
0 2 Hf ^H C 2 Hf^ ^0O 2 H
V VI
co 2 + X
C 2 Hr ^C0 2 C 2 H 5 VIII
inactive
VIII
inactive
CHj. C0 2 H[(-)-brucine]
C 2 Hf^ ^C0 2 H \
T \ CH 3. e
CH 3 C0 2 H / ° 2H5 la
C'
II
CH 3 / C0 2 H
C 2 H 5 ^ \C0 2 C 2 H 5 \ ch
VH >—>■ 3 ^C-C0 2 C 2 H 5
/CH
CH 3 C0 2 H(cinchonidine)/ 2 5
Vila
C 2 Hf ^C0 2 C 2 H 5
C 2 Hs ^COaHCH-brucine] C 2 Hf
la
C 6 H 5 -COC0 2 H + (-)-C 10 H 19
OH -+ C 6 H 6 -COC0 2 C 10 H 19 +
H 2 0 ^%
CeHs-CHOH-COjAoHi, -^ C 6 H 5 -
CHOH-C0 2 H + (-)-C 10 H 19 OH
(—)-rotation
CH 3 -CHOH-C0 2 H + (-)-ROH
(—)-rotation
/OMgl C 6 H s -CO-CO 2 C 10 H M
+ CH 3 -MgI >- CeHs-C^-COjAoHjg
OH
CH 3
OH/
c>c
(+)-rotation
Reid et al. (1962) have also used
aldehydes in the Reformatsky
reaction, e.g., benzaldehyde gave a
laevorotatory /3-hydroxy-/3-
phenylpropionic acid. Jackman et
al. (1950) reduced tert. -butyl w-
hexyl ketone with aluminium (+)-l:
2 : 2-trimethylpropoxide at 200°,
and obtained a slightly laavorota-
tory alcohol.
(—)-rotation
(-(-)-rotation
3 : 3-dimethylbutan-2-ol by means
of (+)-2-methylbutylmagnesium
chloride (Mosher et al., 1950; see
also Vol. I for abnormal Grignard
reactions).
Bothner-By (1951) reduced
butanone with lithium aluminium
hydride in the presence of (+)-
camphor, and thereby obtained (-f
)-z'soborneol (from the camphor)
and a small amount of a
dextrorotatory butan-2-ol. The
reducing agent in this case is a
complex aluminohydride ion
formed from lithium aluminium
hydride and camphor, e.g., Al(OR)H
3.
3 a s (+)-camphor B z s
(+)-rotation
CN CN
II
I*I+I
Ii'
■J■
§7]
NUCLEOPHILIC SUBSTITUTION
83
HO C S
iiiL
IX a
Ph
Ph.
N^N)'
II \
.,0^—M
Ph.
Me
MeMgX IX
.OH || A,
a /0^-m
-c—
I
IL
Xa
II
-OH
x O'
,Cb
-M -L
Plu
.Me
MeMgX X
OH
^O'
M
Me-
C0 2 H
i -C-
-OH
C0 2 H
HO C Me
Ph IX b
i Ph
Xb
be seen from the following
equation: starting with the pyruvic
ester XI in which the configuration
of the alcohol is IX a, the product
would be X b.
Me.
II XL
-XT NK
ll\ °PhMgBr
XI C0 9 H
O ,L Me^ .OH || Au
-M >- ^CT- CL JOg-M
Ph
-HO-
i -0-
-Me
Ph Xb
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. Ill
R'MgX
H-
..R'
M—^C—C^-OH IT ^R
:A
R'MgX^
HO
RL
Me
Me
Me
N0 2 N0 2
N0^2V-CH=CH-h€^> ^ NOy^^-
CHBr-CHBr-^^
N0 2 N0 2
(+)-rotation
Enzymology, Interscience
Publishers, 1947, 7, 65. Cram and
Kopecky, Models for Steric Control
of Asymmetric Induction, /. Amer.
CHAPTER IV
GEOMETRICAL ISOMERISM
C0 2 H H0 2 C
Fig. 4.1.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. IV
frans-butenedioic acid. As will be
shown later (§5), I is maleic acid
and II fumaric acid.
CH 2 =CH 2 , 40 kg.cal./mole; C 6 H
5 -CH=CH-C 6 H 5 , 42-8
kg.cal./mole; CH 3 -CH=CH-CH 3 ,
18 kg.cal./mole; C0 2 H-CH=CH-C0
2 H, 15-8 kg.cal./mole.
(a)
360'
(6)
360°
Fig. 4.2.
Fig. 4.3.
H \ y\ / H H \ ^^ / H
)c\)CC)cc(
Fig. 4.4
VI is cis-l-chloro-2-iodo-l-
bromoethylene or tfr«»s-l-bromo-
2-iodo-l-chloro-ethylene. On the
other hand, since this method of
nomenclature usually deviates from
the rule of naming groups in
alphabetical order, it has been
a b a b a. J> a b
NK NK Nj^ ^C"
II II II II
* /( N b^^a ^N ^%
I II III IV
V VI
X C=C CH 3
H X X CH(CH3) 2
vn
II II II
B< ^b b' ^H H
H x ^COisH H^ ^C0 2 H
cc
II <+ — II
H^ ^C0 2 H H0 2 C^ ^H
H \'/ C <?
H/^
II /> + H,0
CO
[CH. IV
*■ c °* II
H0 2 CT ^H coumarinic acid
°* II H TJO,H
coumaric acid
coumarin
HOgC
H0 2 C
H H as-acid
C0 2 H
H H trans-a,cid
(ii) Method of conversion into
compounds of known
configuration.
Hv
,C0 2 H
.0.
H0 2 C ^H
fumaric acid
HO 2 0^ ^H III
|[H]
H^ /CC1 3
II H^ ^C0 2 H IV
|[H]
\^/
CH 3
H^
,CH 3
H0 2 CT ^H V crotonic acid
W ^C0 2 H VI
zsocrotonic acid
§5]
GEOMETRICAL ISOMERISM
93
H,C
CH S
H„C
C0 2 H CK-form
C0 2 H trans- form
-co 2
HH
H,C
H,C
CH,
COaH C0 2 H C0 2 H H
HH
cii-form
optically inactive
HH
trans-form. resolvable
II II
cc
H0 2 C^ ^H H^ \C0 2 H
«'s-form trans-form
H. X!0 2 H .C0 2 H w X0 2 H
TT CH 2 Nr
II I II
H0 2 Cr ^H H0 2 C / S< ^C0 2 H
§5]
GEOMETRICAL ISOMERISM
95
[of- (v)].
somers, e.g.,
EU
\r
'CH»
r^Kr
H" ^C0 2 H
•cis-crotaflic acid
m.p. 15 5°
H' ^c X!0 2 H
0-toluic acid
m.p. 105°
CH;
II
b.p. 56°/l0mm
0020^115
b.p. 122°
C ^G
«WI ^ C0 ° H
in +2H
C 6 H„ H ^ ^ C « H «
H 2 -Pd C Zn/CIWCOM.
-< HI »-
GEOMETRICAL ISOMERISM
97
§5]
Br
Br
H^
.C0 2 H
H_
Br 4
JO.
Br VII
^0O 2 H
>
,C0 2 H
v C0 2 H
H.
,C0 2 H
Br H. S /C0 2 H
HOsC^V^-H
Br 2
H^ /C0 2 H XT
HO»C
"H
Br
Br H,, I ,-C0 2 H
.£-HOgC | % -H
Br
IX X
Br Br
o '•or ^ D - ^c" Nr
|| +Br 2 -^ |>r* -^ I +1
Br Br
(XI) (XII)
/ C \ /< /<
OH 2 OH
NK _ H+ N^
J. ~^ '
OH OH
H X.
^~X +^0=0^ — <H~H
Plf' ^C0 2 H N |—
cis cis ph C0 2 H
trans trans H C0 2 H
El H-CR 2 — CR^-Z ^^ Z~ +
H^CR^-CR 2
H + + CR 2 =CR 2
E2 Y^H-^CR^CRy^Z —*- YH + CR
2 =CR 2 + Z~
C0 2 H H0 2 C v /CI | Ck /C0 2 H
XX NaQH ^ C NaOH X/
|| (-HC1) HI (-HC1) ||
h/ x:o 2 H | h/N;o 2 h
CO a H
CI H x .CI | H x /CI
XX NaOH C NaOH X/
|| (-HC1) HI \-HCl) ||
101
§5b]
XT
II
Al
+ OH"
Br'
Br'
.H'
s-
III
+ H 2 0+Br"
Me
H
Me
H £. + IBr+Br" Me
CIS
Me
+ IBr+Br"
trans
In the (±)-form, as the transition
state changes into the ethylene
compound, the two methyl groups
become eclipsed; in the meso-form
a methyl group becomes eclipsed
with a hydrogen. Thus the energy of
activation of the transition state of
the (±)-form will be greater than
that of the meso-iorm. and
consequently the latter should be
formed more readily, i.e., the meso-
iorm should undergo
debromination more readily than
the (reform. Winstein et al. (1939)
have shown that this is so in
practice, the rate of debromination
being about twice as fast. These
authors also showed that the rate of
debromination of weso-stilbene
dibromide
(Ph-CHBr-CHBr-Ph)
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. IV
"Ph-^0^ H
as
Ph-^~"\^-Me
Phv
II
Me
Th
trans
PhCHMe-CHPh-NMe 3 + }I~
OEt-
> PhMeC=CHPh
H^OEt
§6]
GEOMETRICAL ISOMERISM
103
§6. Interconversion
(stereomutation) of geometrical
isomers. The
Br,; I,
>fumaric acid
HNO,
>elaidic acid
Br 2 hv v Br« + Br»
Br Br'
H^ ^C0 2 H H^'^OOgH H0 2 (T
'^H
I II
Br Br
I + II — >■ II + I ^*
II
BF 3 BF,
f j*v G \ -— | '-^v |
H /C ^C 6 H 6 iK+NyH, CeH^+^H
Crff ^H
§7. STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
CYCLIC COMPOUNDS
H2
aH ^2£ *X Hi
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. IV
(110
aH
H,
H«
VI
VII
VIII
XIII
(v)
aH
Ha
m
XIV
xv
XVI
HH
XVII
aH
(vi) Ha
aH
XVIII
Ha
forms (and one racemic
modification). XVIII contains three
similar asymmetric carbon atoms
which are all pseudo-asymmetric.
Two geometrical isomers are
possible, XIX and XX, both of which
possess at least one (vertical) plane
of symmetry, and therefore
represent wieso-forms.
aH Ml
Hb Ha
3 6 H 5 C0 2 H C 6 H 6
ho 2 c/ H H 5 q/ H HA H 5 c/ C0 °
H
C0 2 H H III
£-
C0 2 H
ftH*
Truxinic acid. This acid can exist
theoretically in six geometrical
isomeric forms, four of which are
resolvable; thus ten forms in all are
possible theoretically. Truxinic acid
is of the type IX, and the six
geometrical isomers possible are X-
XV. X and XI are meso-iorms (each
has a plane of symmetry); XII-XV
are resolvable (theoretically), since
all possess no elements of
symmetry. The configurations of
these stereoisomers have been
determined by methods similar to
those used for the truxillic acids; it
appears, however, that only four of
these six forms are known with
certainty, viz., /?, d, £ and neo.
C 6 H 6 C0 2 H 9 6 H 6 H C 6 H 5
C0 2 H
Kb ^-f \-
H H H C0 2 H H
IX X XI XII
to p. neo-
C 6 H 5 C0 2 H C 6 H 5
aH
HO
t!0 2 H
2S
C0 2 H
GEOMETRICAL ISOMERISM
109
§11]
H,C
CH S
II
II
II
H3C
H,C
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. IV
III .» 14 ■ . . »* _ ._ •
"boat" or C form
"chair or Z form
Fig. 4.5.
Me jj
H- . . , H
Me- 7/ ^H
HH
a-methy] e- methyl
(i) 1 : 2-Compounds
Classical formula Conformations
§11]
GEOMETRICAL ISOMERISM
113
(ii) 1 : 3-Compounds
cis-1:3
trans -1:3
e:a
cis-1.4
trans -1:4
a:a
The two c/s-conformations are
identical when the Y groups are
identical. Also, the trans-e : e-iorm
will be more stable than the cis-a :
e-form.
H a-Br e-Br
*0
Me H
CO,H
§11]
GEOMETRICAL ISOMERISM
115
C0 2 H H H
Ha
ii0 *9/h H0 2
H H IV
HHHH
HOjjC
C0 2 H H0 2 C
C0 2 H
V VI
optically active. They may be
distinguished by the fact that the
cis-isomer forms a cyclic anhydride,
whereas the trans-isomer does not.
(iv) Inositol
(hexahydroxycycMiexane). There
are eight geometrical isomers
possible theoretically, and only one
of these is not superimposable on
its mirror image molecule; thus
there are nine forms in all (and also
one racemic modification). If we
imagine that we are looking down
at the molecule, and insert the
groups which appear above the
plane of the ring, then the eight
geometrical isomers may be
represented as follows:
H OH OH OH
OH H
HL /'H HLJH HL JH HI JOH
HHHH
■tneso- inositol
OH
OH
OH
HO
OH
OH H
resolvable scyllitol
Examination of these
configurations shows that all except
one—the one labelled resolvable—
have at least one plane of
symmetry, and so are all
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. IV
meso-ionas. All the meso-iorms and
both of the optically active forms
are known; of these meso-inositol,
scyllitol and (+)- and (—)-inositol
occur
naturally. „ . , .
CI H
CI
CI
P-
cis -decalin
H2H2
VIII
rrarcs-decalin
117
§11]
TT
XI
XII
Fig. 7 shows the original
diagrammatical method of
representing cis-decalin by the
fusion of two boat forms of
cyclohexa.ne, and foms-decalin by
the fusion of two chair forms; these
are the forms suggested by Mohr.
m-decalin
trans -decalin
Fig. 4.7.
trans-decalin
Fig. 4.8.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. IV
OH
-CD
H XV cis-
OH
OH
H XVI trans-
,.CH 2 -C0 2 H
H ,--H CH 2 -C0 2 H
-C0 2 H ^\ ,-C0 2 H
»H \ ><H
*H ^v/^CHz-CHg-CQaH
XXI XXII
§11]
GEOMETRICAL ISOMERISM
119
XVI a
two forms of either XV or XVI, then
on their oxidation, only one
decalone would have been
produced. Since, however, two
decalones were obtained, the two
decalols must be of the types XV
and XVI—one of each, or even a
mixture of the pairs; further proof
of the existence of the types XV and
H
Ct> oH
HOH
trans- hydrindanol. Resolvable
NH
Decahydroquinolines
DecahydroJSdquinohnes
e XXIII
XXIV
XXV XXVI
the equatorial-hydroxyl
conformation, would be expected to
be more stable than the former
(with the axial hydroxyl).
I II
cis H trans
I H | 1-ene 2-ene
H H (88%) (12%)
as
trans
CI
Allinger et al. (1961) have examined
the conformations of the 2-
halocyc/o-hexanones by
polarographic methods. It was
suggested that since these
compounds are polarographically
reduced (Elving et al., 1956), it
seems likely that the reduction
potential of such a system will
depend on the conformation of the
halogen atom. This prediction was
shown to be the case in practice.
The authors showed that for
systems with relatively fixed
conformation, such as the 2-halo-
4-£-butylcycZohexanones, the
epimer with the axial halogen is
reduced more easily. Furthermore,
it was found that a flexible
molecule such as 2-
chlorocyc2ohexanone, which
contains comparable amounts of
the two conformations, showed the
potential characteristic of the more
easily reduced (axial) form. This is
understandable on the basis that
the e-iorm. is very readily converted
into the a-form, the rate of the
conversion being rapid compared
with the rate of the reduction.
R-COO
READING REFERENCES
CHAPTER V
STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
DIPHENYL COMPOUNDS
NH-
ii
N0 2
o
C0 2 H 0O 2 H
NO, IV
N0 2 N0 2 CO 2 0 2 H 5
C0 2 H NO
N0 2 C0 2 H V
SH 8H SH SH
VI VII VIII
J3-S.
IX
derivative, VI, gave the
intramolecular disulphide
(diphenylene disulphide, IX). On
the Kaufler formula, all three
dithiols would be expected to give
the intramolecular disulphides,
since the two thiol groups are
equally distant in all three
compounds.
ABAABB
-o-o- <^^
ABAB
I II
AC
B III
CA
^~0
B IV
C0 2 H C0 2 H COgH
V VI 2
S0 3 H Br
S0 3 H j + A8(CHs)3
vii viii 1
_C0 2 II CQ 2 H
IX X XI
N H0 2 C N C0 2 H Ph^ Th
XII XIII
_C0 2 H OH OH HO
HO OH
XV
Cxl2 C/H2
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. V
H0 2 C CII 3 C0 2 H H0 2 C CH 3
CH 3
=N,
=/ 0H3
CH3 'CH3 C02H
C0 2 H C0 2 H
00 2 H CCfeH
§3] STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
DIPHENYL COMPOUNDS
H0 2 C
131
C0 2 H
H0 2 C
II
III
undergoing asymmetric
transformation with brucine. Mills
and Kelham (1937) also resolved iV-
acetyl-iV-methyl-/>-toluidine-3-
sulphonic acid, VII, with brucine,
and found that it racemised slowly
on standing. In both
9^ /CH^COaH
N N0 2
CH 3 CO-CH 3
^S0 3 H
VI
R .SCVCgHs
VIII
R SOj'CjHs
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
RR
I CH 3 I
C 6 H 5 - S0 2 -N XN^N-SO^CeHs
CH
R S0 2 "C 6 H 5
[ch. v
(iv) Liittringhaus et al. (1940, 1947)
isolated two optically active forms
of 4-bromogentisic acid
decamethylene ether. In this
compound the methylene ring is
perpendicular to the plane of the
benzene ring; the two sub-stituents,
Br and C0 2 H, prevent the rotation
of the benzene nucleus inside
HO,C
(CH 2 ) 1(
CH
CH
CH,
CH,
^=\
COoH
HO„C
(CH 2 )
10
Br CH 3 0H 0H CH 3 Br
^=fa 3 OH OH C h 3 cis
Br CH 3 0H 0H CH 3
CH 3 OH 0H CH 3 Br trans
§3a]
STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
DIPHENYL COMPOUNDS CI *3 Br
OH^33
ch 3 <^3~c>-^€=> uH3
^=^ OH Br
133
CH Br OH __. CH s ^>-^^-^^CH 3
OH Br CH 3 trans possible. Thus
Browning and Adams (1930)
prepared the dibromo cis- and
trans-forms, and resolved the «'s-
isomer; the foms-isomer is not
resolvable since it has a centre of
symmetry.
NH 2
Me Me
IV
VI
VII
VIII
molecule exhibiting overcrowding
and consequent out-of-plane
buckling of the molecule is 3 :4-
benzophenanthrene (VII); this has
been shown to be non-planar by X-
ray analysis (Schmidt et al., 1954).
Similarly, Robertson et al. (1954)
have shown that VIII exhibits out-
of-plane buckling.
Me \c/ H Me \c/ H
II II
Ms/ Nx>,H HO a c/ N
■Me
X XI
In polynuclear aromatic
hydrocarbons in which the strain
tends to be overcome by out-of-
plane displacements of substituents
and out-of-plane ring buckling,
these effects cause changes in the
ultraviolet spectra, but it is not yet
possible to formulate any
correlating rules. NMR studies by
Ried
AB
BA
2 : 2': 6 : 6'-Tetrasubstituted
diphenyl compounds may be
classified under three headings
according to the nature of the
substituent groups.
OCH 3 F C0 2 H
H0 2 G F OCH s
I
F C0 2 H
C0 2 H F II
§4]
STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
DIPHENYL COMPOUNDS
137
N0 2 F
o-o
F NO,
III
N0 2 H 3 CO NOj; N0 2 H3CO
C0 2 H C0 2 H N0 2
IV V
CH,
NO,
/
C0 2 H
VI
PhS0 2 CH 2 C0 2 H
\N/
PhS0 2 + / CH 2 C0 2 H
PhS0 2v ^CH 2 C0 2 H
+ N0 2 "
IX
as N0 2 or CN, and is decreased
when R is an electron-releasing
group such as Me or OMe. These
results were explained as follows.
With, e.g., R == N0 2 , (IX)
contributes to the resonance hybrid
as well as (VIII). The resonance
hybrid therefore has increased C=N
double bond character
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. V
CH,IJ JNH-COCH,
CH,-CO-NH
CH,
H0 2 Cl
CH,CONH(i
4nh-coch 3
bC0 2 H
optically inactive
optically active
In all the optically active
compounds, the rings cannot be
coplanar, since if they were, the
molecules would possess a centre
or plane of symmetry. If the
dilactam, however, is not planar,
then it would possess no elements
of symmetry, and consequently
would be optically active. If the
dilactam is planar, then it has a
centre of symmetry, and
consequently cannot be
abC==C=Cde «6C=C=Ca6
I II
a—a
Fig. 5.2.
III IV
C6H5C6H5C6H5C6H5
G=C=C C=C=C
V VI
naphthyl-a : y-diphenylallene-a-
carboxylic acid, V, but failed to
resolve it; they were unable to
crystallise the salts with active
bases. Kohler converted this acid
into the glycollic acid ester, VI, and
was then able to resolve VI by
means of brucine.
OH
' son*
CMe 3 - CMe^C^CH
Landor et al. (1962) have also
deduced the absolute configuration
of the (+)-chloride by first
determining the absolute
configuration of the (+)-alcohol;
the (R) -(—)-alcohol gave the (S)-
(—)-allene.
ST ^CHs-CH^ ^COssH
VII
It is interesting to note, in
connection with allenes, that the
antibiotic mycomycin has been
shown to contain the allene
grouping. Mycomycin is optically
active, and is the only known
natural compound which owes its
optical activity to the presence of
this grouping. Celmer and
Solomons (1953) have shown that
the structure of mycomycin is:
CH^C-(^-CH=C=CH-CH=CH-
CH=CH-CH 2 -CO a H
345
187
I II
C0 2 H C0 2 Na
Ott^C— ~b
ii'li 1 ti
J-''!''
portions are perpendicular to each
other, and consequently there are
no elements of symmetry. When
this compound is treated with
sodium hydroxide, the lactone rings
are opened to form IV, and the
optical rotation disappears.
H0 2 C
>;
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. V
I* CH 3 -C—CH^
CO— O^ ^"0
IX
CHa-C-CHs CO
H CH 3 CH 3
|— |ch 3 |— |h rTH
CH, CH, H
XI
XII
OH^Xf/OH
as-cts
HO cis-trans
HO trans-trans
READING REFERENCES
CHAPTER VI
STEREOCHEMISTRY OF SOME
ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON
§2. STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
NITROGEN COMPOUNDS
I d— N— b
I I— c
II
then it would not be resolvable; it
would be resolvable, however, if the
configuration is pyramidal (II) or
tetrahedral (III). Le Bel (1891)
claimed to have partially resolved
wobutylethylmethylpropylammonium
chloride, IV, by means of
Penicilliumglaucum (cf. §10 iii. II),
but later work apparently
CH 3 I
-i +
CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 -N—CH 2 CH(CH 3
) 2 Cf
IC2H5
IV
§2a]
STEREOCHEMISTRY OF SOME
ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON
-1 +
145
CH 3
IC6H5
H CH 2 —CH 2 CH-CH 2 H
/CC^N\^cC
VI
Br
C 6H 6
CO2C2H5
VII
and hence will be optically inactive.
Since the compound was resolved,
the configuration must be
tetrahedral, i.e., VI. This tetrahedral
configuration has been confirmed
by physico-chemical studies (see
§2b). More recently, Hanby and
Rydon (1945) have shown that the
diquaternary salts of
dimethylpiperazine exhibit
geometrical isomerism, and this is
readily explained on the tetrahedral
configuration of the four nitrogen
valencies (cf. cyclohexaxie, §11. IV).
CH 3
CIL-CH,
K.
CH 2 -CH 2
CIS
ch 3
++
2 Br
,CHr-CH 2 ^ ( j ,H 3"l ++
\,
N 'N
^° H CH2 R trans
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VI
CH-
VIII
(+) (-)
cis-cis IX
(+) (-)
cis-trans
C6HSI
C.H.—N-K>
CH 3 II
§2c] STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
SOME ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON 147
1908, Meisenheimer resolved
ethylmethylphenylamine oxide, I,
and this was then followed by the
resolution of other amine oxides,
e.g., ethylmethyl-1-naphthylamine
oxide, II, and kairoline oxide, III.
IV V
also account for the optical activity
of these compounds as well as the
tetrahedral. Consequently these
compounds cannot be used as a
criterion for the pyramidal or
tetrahedral configuration of the
nitrogen atom. However, by analogy
with the quaternary ammonium
salts, the configuration of amine
oxides may be accepted as
tetrahedral. Further evidence for
this is as follows. The electronic
configuration of nitrogen is (ls 2 )
(2s 2 )(2^> 3 ). For nitrogen to be
quinquevalent, the " valence state "
will be derived from the
arrangement (ls 2 )(2s)(2^> 3 )(3s).
Now the amount of energy required
to promote an electron from a 2s to
a 3s orbital appears to be too large
for it to occur, and consequently
nitrogen is (apparently) never
quinquevalent. The valence state of
nitrogen is thus achieved by the
loss of one 2s electron and then
hybridisation of the 2s and 2p 3
orbitals, i.e., nitrogen becomes
quadricovalent unielectrovalent,
and the four bonds (sp 3 bonds) are
arranged tetrahedrally. The charged
nitrogen atom is isoelectronic with
carbon, and so one can expect the
formation of similar bonds.
Furthermore, evidence obtained by
an examination of the vibration
frequencies of the ammonium ion
indicates that the configuration of
this ion is tetrahedral. Recently,
Bennett and Glynn (1950) have
obtained two geometrical isomers
of 1:4-diphenylpiperazine dioxide;
this is readily explained on the
tetrahedral configuration of
nitrogen (c/. §2a).
000C6H6
cis trans
yCgHs
flk-
CH,
by chromatographic adsorption on
D-lactose (cf. §10 vi. II). In this
compound, the nitrogen is
tervalent, but the frequency of
osculation has been brought to zero
by having the three valencies of
nitrogen as part of the ring system.
Ar^ ^R Arv. /R
» ii
V VI
Ar.. Ar. CH 3
^C=NOCH 3 ^C=1T
BT R^ "^O
VII VIII
'C e H 5
*>-CH 3 -C 6 H 4 . .C 6 H 6 />-CH 3
-C 6 H 4 \
^OCH 3 CH 3 Cr
IX X
/.-CHsCeH^ ^C 6 H 5 p-CHj-C.H^
^C^
3 kj w <jxa 3
XI XII
§2e] STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
SOME ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON 151
Ar \ G /' 11 Ar \ G / R ^c^* Ar \ c /R
II =^~ II and II ^~ II
^OH H^ ^O HO^ O^ ^H
It is possible, however, that none of
the nitrone form is present, but its
methyl derivative is formed during
the process of methylation. If we
assume that methyl sulphate
provides methyl carbonium ions,
then it is possible that these ions
attack the nitrogen atom (with its
lone-pair) or the oxygen atom (with
its two lone-pairs). This would
result in the formation of the N-
and O-methyl ethers, without
having to postulate the existence of
the oximino-nitrone tautomeric
system.
| + CHS
J.
Ar \ c / R Ar \ c / R Ar \ c / R
+ CH 3 + -
-H +
CH,
H CH^-CH, OH H GHrCH^
H0 2 CT ^CHg-CHg H0 2 Cr ^CHg-
CH^
XHIa XIII6
N—O bond is not collinear with the
C=N double bond), the
configuration is XHIa, and it will
therefore be optically active. If,
however, the three nitrogen
valencies are coplanar and
symmetrically placed, then the
configuration will be XIII&, and
this will not be optically active,
since it possesses a plane of
symmetry. Mills and Bain (1910)
prepared this oxime and resolved it;
hence its configuration must be
Xllla. This is readily explained on
the modern theory of valency (§2c).
Co Hi
*\rt/
H
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
C 6 H 5 \ JR /»-CH 3 -C 6 H 4X
oc
[CH. VI
'Q»Hi
'6*1-5
syn
^OH
HO^"
N II
anti
HO
III
*v*
Ar,
N-OCOCH 3
syn-
Ar x M
^-OH
Ar
Na a CO,
>-
CH 3 -COON
anti-
C + CH 3 -C0 2 H
02N
NaOll
O.N
02N
0,N
0,N
Na 2 C0 3
STEREOCHEMISTRY OF SOME
ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON
153
§2g]
cr —>-
Nu 2 COj
Ar x
Ar'
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VI
Ar V/ R
NN
MDH
•N
AC
°V*
NHAr
Ar ^/ E
/N
HCK
Ar v -OH
*L
^R
A N/-° i
NHR
C 6 H 5 -C
■N.
X 0^
c-c 6 h 6 K
■ C-C 6 H 5 CpH 5 coci C 6H 5 "C-
O "0-COC 6 H 5
II
ijiii
-OC 6 H 5 II O
III
C 6 H 5 -C-CO-C 6 H 5 pc.
III
^OH
O=C-CO0 6 H 6 NHC 6 H 5
IV
C 6 H 5 -C CC 9 H S ozonolysis C 6
H 5 -C-COC„H 5
II II —+■
N ^CC0 2 H &
V III
§2g] STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
SOME ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON 156
02N
HO-^
VII
NaOH
OoN
^ H » /OH
C6
OH iCOsH
VIII
IX
CH,-
CH*
-CH 2 ,CH 2
H,so 4
CH 2 CH 2
iI
N CH 2
CHo CHo
II
NH _CH 2 ^•CO
NOH
On the other hand, Hill et al. (1956)
have shown that the oximes of
some spiro-ketones undergo
abnormal Beckmann
rearrangements in the presence of
polyphosphoric acid, e.g., spiro-[4 :
4]-nonanone-l-oxime gives hydrind-
8: 9-en-4-one:
NOH
CH«\ pcu
^C=NOH -^^*-
-h 2 o
C 6 H— C-H ^C 6 H 5 -NH-CHO+ C
6 H 5 CONH 2
syn -isomer
C fi H 5 -C—H
N
HO'
anti- isomer
-*-C 6 H 5 -CO-NH 2
§2h] STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
SOME ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON 157
§2h. Mechanism of the Beckmann
rearrangement. This rearrangement
is an example of the 1,2-shift in
which the migration origin is
carbon and the migration terminus
is nitrogen (see also 1,2-shifts, Vol.
I, Ch. V). As we have seen above
(§2g), an integral part of the
rearrangement is the anti migration
of the group. Since the oxime itself
does not rearrange, it is reasonable
to suppose that some intermediate
is formed between the oxime and
the reagent used to effect the
rearrangement, and it is this
intermediate which then
rearranges. Kuhara et M. (1914,
1916) prepared the
benzenesulphonate of
benzophenone oxime and showed
that this readily underwent
rearrangement in neutral solvents
in the absence of any acid catalyst
to give an isomeric compound
which, on hydrolysis, gave
benzanilide and benzenesulphonic
acid; thus:
Ph Ph Ph-CONHPh
Ph-CCl=NPh + AgOSCyPh -► I +
AgCl
PhMeCH-C-Me w ao 0=C-Me
II -^> I
NOH HN-CHMePh
Ml
R'
R
/*
YO
+ OY"
/*'
H.O
VR'
-I
NHR
R>
R'
I -C
III --N
+ OY"
V 0Y
N
a bridged-ion. It might also be
noted that when acid is used as the
rearranging reagent, OY is probably
OH 2 +. Support for this
mechanism is the evidence
obtained for the intermediate
formation of the imidoyl ester (RN
= CR-OY); compound II was
obtained by Heard el al. (1959), who
examined the rearrangement of a
17-keto-16-oxime (a steroid; Ch.
XI):
yys
OAc
OAo
OPCh
+ 0PC1 4 "
Ph V ora <
JH.O
§2i] STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
SOME ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON 159
2R 2 C=NOH
-HjO
(R 2 C=N—) 2 0
anhydride
HC1.
R\
CR 2 N
cr
-HCl
RC
► II RN
£p*
.0.
RC
II RN
CR
II NR
HCl
anhydride salt
RCC1 0=CR
- II + I RN NHR
-R
ketoxime imidate
It is also suggested that other
reagents which effect the
Beckmann rearrangement may
function as dehydrating agents for
the formation of the ketoxime
anhydride.
N0 2
III
II II II
.N' N N
IV V VI
II II
CeH 5 C 6 H 5
syn-azobenzene <z«tt'-azobenzene
C 6 H b ^ n C « H «^ N
II II
C 6 Hf ^O O^ ^C 6 H 6
§3a] STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
SOME ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON 161
E,
II
^NH-R
YY
*r
N N .N
AX
§3. STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
PHOSPHORUS COMPOUNDS
CH 3 QH 3
II
C 6 H 5 — P=0 C 6 H 5 —P = 0
C 2 H 6 OH 2 -C 6 H 5
I II
oxide, I, and
benzylmethylphenylphosphine
oxide, II. Recent measurements of
the P—0 (and As—O) bond length
indicate that this bond is a double
bond.
Me OEt
I.
OMe SH
NH-C 10 H 19 (-) C 6 H 6
OC 2 H 5 OC 2 H 5
(C 6 H 5 ) S Q—P— O— P— C(C 6 H
5)3
II " II
oo
labcdF]+X- ^ abcV + dX
^+
CH i /P Nj g HiOH( /> ).
VI
The resolution of 3-covalent
compounds of phosphorus does not
prove that the phosphorus atom has
a tetrahedral configuration; it only
proves that the phosphorus atom
cannot be in the same plane as the
other four groups
Br"
VII
HN—P=0
§4. STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
ARSENIC COMPOUNDS
CH,
CzHg
1-C
11+
0 H 7 —As—CeH I
I-C10H7
CH2 C 6 H 5 I
I CH^'CgHs
II
naphthylphenylarsonium iodide, I,
that had a rotation of +12°, but
race-mised rapidly (in solution).
Similarly, Kamai (1933) isolated the
(-f)-form of benzylethyl-1-naphthyl-
w-propylarsonium iodide, II, which
also racemised rapidly in solution.
This rapid racemisation is believed
to be due to a " dissociation-
equilibrium " in solution. This
explanation was suggested by Pope
and Harvey (1901) to account for
the racemisation of certain
ammonium salts, but definite
evidence for this theory was
provided by Burrows and Turner
(1921) in their work on arsonium
salts. If this dissociation-
equilibrium occurs, then in solution
there will be:
CH 3
I CHj—As + C 2 H S I
CeH 5
CH 3 CHr-As-C 2 H 5 C 6 H 6
CH 3
As—C 2 H 5 + CH3I
C «H 6
CH 3
CHj-As + CH3I
I C6H5
CH 3
CH 3 -As—CH 3 I
CH.
VH*
.CJI S
III
Br"
§4b] STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
SOME ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON 165
CH 3
C 2 H S —As=S
Clfc-As^CgHs r -i-
| * 0-C 6 H 2 (N0 2 ) 3
CIV-A^-C 6 H 5 u -'t
CB.{ ^C^-CHaCHij-CHa
C 6 H5 /CHj-CHg-CHg-CH,
CH^A8=S
VI
C e H s /CHg-CHa-CHisCHs
| ^PdCl 2
CH 2 —Aa ^
C 6 H^ X CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -CH 3 VII
► Br"
VIII
the optically stable arsonium
compound III. These authors, in
1945, also resolved an arsonium
compound of the spiran type, viz.,
As-spiro-bis-1:2:3: 4-tetrahydro-
isoarsinolinium bromide, VIII. This
does not contain an asymmetric
arsenic atom; the optical activity is
due to the asymmetry of the
molecule (the two rings are
perpendicular to each other), and
this is evidence that the four
valencies of arsenic are arranged
tetrahedrally (see also §4b). Mann
et al. (1960) have also resolved
compound IX.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VI
C0 2 H CH
CO,H
CH 3 C 2 H 5
II
I"
III
X) v . . .0.
C0 2 H
CO,H
as <f X C 6 H 5
§4b] STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
SOME ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON 167
OCH,
CH,
Sv
CO2H
Vb
COjH
R-As
SR'
OH
OH" /
+ 2H a O »5==^ R-As
\ H+ \
SR' OH
+ 2R'SH
VII
VIII
pointed out that evidence obtained
from models constructed to scale
showed that the two ^>-tolyl
radicals (T) in VIII would almost be
coincident, and hence this isomer
cannot exist. These authors isolated
two optically inactive forms, but
were unable to say which was
which. When each compound was
treated with bromine, both gave the
same tetrabromide which, on
hydrolysis, gave only one
tetrahydroxide. The loss of
isomerism in the tetrabromide (and
in the tetrahydroxide) may be
explained as follows. Bromination
of VI and VII converts tercovalent
arsenic into quinque-covalent
arsenic, and in the latter state the
ring valency angles of the arsenic
become 120°, and so the arsanthren
nucleus is now planar. Thus both
the
§5a] STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
SOME ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON 169
CO.H
H0 2 C
§5. STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
SULPHUR COMPOUNDS
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VI
is tercovalent unielectrovalent in
sulphonium salts, and the valency
disposition is (s£ 8 ), one orbital
being occupied by a lone-pair of
electrons (Fig. 3). This molecule is
not superimposable on its mirror
image, and hence can, at least
theoretically, exist in two optically
active forms. This bromide was
treated with silver (+)-
camphorsulphonate and the salt
/'\
/'v
/'s
''J\
CH 3 ^V-- -^CH 2 C0 2 H
C2H5
Fig. 6.3.
CH$v AHf
S—CH,j-CO-C 6 H 5
0 2 N|
with an [<x] D of +8-1° and the
other -9-2°. A more recent example
of an optically active sulphonium
salt is one with the sulphur atom in
a ring; this compound, II, was
obtained as the optically active ion
with the picrate Mann and
Holliman, 1946).
CH,
CH5
/8-CH2-CO-CeH 4 Cl(/))
/'
Br
II
§5c] STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
SOME ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON 171
Since [(+)E(—)A] is greater than
[(—)E(—)A], it therefore follows
that (+)E r is less than (—)E r ; thus
a partial resolution has occurred.
The unchanged ester, having a
lower boiling point than the new
ester, distilled off first; this
contained more of the (—)-form.
The residual ester (the higher
boiling fraction) was then heated
with a large excess of ethanol;
ajcoholysis again occurred, this
time the (—)-alcohol (menthol or
octyl) being displaced to regenerate
the original ethyl *-
toluenesulphinate. This resulted in
a fraction containing more of the
(+)-form.
C 6 H 4 -CH,(/>)
,S
C.H5O-
S
CjHsO^^Ce^-CH,^) O
II
C0 2 H
H2N
S=0
CH
s=o
CHf=CH-CH^
CH 3
S=0
III
C0 2 H
CH 3 — S
S—CH,
OO
//
,CH 2 —CIL
S CH— CH 2 >
as
X 2 <^X1 2
trans
O
°"\^
cc-form
S"
p-form
It is of interest to note, in
connection with optically active
sulphoxides, that Schmid and
Karrer (1948) have isolated
sulphoraphen from its glycoside
which occurs in radish seed. These
authors showed that sulphoraphen
is a lsevorotatory oil which owes its
optical activity to the presence of a
sulphoxide group.
§5d. Sulphilimines.
sulphilimines, e.g.,
C0 2 H
CH 3 <^^-S(Vn' + :S
CH
o~
■SOg-N-
+ NaCl
§6] STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
SOME ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON 173
C0 2 H
CH 3 ^_\—S0 2 -N=S
Y I II O
III
R 2 S=0 R—S—OR'
II 11a O
Ilia
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
«-C 3 H 7 ^C 3 H 7 -k
[CH. VI
_ C 2 Hr c 2 h 5 ^
HOaS^^CHg-^Si—O—Si^-
CHa^^SOaH
»-C 3 H 7 C 3 H 7 -«
II
C 2 H 5 CH,
Si / \ «-C 3 H 7 CH
III
i<f^Vo 3 H
C,H K
H0 2 C
CKL ,C 2 H 6
w-C 3 H 7
C 2 H/ x Br
r ~~l +
^Se-CHjj-COjjH PtCl„ C 6 H 6
§10] STEREOCHEMISTRY OF
SOME ELEMENTS OTHER THAN
CARBON
CH Z X CH 2 ^^
CH,<C^
CH 3
Te: I
READING REFERENCES
CHAPTER VII
CARBOHYDRATES
CHO
H-
CHO
-OH
HO-
-H
0H 2 OH D (+) -glyceraldehyde
CHO O CHO 0
D-series L-series
Aldotetroses. The structural
formula of the aldotetroses is CH 2
OH-CHOH-CHOH-CHO. Since this
contains two unlike asymmetric
carbon atoms, there are four
CHO
0O 2 H
-H-CHO
-OH-,
CH 2 OH
CHO
H-H-
-OH H-
, ,[0]
-OH H-
-OH -OH
HO-H-
-H HO-
[QI -OH H-
COjH CH 2 OH
CH 2 OH D(-)-threose II
176
C0 2 H -H -OH
C0 2 H
§1]
CARBOHYDRATES
177
CHO-CHOH-CHOH-CHOH-CH 2
OH,
D-erythrose
1
CHO
CHO
H-H-H-
r D-threose — n II I
CHO CHO
-H H-
-OH HO--OH H-
DH
CH 2 OH arabinose IV
-H -H -OH
CH 2 OH
D(+)-xylose V
CH 2 OH
D(—)-]yxose VI
H-H-H-
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH
Therefore V
VII
is
the latter gives an optically active
dicarboxylic acid, D-xylose and VI is
D-lyxose.
CHO
OHO
CHO
CHO
H-H-H-
CH 2 OH III
-H H-
-OH HO--OH H-
-H -H -OH
CH 2 OH IV
CH 2 OH V
CH«OH VI
Sm\
IV
/\
COjjH
H-H-H-H-
-OH HO-
-OH H-
-OH H-
-OH H-
C0 2 H
-H
C0 2 H
inactive
CO2H
CO.H
H-
HO-
H-
H-
*0H HO-
-H HO-
-OH H-
-OH H-
-H -H -OH -OH
C0 2 H
active
C0 2 H
active
C0 2 H active
/X
/V\
C0 2 H
H-
H-
HO-
H-
-OH HO--OH H-
C0 2 H -H -OH
-H -OH
HO-H-
C0 2 H
-H -OH
H-HO-HO-
H-
C0 2 H
HO-H-
-H -H -H -OH
C0 2 H
active
C0 2 H
active
C0 2 H inactive
C0 2 H
active
§1]
CARBOHYDRATES
179
CHO-CHOH-CHOH-CHOH-CHOH-
CHjOH, and since it contains four
unlike asymmetric carbon atoms,
there are sixteen optically active
forms (eight pairs of
enantiomorphs). All are known, and
may be prepared by stepping up the
aldopentoses: D-ribose gives D(+)-
allose and D(+)-altrose; D-
arabinose gives D(+)-glucose and
D(-f)-mannose; D-xylosegivesD(—)-
guloseandD(—)-idose;andD-
lyxosegivesD(+)-galactose and
D(+)-talose.
CHO
H— H —
H-H-
CHO
-OH HO-
-OH H-
-OH H-
-OH H-
CH 2 OH D(+)-allose VII
-H OH -OH -OH
CH 2 OH
D(+)-altrose VIII
D-arabinose IV
CHO
H-
HO-
H-
H-
CHO
-OH -OH
H-H-
-H -H -OH -OH
CH 2 OH D(+)-glucose IX
CH 2 OH D(+)- mannose X
H-
H-
HO-
H-
rD -xylose —. V |
CHO
-H -OH
CH 2 OH
D(—)-gulose XI
CHO
-OH HO--OH H-
HO-H-
-H -OH -H -OH
CH 2 OH D(—)-idose XII
H-HO-HO-
H-
. D-lyxose —.
I VI |
CHO
-OH HO
-H
-H
-OH
CH 2 OH
D(+)-galactose XIII
CHO
HO-HO-
H-
-H -H -H -OH
CH 2 OH
D(+)-talose XIV
VII and VIII must be allose and
altrose, but which is which? On
oxidation with nitric acid, the
former gives an optically inactive
(allomucic) and
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
CH 2 OH I CO
HO-H-H-
-H CH.NHNH; HQ-
-OH -OH
H-H-
CH=N-NH-C 6 H 5
C =N-NH-C 6 H 6 H-
— H CgH.-NH-NHa HO
-OH H-
CHO
-OH
H-
-OH
-H
-OH
-OH
CH 2 OH
Df—l-fructose XV
CH 2 OH
osazone
CH 2 OH D(+)-glucose
[hydrolysis
CHO
I CO
HO-H-H-
-H
-OH
-OH
CH 2 OH osone
§2]
CARBOHYDRATES
181
CHjjOH
CH.OH
CH 2 OH
GO
CO
CO
H-
HO-
H-
-OH -H
HO-
HO-
-OH
H-
-H -H
HO-
-OH
HO-HO-
-H -H -H
CH 2 OH D(+)-sorbose
CH 2 OH
D(+)-tagatose
CH 2 OH
L(-)-psicose
H-
HO-
H-
H-
Mechanism of mutarotation.
According to Lowry (1925),
mutarota-tion is not possible
without the presence of an
amphiprotic solvent, i.e., a solvent
which can function both as an acid
and a base, e.g., water. Thus Lowry
and Faulkner (1925) showed that
mutarotation is arrested in pyridine
solution (basic solvent) and in
cresol solution (acidic solvent), but
that it takes place in a mixture of
pyridine and cresol. It has been
assumed that when mutarotation
takes place, the ring opens and then
recloses in the inverted position or
in the original position. There is
some evidence for the existence of
this open-chain form. The
absorption spectra of fructose and
sorbose in aqueous solution
indicate the presence of open-chain
forms; aldoses gave negative results
(Bednarczyk et al., 1938). Solutions
of glucose and arabinose in 50 per
cent, sulphuric acid gave an
ultraviolet absorption spectrum
containing the band characteristic
of the oxo (carbonyl) group (Pascu
et al., 1948). Aldoses in solution
contain a form which is reducible at
the dropping mercury electrode
(Cantor et al., 1940). Although the
nature of this reducible form has
not been established, it is probably
the open-chain form, either free or
hydrated. Furthermore, a
relationship was shown to exist
between the amount of this
reducible form and the rate of
mutarotation. One interpretation of
this observation is that the
reducible form is an intermediate in
mutarotation. Rate constants for
the conversion of the ring forms of
aldoses to the open-chain form
have been calculated from
polarographic measurements, and it
has also been shown that the
energy of activation required to
open the pyranose ring is the same
for glucose, mannose, galactose,
arabinose and xylose (Delahay et
al., 1952). The formation of this
acyclic intermediate during
mutarotation has been confirmed
by isotopic evidence (Goto et al.,
1941) and by further polarographic
evidence
HO-C—H (CHiCO^o^CHs-CO-O-C-
H
II
II
CH 2 OH CHjjO-CO-CHs
glucose dimethyl
mercaptal
HjO/CdCO, tt r,
CHO I H—G—0-C0-CH g
CH 3 -CO-0—C—H I H—C—0-CO-
CH 3
H—C—O-CO-CHs
CHijO-CO-CHs
6hoh
i!'
(ii) Mutarotation.
(iii) Glucose and other aldoses do
not give certain characteristic
reactions of aldehydes, e.g., Schiff's
reaction, do not form a bisulphite or
an aldehyde-ammonia compound.
Recently, however, it has been
shown that by preparing Schiff's
reagent in a special way, it becomes
very sensitive, simple aldoses
restoring the pink colour to this
solution; the monosaccharide
aldoses react strongly, but the
disaccharide aldoses react weakly
(Tobie, 1942). This reaction with a
sensitive Schiff's reagent appears to
indicate that some, although a very
small amount, of the open-chain
form of a sugar is present in
solution in equilibrium with the
two ring-forms.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
H—C—OCH 3
H—C—OH I HO—C —H
H—C-
O
H—C-
H— C—OH
CH 2 OH
methyl a-D-glucos,ide
H—C—OH
I CH 2 OH
methyl (3-D-glucoside
H—Cr-OH HO— C— H
II ! I
ct-isomer p-isomer
I II
H—C—OH
I H— C—OH
HO—C—H I H—C—OH o
J I II
III IV
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
§5. Hudson's lactone rule. Hudson
(1910) studied the rotation of the
lactones derived from the aldonic
acids. Using the usual projection
formulae, the lactone ring will be
on the right or left according as the
hydroxyl group on C 4 (i.e., the y-
hydroxyl group) is on the right or
left, i.e., according as C 4 has a
dextro or Isevo configuration:
■93—
H—C 4 -
-f
—a—
-9 3 —
-C„—H
dextrorotatory
lsevorotatory
-OR
+A+B
BO—0—H
-—4
-A
O
+B
„ „ /?- „ = - A + B
i1i1I
CHOH ? + CH » OH — c^HOH ?
W>+ CHOCH, ?+AgI
a3
Purdie's method is only applicable
to glycosides and other derivatives
in which the reducing group is
missing or has been protected by
substitution. Methylation of a free
reducing sugar by this method
would result in the oxidation of that
sugar by the silver oxide.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
C0 2 H
H-
CH 3 0-
H-
-OCH 3 -H
-OCH 3
C0 2 H
VI
compound is the key to the
determination of the size of the ring
in the sugar. One of the carboxyl
groups in VI must be that which is
combined in the formation of the
lactone ring in the
tetramethylgluconolactone, V. The
other carboxyl group is almost
certainly the one that has been
derived from the non-methylated
carbon atom, i.e., from the CHOH
group that is involved in the ring
formation in the sugar. Therefore
there must be three methoxyl
groups in the lactone ring. Thus the
lactone cannot be a y-lactone, and
consequently C 5 must be involved
in the ring formation. It therefore
follows that the lactone, V, must be
2 : 3 : 4 : 6-tetra-O-methyl-D-
glucono-lactone. Working
backwards from this compound,
then IV must be 2:3:4: 6-tetra-O-
methyl-D-glucose, III methyl 2:3:4:
6-tetra-O-methyl-D-glucoside, II
methyl D-glucopyranoside, and I D-
glucopyranose (see §7f for the
significance of the term pyranose).
It should be noted that the question
as to whether the sugar is a or /S
has been ignored; starting with
either leads to the same final
results. The foregoing experimental
results can now be represented by
the following equations:
H-
110-
II-
H-
CHOH
-OH
H-
chsQh/hci
-H O reflux HO-
OHOCH3
-OH
-OH
H-H-
H-
-OH
H-
H-
CH 2 OH I
CH 2 OH II
CHjjOCHs III
§Va]
CARBOHYDRATES
189
HC!
H-■*- CH s O -
H-H-
CHOH
-OCH,
-H O *- CH3O
-OCH,
CHjOCHj IV
HH
CH 2 OCH 3 V
HNOj
H-
CH3O-
H-
H-
C0 2 H
-OCH3 -H
-6ch 3
-OH
CH 2 OCH,
H-
HNO»
CH3O-
H-
C0 2 H
-OCH 3
-H
-OCH,
COjjH VI
CO,H
H-
CH s O-
H-
H-
C0 2 H
-OCH, -H
-OCH, -OCH,
H-
-+- CH3O-
H-
H
CH 2 OH VII
-OCH3
-H
-OCH3
-OCH3
C0 2 H VIII
(CHOH) 4 n _ (CHOH) 3 O
CH 2 OH CH '
CHjOH
i PhN * > ■ c; /H
CHOH |^ N _ N .^
! CHOH X Ph
§7c]
CARBOHYDRATES
191
H-HO-
CHOH -OH -H
H-H-
CHOCH3
CH«OH/HCI^
0 s **
H-HO-
-OH
H-H-
-OH -H
CHOCH.
(CHjfcSO.
H-
NaOH
-OH
CHsO-H-H-
-OCHj -H
GH 2 OH D-glucofuranose
CH 2 OH I
-OCH 3
CH 2 OCH $ II
GHOH
H-
HCl
CH s O-H-H-
-OCH3 , H
-H
-OCH.
900 CH3O H H-
GH2OCH3 III
COgH
H-CH3O-
-OCH 3 -H
C0 2 H V
CHaOOHj IV
I j/-mannolactone
II y-galactonolactone
III y-gluconolactone
IV <5-mannonolactone
V <5-gluconolactone
VI rf-galactonolactone
12 3 4 5 6 7 3 Time in days
9 iO
FIG. 7.1.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
OHO CO 1 i CO
H-HO-IIO-
H-
-OH
-H -H
-OH
CH 2 OH
CHijOCHj
I is L(+)-arabinopyranose, and
since it is dextrorotatory, the ring
has been drawn to the right. This
way of drawing the projection
formula is based on the observation
of Haworth and Drew (1926), who
pointed out that if a ring in a sugar
is 1 : 5- (i.e., d-), then Hudson's
lactone rule holds good for sugars
as for y-lactones.
II is 2 : 3 : 4-tri-O-methyl-L-
arabinose.
OHOH
H-HO-
HO-
-OH
-H
-H
CH 2 -I
H-CH 3 0-
CH 3 0-
CHOH -OCH3 -H -H
CH 2 -II
§7e]
CARBOHYDRATES
193
GO
Br,/H,Q 90° *
H-CH 3 C-CH s O-
-OCH3
-H
-H
C0 2 H
HNO s
CH 2 -III
H-CH3O-CH 3 0-
-OCH3
-H
-H
C0 2 H IV
III is 2 : 3 : 4-tri-O-methyl-L-
arabinolactone; it is a 6-lactone as
shown by oxidation to IV, and also
by the fact that it is of the type that
is readily hydrated.
IV is 2 : 3 : 4-L-
arabinotrimethoxyglutaric acid (this
is the key compound).
V is L-arabinofuranose.
VI is 2 : 3 : 5-tri-O-methyl-L-
arabinose.
VII is 2 : 3 : 5-tri-O-methyl-L-
arabinolactone (Hudson's lactone
rule, and is slow-changing type).
CHOH
H-HO-
CHOH
-OH "FT—
(QCH.QH/HC1; 18°^ q
(iii) HC1 S
-H
CH 2 OH V
-OCH, -H
CH2OCH3 VI
Br a /H,Q^
C0 2 H
HNOs
H-
CH3O-
-OCH3
-H
CH 2 OCH, VII
C0 2 H VIII
HO-H-H-
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
CHgOH
c=o
[CH. VII
-H
-OH
-OH
CH 2 OH I
CHgOH—C—OH
HO-
H-H-
-H
-OH
-OH
-CH
II
a-form
HO— C — CH 2 OH HO— C —
OHijOH
HO-H-H-
-H
-OH
-OH
HO-H-H-
CH 2
III
p-form
-H -OH
CHjjOH
IV p-form
V is j8-d(— )-fructopyranose.
VI is methyl /J-D-fructopyranoside.
X is 2 : 3 : 4-tri-O-methyl-D-
arabinolactone; this is a quick-
changing lactone, and is therefore a
^-lactone.
XI is D-arabinotrimethoxyglutaric
acid.
HO—C—CHgOH
HO-O H-H-
1
CH 3 0—C—CH 2 OH
HO-
O H-
-OH
•GHi! V
H-
-H
-OH
-OH
(CH,),SO« NaOH
-CH|j
VI
§7e]
CHjO—C—CHjOCHg
CARBOHYDRATES
195
CH3O-
H-H-
-H
-OCH3 -OCH 3
HCl
-CH.
VII
HO—C—CH«OGH 3
CH3O-
H-H-
-H
-OCH s
-OCH s
HNO,
-CH 2
VIII
HO—C —C0 2 H 0H 3 O-
H-H-
H CH s O
OCH, h»so 4
-OCH 3
H-H-
-CH 2 IX
CO-
-H
-OCH, -OCHj
q HNO t>
CH 3 0-
CH 2 -X
H-
H-
CO.H
-H
-OCH3
-OCH,
C0 8 H XI
XII is j8-D-fructofuranose.
HO—C— CHjjOH
HO-
H-H-
-H -OH
HO— C-CHgOCHs
CH 2 OH XII
H-
H-
-H -OCH,
CH 2 OCH, XIII
HNO.
HO—C—COjH
CH,0-H-H-
-H O -OCH.
KMnCv HjSO«
CH,0-H-H-
CH 2 OCH, XIV
CO-
-H -OCH,
CH,0-
HNOa
H-
CO.H
-H -OCH,
CH 2 OCH, XV
C0 2 H XVI
XV is 2 : 3 : 5-tri-O-methyl-D-
arabinolactone; this is a slow-
changing lactone, and so is y-.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
.CH=CH ^ CH 2 N CH=CH
I
/°
H— C —OH
H-
HO-
H-
H-
H—C—OH
HO
H
HOCH
-OH
-H
-OH ■ i
-h y
-OH
-H -OH
O
CH.jOH II
HOCH 2
IV
0.
VI
VII
CARBOHYDRATES
197
CH 3 0— C—H
^ // CH-CH
VIII
H-
HO-
H-
H-
-OH
-H
-OH
CH 2 OH IX
CH 3 0—C—H 1 H-
HO-CH 2 OH-CHOH-
-oh! o -h !
-h ;
Two other examples which
illustrate the conversion into the
perspective formula are:
fcH 2 OH -C— OH
HO-
O H-H-
^-H
±- OH
-OH
-CH,
HOCH— C— OH HOCH 2 —C—OH
!
HO-H-
H-
-H
-OH
-OH
CH 2
HO-H-H-H-
-H
O1
-OH '
-OH
-H
[CH. VII
CH 2 OH
CH s O-r C
CH 3 0—C— CH 2 OH
HO-H-H-
-H -OH
1 CH3O- C—CHjOH! 1
HO
HOCH,
-H
-OH -H
CH»OH
CH,OH
OCH s
^HgOH
R-CHOH-CHOH-R'
R-CHOH-COR'
R-COCOR'
lHIO,
1H10.
1H10.
H—C—OCH 3
H—C—OH
HO—C—H
H—C—OH
O 2H10«
H—C-
I
H-
*- HC0 2 H +
•C—OCH3
I CHO
0 B^/HnO^
CHO
CHgOH I
H— C<
SrCO,
CHgOH II
H—C—OCH 3
I O— CO
-co
H—C-
CHgOH III
H-
C0 2 H
C0 2 H
IV
+ C0 2 H I C— OH
I CH 2 OH
H—C—OCH 3 0
VI
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
H—C—OCH 3 HO—C—II
H—C—OH
+
H— C—OH
II —C—OCH 3
2H1Q 4
>■ HCOoH +
VII
CHO
CIIO I CH 2 -
VIII
H—C—OCH3 H—C—OH
—H
HO—C—H I H— C-
O
2HIQ 4 .
H-
H-
r -o-
-OCH,
CHO
CHO
-c—
o
H—C—OH
CH 2 OH
CHO
+ H-CHO
H—C—OCH3 HO—C—H
H—C—OH
I H—C
CH 2 OH IX
1H1O4
H—C—OCH3 CHO
CHO
H— C-
CH<
II
OH
OH H-4-
CH 3 0—C—H
CH 9 -
OCH—C—H
I
OHo
or
II
-OL H
L;
II a
I
OH
OCH,
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
Ov
0-
CI
IC
,CH 2 OH
HO
We have also seen that the more
stable isomer is the one with the
larger number of equatorial
substituents, and so the /S-form
can be expected to be more stable
than the a-. Whiffen et al. (1954)
have used infra-red spectroscopy to
distinguish between a- and jS-
anomers; the absorption maxima
depend on the axial or equatorial
conformation of hydroxyl groups.
(i) CHOMe
H CH-^b+Me
+ H s O+:
fast
CH-
CH
slow
-*-MeOH
+ CH
CH-
fast
CHOH
'I J
CH—'
+ H+
CH—
»*« ■* j | >- i
.HOH
A*.
ii
ii
H 8 0—CH—OMe CHOH
H,0 | 1^.
I<
CHOH CH—I
gives a trimethylglucose, V.
Methylation of V gives a methyl
tetramethyl-glucoside, and this, on
hydrolysis, gives 2:3:5: 6-tetra-O-
methyl-D-glucose, VI, a known
compound (see §7b). Thus V must
be 2 : 3 : 5-, 2 : 3 : 6-, or 3:5: 6-tri-O-
methyl-D-glucose. Now V forms an
osazone without loss of any methyl
group; therefore C 2 cannot have a
methoxyl group attached to it, and
so V must be 3 : 5 : 6-tri-O-methyl-
D-glucose. Thus one wopro-
pylidene radical in di-
wopropylideneglucose, I, must be 3
: 5-, 3 : 6- or 5 : 6-.
Monomethylglucose, III, on
methylation followed by hydrolysis,
gives 2:3:4: 6-tetra-O-methyl-D-
glucose, VII, a known compound
(see §7a). Hence III must be 2-, 3-,
4- or 6-O-methyl-D-glucose. Since
III gives sodium cyanate when
subjected to the Weerman test (see
§11), it therefore follows that C 2
has a free hydroxyl group.
Oxidation of III with nitric acid
produces a monomethylsaccharic
acid; therefore C 6 cannot have a
methoxyl group attached to it. This
monomethylsaccharic acid forms a
lactone which behaves as a y-
lactone; therefore a methoxyl group
cannot be at C 4 . Thus, by the
process of elimination, this
monomethylglucose, III, must be 3-
0-methyl-D-glucose. It therefore
follows that the two isopropylidene
groups in the di-wopropylidene
derivative must be 1 : 2- and 5 : 6-,
the ring being furanose, and the
mono-z'sopropylidene derivative
being 1 : 2-. The foregoing reactions
can be written as on opposite page:
§8]
CARBOHYDRATES
205
H—C-OH
I H-C-OH
HO-C-H
H-C-OH
I H—C
H— C— (\
O
HC1
CH 2 OH «-D(+)-glueose
HO
O-H I H-C
H-C—0 I CH 2 0
)C(CH 3 ) 2
CH,-COjH
H—O
H-C-Q, I J
ch 2 o ii
I HCl
:c(ch s ) 2
H—C—O
I )C(CH 3 )2 H-C—O
I HO—C—H
H-C
I H—C—OH I CHjjOH
IV
)(CHJ,S0 4 i) MCI
H-C-OH
H—C-
I
CH 2 OH III
1(0 f
i)(CHJ,SO« HCI
CHOH
H-C -OCH3
CH3O-C-H I H— C
H-C—OCH3
CH 2 OCH 3 VI
CHOH
I (i)(CHj,so 4 H—C— OH
O (») hci I O
CH3O-C-H
H—C
CHOH
I H-C-OCH3
I CH3O-C-H
I H—C—OCHj
H—C
CH 2 OCH, VII
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
H—C—OH
H— C— OH
HO— C-I
HO—C-I H—C-
-H -H
(CH 3 ) 2 C
H —C—0
I H—C—O'
I ,0— C— H
/C(CH 3 ) 2
-c-
o-
H—C-
-H
CH 2 OH VIII
CH 2 OH IX
CH 2 0 I )C(CH3) 2
-c—o
HO—C—H
(CH 3 ) 2 C N
CH 2 OH I
o-c
O—C —H
H— C— O.
I H—C—O
>(CH 3 ) 2
I H—C— Q,
H-
— 0H 2 1:2-4:5-
-C—O CH.
y C(CH 3 ) 2
2:3-4:5-
CHOH I H-G—OH I
HO-C—H I H— C— u./
H—C-
rv
CH'CgHg
CHOCHj I H-0— OH
I HO—0—H
I H—C—OH
I H—C
CH 2 0 I
CH 2 0-C(CH 6 ) s II
§9]
CARBOHYDRATES
207
H—C—OH I HO-C—H
TsCl
C,H 6 N
H—C—OTs I HO—C—H
OMe
>A
H-=C O—C—H
Ts
-° Ts ~> o X
C—H
I V C—H
III
IV
CH 2 OH
HO
0. OMe
'H OTs H
H OH
V
MeONa .
CH 2 OH
O. OMe
HO
CH 2 OH H J— Ot OMe
OH VII (25%)
VI (60%)
O v OMe
H OH
VIII (15%)
[CH. VII
OCH
OvH
PhCH
OCH,
MeONa
PhCH
OMe OCOPh
IX
OMe
CH 2 OH H /I——O,
CH II
, CH
CHOH 0
HI
or CHOH
I CH
I CH 2 OH
CHBr I CHO-CO-CH 3
CHO-CO-CH 3
I CHO-CO-CH 3
CH
I CH 2 0-CO-CH 3
II
CHOH I CH-NH 2
CHOH
CHOH
I CH
O
I CH 2 OH
III
CARBOHYDRATES
209
-CO—CH-
-C(OH)=C-
~ hci CH CH
C 6 H,0 6 -^ || ||
+ C0 2 + 2H 2 0
HCOH
I =F
C=0 I
Reducing;
forms a
phenylhydrazone
C—OH
II
C—OH
h + 2H 8 Q
Unsaturated;
-2H a Q^
C=0
c=o
C(OH) 2
C(OH)js I
+ 2HI
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
HO>. ^C0 2 H C II
; HO^ ^C0 2 H
Dihydroxymaleic acid
CO
I C(OH) 2
IO
C(OH) 2 |
H—C '
I HO-C—H I CH 2 OH
II
HO—C-H I CHjOH
III
C0 2 H
COjsH
+ C0 2 H
CO-NH 2
CNO
I CHOH
IR
NaOH > CHO + NaNCO I R
CO-KH 2
I NaOCl
■ NaOH I
RR
HO-
CO
I -C
1
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY CO-r
[CH. VII
HO ~ < j ! I CH,N,
H—C 1
HO—C—H
I CH 2 OH
CII3O— c
CH3O— c
H I HO-C—H
CO—1 I CHjO—C
CH3O—C
o3
CH3O-
I -C-
H— C-
-H
CH 2 OH V
CH 2 OCH 3 VI
CH3O — C— H
CH 2 OCH 3 VII
Ba(OH) 2
CONH 2
CONH 2 +
CONH 2 I 2
CH 2 OCH 3 IX
C0 2 H
C0 2 H
+ C0 2 H
H—C—OH I CH3O — C— H
CH 2 0CH 3 VIII
CO COH
CH 2
COH
CH 2 reductic acid tones are not
reduced by lithium aluminium
hydride. Reductones are
compounds which contain the ene-
a-diol-a-carbonyl grouping, —CO—
C(OH)=C(OH)—
CHO
HO—C—H ■
H-C— OH
I HO—C—H
I CH 2 OH
CHO I CO
H—C—OH I HO—C—H
I CH 2 OH
XI
KCN CaCla
CN I CHOH
I CO
H—C—OH I HO-C—H I CH 2 OH
XII
§11]
HoO
COsjH 1
CHOH I CO
H-C—OH I HO—C—H I CH 2 OH
XIII
CARBOHYDRATES
C0 2 H
r oH
C—OH I H—0—OH
HO— C—H I CH 2 OH
213
CO-i
HO " 0
-^£+- HO—C I
-J J
I HO—C—H
CH 2 OH XIV
HO
H-
CH,OH CH a OH CH 2 OH
HOCH
I CHO
D-glucose
H,
Cu-Cr
HOCH
HOCH
I HCOH I HOCH
( + )-sorbitol
2 MeXO
Acetobacter
CO HOCH
suboxydans HCO"H
HOCH
I CH 2 OH
H 2 S0 1
CH 2 OH
(-)-sorbose
KMn0 4
diacetone - (- )-sorbose C0 2 H
CO
H 2 SQ 4 ,
C0 2 Na
HOCH
I HCOH
I HOCH
CH 2 OH
2-ketogulonic-acid
CH 9 0H
h -ascorbic acid
CARBOHYDRATES
215
§13]
H—C
CH 2 OH
CH 2 OH
or
CH 2 OH
„ H CH 2 OH ,.
i_0-i
CH 2 OH
OH H
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
HC=
I HCOH
HOCH O
2-H— HCOH
I HC —
I CH 2 OH
-O-j CH 2 OI
1—f! ,
CH 2 OH HC=r-0-
C 1 CHO
^^HC0 2 H + 0
I HC —
CH 2 OH
CHO I
HC
I CH,OH
CH 2 OH
-C — I CHO
CHO
Hr
CH 2 OH
CHO I C0 2 H
+ C0 2 H
HCOH
I CH 2 OH
+
CH 2 OH
I CO
C0 2 H
C0 2 H I HCOH
I CH 2 OH
CH 2 OAc
° x OAc
'H \i pci 6
OAc H A
AcO \ | |/ H
H OAc I
CH 2 OAc
U/^-~ °\ CI
OAc H.
(i) NH 3 in ether
AcO
H OCOCCI3
§13]
CARBOHYDRATES
217
CH 2 OAc H A— — O x H
AcO
CH 2 OAc
H X~ —-O v OMe
MeOH.
AcO
II
CH 2 OAc
AcO
CH-jOAc
CH 2 OAc
CH 2 OH CH 2 OH
HO-
HO-
H-
H-
OH
-H -OH
CHjjOH
(+)-
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
H—C
O J H— C=J-
CH 2 OH H OH
II OH H
CH 2 OH
5 CHjjOH -Q
HO
§15]
CARBOHYDRATES
219
CHOH
H-
CH 3 0-
H-
H-
-OCH 3 -H
C0 2 H
-OH
[o]
H-CH,0-
H-
H-
CH2OCH3 2:3:6-trimethyl-glucose
-OCH3 -OH
C0 2 H
H-CH s O-
-OH
-OCH3 -H
C0 2 H 2:3-dimethyl-saccharic acid
C0 2 H dimethyl-D-(+)-tartaric acid
GHOH
H-HO-
H-H-
-OH
O
-H
H-C= H-HO-H-H-
CH 2 OH
reducing half
CH 2 OH H J— Q H
-OH -H o -OH
or
CH 2 OH
non-reducing half
CH,OH
"-0
OH
non-reducing half
H-OH
reducing half
HO
HO
H (a-anomer)
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
H-HO-
H-H-
CHOH OH
O
H—C H-
-H
HO-
H-H-
-OH
-H
-OH
O
CH 2 OH
CH 2 OH
II
CHgOH
CH 2 OH
III
CHoOH
CH 2 OCH 3
CH 2 OCH 3
IV
HCl
C0 2 H
H-0H,O-
H-H-
CHOH
-OCH 3
-H
-OH
-OCH 3 GH 2 OCH 3 V
H-
OH 3 0-H-H-
-OCH 3
-H
-OCH 3
CH 2 OOH 3 VI
§16]
CARBOHYDRATES
221
H—C—OH
H-
HO-
H-
H-
-OH -H
OO
H-
HO-
H-
H-
0—H -OH
CH 2 OH
-H -OH
CH 2 OH H J—-O
or
OH
OH
CH 2 OH
CH 2 OH
^ JjCH 2 OH^O
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
CH 2 OH OH J o.
H
OH
CH 2 OH
CH,OH
O OH
CH 2 OH
§18. Melibiose (6-0-a-D-
galactopyranosyl-D-glucopyranose).
This di-saccharide is obtained from
the trisaccharide, raffinose (§20); it
is a reducing
H-
HO-
H-
H-
CHO0H 3 -OH
-H O -Oil
CH 2 OH III
H-HO-
H-H-
CHOOH3
-OH
-H O -OH
CH 2 0-C(C 8 H 5 ) 3 IV
sugar, forms an osazone, and
undergoes mutarotation. When
hydrolysed by dilute acids,
melibiose gives D-glucose and D-
galactose. Methylation converts
melibiose into methyl
heptamethylmelibioside, and this,
on hydrolysis, forms 2:3: 4-
trimethyl-D-glucose and 2:3:4: 6-
tetramethyl-D-galac-
§19]
CARBOHYDRATES
223
CH 8 OH OH 1——(x H
or
0—OH;;
I HO— V— H
H-
HO-
H-
H-
-OH
-H
0O
-OH
CHr
H-
HO-
H-
H-
C—H -OH
H ° -•"• or
-OH
CH 2 OH
-o.
Ur
O—GH 2
OH
OH H
OH
HH
OH
OH II
CHjjOH
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
Manninotriose is the only reducing
trisaccharide that has been isolated
from natural sources. All the others
of this group have been obtained by
degrading polysaccharides or by
synthesis, e.g., cellotriose from
cellulose. Two important non-
reducing trisaccharides are
rafnnose and gentianose.
galactose—glucose—fructose
H 2 OH OHJ n H
OH H
H OH ^-CH 8
CH 2 OH
melibiose part
glucose—glucose—fructose
sucrose part
CH 2 OH
gentiobiose part
CH 2 OH
POLYSACCHARIDES
§21]
CARBOHYDRATES
225
HCl
H-
CHOH -OCH,
CHjO-H-H-
OH a OH
glucose unit
CH 2 OCH 3
-H 0 -OH
CH 2 OCH„
2:3:6-trimethyl-glucose
H-
HO-
H-
H-
I
CHOH
-OH
-H
•C— H
H-
HO-
H-
H-
CH.OH
-OH
-H -OH
cellobiose
CH 2 OH
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
CHOH
H-HO-
H-H-
-OH -H
CH 2 OH
-O-C—H
H-
HO-
H-
H-
-OH -II
r—O—C—H
H-IIO-
H-H-
-OH -II
CH,OH
CH 2 OII
-0-0—H
H-
HO-
II-
H-
-OH
-II
-OH
CH 2 OH
It should be noted that in the
structure given for cellulose, the
first glucose unit in la (i.e., the one
on the left-hand side; this unit is on
the right-hand side in 16) has a free
reducing group, but since this group
is at the end of a very long chain, its
properties tend to be masked; thus
cellulose does not exhibit the strong
reducing properties of the sugars.
In nitrogen In air
\ ■ . 1 ,«__: . J
CXXDOZO I
o::d i
CD CD
By means of chromatography,
McGilvray (1953) has detected
2:3:4:6-tetra-O-methyl-D-glucose in
the hydrolysate after the
methylation of cellulose in an
atmosphere of nitrogen. Thus
degradation of the chain has
occurred under these conditions,
and so there is no evidence for the
linking of the end groups in the
absence of oxygen. Furthermore,
McGilvray determined the degree of
polymerisation from viscosity and
osmotic pressure measurements,
and also from the end-group assay.
The values obtained from the first
two methods were greater than that
obtained from the third method,
and McGilvray suggests these
results may be accounted for by
assuming a slightly branched
structure for the soluble
methylcelluloses.
§22]
CARBOHYDRATES
229
CH 2 OH
CH 2 OH CH 2 OH
maltose unite
CH 2 OH
or
pH 2 OH H J——O v H
H OH
CH 2 OH
A— OH H J— O. H H NJ L/H \
H OH J
CH 2 OH H J—— Q H
OH
H OH
Amylopectin (B-fraction).
Molecular weight determinations of
amylo-pectin by means of osmotic
pressure measurements indicate
values of 50,000 to 1,000,000
(Meyer et al., 1940). Larger values
have also, been reported, e.g.,
Witnauer et al. (1952) have
determined the molecular weight of
potato amylopectin by the method
of light scattering, and report an
average value of 10,000,000 or
more. Let us consider an
amylopectin having an average
molecular weight of 550,000; this
corresponds to about 3000 glucose
units. The end-group assay by
methylation shows the presence of
one unit with four free hydroxyl
groups per 24-30 glucose units; the
same results are also obtained by
the periodate method. Thus the
3000 units are joined in such a
manner as to give about 100 end
units; it therefore follows that the
chain must be branched,. The
problem is further complicated by
the fact that Hirst (1940), after
methylating amylopectin and
hydrolysing the product, obtained,
in addition to tri- and tetra-O-
methyl-D-ghicose, about 3 per cent,
of 2 : 3-di-O-methyl-D-glucose. This
has been taken to mean that some
glucose units are also joined by C t
and C g atoms. Furthermore, in
certain experiments, enzymic
hydrolysis has given a small
amount of 1 : 6 a-linked diglucose,
i.e., womaltose is also present in
amylopectin (Montgomery et al.,
1947, 1949). Wolfrom et al. (1955,
1956) have obtained evidence that
there is also an a-D-1 : 3-bond in
amylopectin; the principal bond is
a-D-1: 4, and branching occurs
through a-D-1 : 6-bonds.
1.
Prolonged methylation of
amylopectin produces a diminution
of the molecular size (as
determined by physical methods);
e.g., methylation of starch
seventeen times changed the
particle size from 3000 glucose
units to 190 units (Averill, 1939).
This diminution in particle size
cannot be due to the break-down of
the basal chains, since the end-
group assay always gives the same
basal chain-length, whether the
methylation is carried out in air or
in an atmosphere of nitrogen.
Haworth therefore suggested that
this diminution in particle size is
due to the " disaggregation " of the
basal chains.
u
n * » x —^maltose + L»
18 f II \ 18
12 4 12 4- 12
* , . ^^
dextrin
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
hydrolysed by |3-amylase to
maltose, and molecular weight
determinations by physical
methods give values between 1 and
2,000,000. The molecular structure
of glycogen appears to be similar to
that of amylopectin; both
polysaccharides have many features
in common. One main difference is
their degree of branching, the
average chain-length in
amylopectin being about 24 glucose
units and in glycogen about 12.
H-
HO-H-H-
CHOH -NH 2 -H -OH
CH 2 OH
H NH-CO-CH 3
CH 2 OH A r -acety]glucosamine
D -glucosamine
iV-Methyl-L-glucosamine is a
component of streptomycin (see §7.
XVIII).
§23a. Photosynthesis of
carbohydrates. The scheme outlined
below is largely that proposed by
Calvin et al. (1954). These authors
exposed certain algae to carbon
dioxide (labelled with 14 C) and
light, then killed the
CH 2 OH CH 2 OH
CO CO
H— H—
—OH HO—!—H
—OH H— —OH
ribulose
H—j—OH
H—:—OH
CH 2 OH sedoheptulose
CHO-(CHOH) s -CHOH-CH 2 OH
oxidat " >n > CHO-(CHOH) 3 -
CHOH-C0 2 H
decarboxylation
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
GLYCOSIDES
CHOH
I (GHOH) 3
I CH
O
H-C—OCO-CH 3
(CHOCOCH 3 ) 3 I CH
CH 2 OH glucose
(CH 3 CO),0;
2nCl 2 /U0°
CH 3 -COO-C-H
1O
(CHO-COCH 3 ) 3
CH
I CH 2 0-COCH 3
p-glucose penta-acetate
These penta-acetates are readily
hydrolysed to glucose by means of
dilute aqueous sodium hydroxide,
ethanolic ammonia at 0°, or by
methanol containing a small
amount of sodium methoxide.
When dissolved in glacial acetic
acid saturated with hydrogen
bromide, the glycosidic acetoxyl
group of a hexose penta-acetate is
replaced by bromine to give an oc-
acetobromo-hexose; the a-isomer is
obtained whether the penta-acetate
used is the a-or ^-compound
(Fischer, 1911). Thus a Walden
inversion occurs with the ^-
compound (§1. III).
§25]
CARBOHYDRATES
235
H-C-C-CO~CH 3 |
(GHO-CO-CH 3 ) 3 ° I CH
CH2OCOCH3 a-penta-acetate
CH,0-C-H
<%. H-C-Br
IO
(CHO-COCH 3 ) 3
CH-
CH 2 OCOCH 3 o-
acetobromohexose
CH 3 -COO-C-H I
lO
(CHOCC~CH 3 ) 3
(CHO-CO-CH 3 ) 3
I CH 2 0-CO-CH 3
(3-glycoside
CH-
CH 2 G~CC-CH 3 (3-penta-acetate
OH 2 OCC~CH 3 a-glycoside
H— C-GCH, I
I0
(CHO-CO-CH 3 ) 3
I CH
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
CH 2 OCOCH 3
II
Ag s C0 3
— u~
CH 2 OCOCH 3
CH 2 OH
III
OH
CaHasOu+aHgO—^CgHjiA, + C s H
10 O 5 +
OH
H-HO-
CHOH
-OH
H-H-
-H O O -OH
CH,
H-
HO-
H-
C-H
■OH
OH
CH<r
primeveros§
§27]
CARBOHYDRATES
237
C 20 H 27 O u N + 2H 2 0-* C 6 H 5
-CHO + 2C 6 H 12 0 6 + HCN
Since emulsin also brings about this
hydrolysis, amygdalin must contain
a /J-glycosidic link. On the other
hand, the enzyme zymase
hydrolyses amygdalin into one
molecule of glucose and a glucoside
of (+)-mandelonitrile (this
compound is
C2oH a7 O u N + H 2 0-
C 6 H 12 0 6
C 6 H 5 -CH(CN)-OC 6 H u O s
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
H-
HO-
GHOH -OH
-OH
-H
OO
H-I-OH H-
CH,
H-HO-
-OH
-H H-I-OH
0-
CH,000
H-C-Br II-l-OCOCHj
H H-(-OCOCH 3
H
-C-H
OO
CH 2 OH
CH,
CH.COO
OCOCH,
II H-j-OCOCH 3 H
0
CH 2 OCOCH 3
C 6H 5
CH—0-
C0 2 C 2 H 5 » "O-*- CH3COO-
II
-C-H
OCOCH3
H H-|-OCOCH, H
-C-H
OO
H—OCOCH3
CH 2
CH3COO
H0
H-I-OCOCH3 H
CH.0C0CH,
III
C6H5|
CH—O—C-H
1
C0NH 2 H-
HO-H-H-
-0H
-H
-OH
00
■C-H
H-}-OH
CH,
HO-
-H
H-I-OH H-
( CH 3 CO) a O pyridine
(±)-hepta-
acetyl derivative
(+)-form p 3 o 6 of V '
CH,OH
IV
CeH 5
CH-O-C-H
I CN H-+-OCOCH3
CH3COO-I-H
H-H-
C-H
H-
00
-OCOCH3
GH 2
CH,000—H
H-H-
■OCOCH,
CcHc
r51
CH-O-C-H CN H—OH
-OCOCH,
HO--H 00 H0—H
CH 2 OCOCH 3
C-H -OH
H+OH H
CH,-
H+OH H-
CH,OH
VI
VII
§29]
CARBOHYDRATES
239
rio<f~~j> O-C-H
HO-H-H-
-011
-H
-OH
XT.rtll ■ * ■ '
NaOH
O
II-
CH 3 0-
H-H-
-OCH3 -H
-OCH3
CH 2 OH I
OCH,
CH 2 OCH 3
HCI
CHjOH
H-
CH3O-
H-
H-
CHOCH3 -OCH,
-H O -OCH3
CH 2 OCH 3
H-
HO-
H-
H-
-OH -H O -OH
CH 2 OH
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VII
CH 2 OH H-
HO-
H-H-
-OH
-H
-OH
CH 2 OH
C 10 H 16 O 9 NS 2 K + H 2 0 —► C
6 H X2 0 6 + CH 2 =CH-CH 2 -NCS
+ KHS0 4
K+0 3 S-0-C-S-C 6 H u O a
II N-CH 2 -CH=CH 2
CH,
=CH-CH 2 -OS-C 6 H U 0 5
N-OSO.-K+
II
READING REFERENCES
of Carbohydrates. Rosanoff, On
Fischer's Classification of
Stereoisomers, /. Amer. Chem. Soc,
1906, 28,
TERPENES
' 3 ClI 2 OH
lavandulol isoprene
head
0 I.
■C—C-tail
C-C—C—C+C
C I •C—C —0—C
head tail
CC
i:»
■ c— c—c4-c—c—c—c
Monocyclic terpenes contain a six-
membered ring, and in this
connection Ingold (1921) pointed
out that a gem-dialkyl group tends
to render the cyc/ohexane ring
unstable. Hence, in closing the open
chain to a cyclo-hexane ring, use of
this " gem-dialkyl rule " limits the
number of possible structures (but
see, e.g., abietic acid, §31). Thus the
monoterpene open chain can give
rise to only one possibility for a
monocyclic monoterpene, viz., the
/>-cymene structure. This is shown
in the following structures, the
acyclic structure being written in
the conventional " ring shape ".
All natural monocyclic
monoterpenes are derivatives of ^-
cymene.
c4 X c
/ 1 C-ChC'. |
ci
<£■>
ii
C ;0
o — . c ,'j'c-c-ci |
\\y°
\CC
/°N V /
c c-hc-c-c
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
CIC
/\
I ,1- ^
c ;C-c-c
K"V^ c
'c\
J> '•■■
/v
c c-c\
[ch. VIII
CI
/\
^cc
-Rx i.
C N \C^C-C-C-C
cc
AA
cc
,c. 9 a
Wc.
■ : k.
(/ x c
/V
cc
-CH 2 • CH 2 • CH= C • CH 2 - CH 2
- CH=CMe 2
Me
MONOTERPENES
ACYCLIC MONOTERPENES
§4. Myrcene, C 10 H 16 , is an
acyclic monoterpene hydrocarbon
which occurs in verbena and bay
oils. It is a liquid, b.p. 166-168°.
Catalytic hydrogenation (platinum)
converts myrcene into a decane,
C^H^; thus myrcene contains three
double bonds, and is an open-chain
compound. Furthermore, since
myrcene forms an adduct with
maleic anhydride, two of the double
bonds are conjugated (Diels et al.,
1929; see the Diels-Alder reaction,
Vol. I). This conjugation is
supported by evidence obtained
from the ultraviolet spectrum of
myrcene (Booker et al., 1940).
These facts, i.e., that myrcene
contains three double bonds, two of
which are in conjugation, had been
established by earlier investigators
(e.g., Semmler, 1901). Ozonolysis of
myrcene produces acetone,
formaldehyde and a ketodialdehyde,
C 5 H 6 0 3 , and the latter, on
oxidation with chromic acid, gives
succinic acid and carbon dioxide
(Ruzicka et al., 1924). These results
can be explained by assigning
structure I to myrcene. In terpene
chemistry it has become customary
to use conventional formulae rather
than those of the type I. In these
conventional formulae only lines
are used; carbon atoms are at the
junctions of pairs of lines or at the
end of a line, and unsaturation is
indicated by double bonds.
Furthermore, the carbon skeleton is
usually i
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
CH 3
OH,
;c=CH—GH 2 — CH 2 — C—
CH=CH 2
CH
Y+
o
acetone
2CII 2 0 +
formaldehyde
XiHO
V H0
ketodialdehyde
CHO
.CHO
/CO-jH CH 2 CH 2
\o 2 H
CO-
CHO
+ 0. /CHO + CH 2 0
CH.,
CH3CO
,H + C^f,
C0 2 H
COjjH
CH 3 - COCHO + CH 2 0
0 /> CH, /
N C CH
II
/ /\
C C CH
CH,
C C CH CH
II
C CH 3
I II
isoprene units joined head to tail).
Citral can be reduced by sodium
amalgam to an alcohol, geraniol, C
10 H 18 O, and is oxidised by silver
oxide to geranic acid, C^H^Oa;
since there is no loss of carbon on
oxidation to the acid, the oxo group
in citral is therefore an aldehyde
group (Semmler, 1890). Oxidation
of citral with alkaline
permanganate, followed by chromic
acid, gives acetone, oxalic and
laevulic acids (Tiemann and
Semmler, 1895). Thus, if citral has
structure III, the formation of these
oxidation products may be
CHO
CH 3
CHO + H 2 0
k 2 co 3
CHO I CH 3
structure III. The structure of
methylheptenone was already
known from its synthesis by Barbier
and Bouveault (1896). These
workers condensed 2 : 4-dibromo-2-
methylbutane with sodio-
acetylacetone, and heated the
resulting compound with
concentrated sodium hydroxide
solution. Barbier
CH 3 /CHs
CBr I .CH 2
CH 2 Br
+ NaCH(COCH 3 )r
CH 3/ CH 3 CBr
.CH 2 CH 2
CH(COCH 3 ) 2
NaOH
CH, CH 3 C
CH,
CH
CH.
CO
I
CH 3
,CH-CO»Et
§5]
TERPENES
249
CH-COjjca
+ H-COiCa
CHO + CaCO,
CH» ,CH 3
QH, ,CH,
O
CH 3 £tt 3
(ii) H,0
-OH
"h^*~ ^OH
CH
^CH CH 2
PBrj
CH 3 CH 3
V
II
CH / CH 2 Br
E.A.A.
synthesis
CH, CH,
II
/ill
CH 2
I CH 2
CO
CH 3
CO
CMgBr
+ 111 ^
COC 2 H 5
COC 2 H 5
Pd-BaSOi
CHOC 2 H 5
^OH
HCl.
CHO
citral-a; citral-6;
geranial neral
CHO / CHO
CH 3 CH 3
eft CHCHO
CH 2 C-CH 3 N CH a
CH 3 CH 3
+ CH 3 COCH 3
Ba(OH)j
;£ X ° H
CH 2 -CH=CHCOCH,
:^>«
CH, /CH,
CH CH-CH=CHCOCH 3 h s so 1 I
CHjt C-CH 3 N CH 2 «f/-ionone
,CH=OHC6CH 3
(+2H s O)
CH=CHCOCH,
p-ionone
a-ionone
.CH=CHCOCH 3
p-ionone
C0 2 H CO-CH 3
C0 2 H
C0 2 H III
CO-CH 3 s CO„H
C0 2 H ^COjjH
C0 2 H
,CH=CHCOCH,
graphy) from the mixture of
ionones obtained above (this
ionone corresponds to the y-irone;
see below).
fr
CH-CO-CH 3
VII
VII for irone. Ruzicka (1947)
further showed that irone was a
mixture of three isomers (VII is y-
irone):
CH=CH-COCH,
a-irone
PH=CH-COCH 3
,OH=CHCOCH 3
(J-irone,
•y-irone
OH
a-terpineol geraniol
(trans-)
€H3-CH:CH-CH 2 OH-i^CH3-
CH:CH-OH 2 Br + CH 3 CHBr-
CH:CH 2
CH 3 -CH:CHCH 2 OH+CH 3
CHOHCH:CH 2
CH 2 OH
geraniol linalool
NaNH 2 f C 2 H a
; »-
C-ONa
Na
moist ether
(+)-linalool
O + C0 2 H OHO crf\ ( 0O 2 H
§10]
TERPENES
255
CH 2 OH
MONOCYCLIC MONOTERPENES
9 10
CH 3 CH 3 CH
CH CH 2
af*
CH
7l
CH 3 I
/Kmenth-i(7)-ene
p-mentha-l:4(8)-diene
I II III
—>- Keto-lactone
IV
warm
alk.
KMnO,
V VI
+ CH 3 -C0 2 H
§lla]
TERPENES
257
-OH
OH
OH
OH
-CH 3 C0 2 H + /\ O >—I
HO,C CO-
CH 3 I
CO c s H,ONa
CH, C0 2 C 2 H 6
CH 3
CO I
OHNa I CO2C2H5
CH 8 a-CQ 8 C a H5
ICHsMgl
CH 3
CO
CH
/ \ COsCijHs CH 2
C0 2 C 2 H 5
CH3 CH3
1 ° hydrolysis
C0 2 C 2 Hs CH 2
C0 2 C 2 H 5
C0 2 H
OH
C0 2 H
Terpenylic acid, m.p. 90°.
OH, CHs
CO CO
CH 2
CO 2 0 2 H 6
(2 steps)
,c-
[CH. VIII
ketonic
->.
hydrolysis
CH 2 C0 2 C 2 H 6 CH 2 CO 2 0 2 H
6 C0 2 C 2 H 5
CH,
CO
I
CH CH 2 CH 2
HC1
CII 3 CH 3 CH 3
?° 1CH.M*! C-OMgl
CH CH
/\/\
CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2
I I II
C0 2 H C0 2 H COjCzHg C0 2 C 2 H
5 COAH5 C0 2 C 2 H 6
hydrolysis
\z
OH
C0 2 H C0 2 H
lactonises
CO,H
CO,H
C0 2 H
C0 2 H
H 2 SO,
KOH
feOjH
CH,
heat in
pyridine
f^HBr)
CH,
C0 2 H
C,H B OH HC1
OH
VII
(±)-a-terpineol
C0 2 H C0 2 H
pyridine
CH,
VIII
CH 3 CH 3
CO CO
Hi
»^
w yPH CH 2 ^pH
cc
II
CH3 CHj
I
Two other terpineols are also
known, viz., p-terpineol and y-
terpineol; both occur naturally.
OH I \)H
p-terpineol -y-terpineol
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
A
ii
c c=o
Ic
carvone skeleton
QH 3 .CH 3
OH
H a so 4 .
NOH
§12]
TERPENES
261
CH 3 CH 2 OH CH 3 N ^-OH X C=0
JOH
VIII
OH
CH 3 -COCH 3 +
>GR
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
C0 2 H CH 3
.CO,H
XIII
XIV
C0 2 H
COjjH C0 2 H CH 3
XII
OH
-HaO^
or
Limonene I
NOCl
> Limonene nitrosochloride ■
KOH
III
C.H.OH
■f*- carvoxrme IV
§13]
TEEPENES
263
noci
OH
OH
(+)- or (-)-limonene
Limonene dihydrochloride no
longer contains an asymmetric
carbon atom, and so is optically
inactive. It can, however, exhibit
geometrical isomerism; the cw-
form is produced from limonene,
and the trans-form from cineole
(§14).
H
CH,
(CH 3 ) 2 CC1
CI
(CHskCCl
CI
CH,
as
trans
Dipentene can be regenerated by
heating the dihydrochloride with
sodium acetate in acetic acid, or
boiling with aniline. On the other
hand, when limonene
dihydrochloride is heated with
silver acetate in acetic acid, and
then hydrolysing the ester with
sodium hydroxide, 1 : 8-terpin is
formed; the direct action of sodium
hydroxide on the dihydrochloride
regenerates dipentene.
-OCO-CH
CHs-COjAg
^OCO-CHa
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
•OH
NaOH
^OH
-OH
-H s O
§14]
TERPENES
265
-OH
-H,Q
-OH
Co],
C0 2 HHi ,o O jC0 2 H
I II
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
\Cr
c \ c-c
W-cymene skeleton
car-3-ene
sylvestrene
car-4-ene
OH
CH,
OH
3
H h c:
Menthol
CH, H H
CH, l
H O] OH H
H(CH 3 ) 2
/so Menthol
CH 3
li
OH CH(CH 3 ) 2
H H H neoiso Menthol
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
«'-Pr
HH
Menthol
H OH
weoMenthol
z-Pr
OH
Me H
woMenthol
Me OH
weoMoMenthol
Menthone, C 10 H 18 O, b.p.
204°/750 mm. (—)-Menthone
occurs in peppermint oil, and it may
readily be prepared by the oxidation
of (—)-menthol with chromic acid.
Menthone is a saturated compound
which has the characteristic
properties of a ketone. When
heated with hydriodic acid and red
phosphorus, menthone is reduced
to ^-menthane; thus this skeleton
is present in menthone. Oxidation
of menthone with potassium
permanganate produces a
compound C 10 H 18 O 3 ; this
compound was shown to contain a
keto-group and one carboxyl group,
and is known as ketomenthylic acid
(IV). Ketomenthylic acid itself is
very readily oxidised by
permanganate to /?-methyladipic
acid (V) and some other acids (Arth,
1886; Manasse et al., 1894). The
foregoing oxidative reactions may
be formulated as follows, on the
assumption that III is the structure
of menthone. This
C0 2 H _[£]_
+ (0O 2 C 2 H 5 ) 2 J^
!0 2 C 2 H 5 \
VII
VIII
C0 2 C 2 H 5
(i) CjH„ONa
(ii) HC1
30 2 H CH 2 -C0 2 H
Ca
o (ch 3 ) 2 ch1L
"xf* 5
(CH 3 ) 2 CHl
CH,
as-isomer z'soMenthone
C0 2 H
not show the position of the double
bond. This had been shown by
Schim-mel (1910), who found that
on oxidation with alkaline
permanganate, piperitone gave a-
hydroxy-a-methyl-
aWsopropyladipic acid, II, y-acetyl-
a-t'so-propylbutyric acid, III, and
oc-t'sopropylglutaric acid, IV. These
results can be explained only if
piperitone is £-menth-l-en-3-one, I.
This structure for piperitone has
been confirmed by various
syntheses (e.g., Henecka,
§19]
TERPENES
271
BICYCLIC MONOTERPENES
CH 2
-CH
CHj-C^HsJ
CH,
CH 2
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
OH
car-3-eno
car-4-ene car-3-ene-5:6-epoxide
dihydrocarvone carone
Baeyer et al. (1894) by the action of
hydrogen bromide on
dihydrocarvone, which was then
treated with ethanolic potassium
hydroxide, whereupon carone was
obtained.
C0 2 H HO 2 0
[Q] > V U «
CIJ3 CH 3 CH 3 .CH 3
Jl ^ CN C a H B ONa I ^H
hydrolysis
CH + CH 2 -COAH 5 (Michae , » CH
2 ^cOhCtH. ' * >
I condensation) '
C0 2 C 2 H 5 C0 2 C 2 H 5
CH 2 -C0 2 H CH 2 -C0 2 H
p:p-dimethylglutaric acid
,m, , ^ CHErC0B r c a H 8 OH
/CHBr-C0 2 C 2 H 5 .....
CHg-COBr CH 2 C0 2 C 2 H 6
KOH
CH-C0 2 H
(CH&CT I
^CHC0 2 H
cis trans
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
pinol
pinol hydrobromide
sobrerol
sobrerythritol
Thus, if the formula for oc-pinene is
VI, then the formation of the above
substances can be explained. This
structure also accounts for other
reactions of a-pinene, e.g., its ready
hydration to oc-terpineol (see
later).
VII A-OH
Vila
KMnOj ° J KMn0 4
Pio Vio C 10
VI VIII IX
c9C8
X XI
Pinene glycol, C 10 H 18 (OH) a , is
produced by hydroxylation of the
double bond in a-pinene, and
pinonic acid, C^H^Og, is produced
by scission of the glycol bond.
Pinonic acid was shown to be a
saturated keto-monocarboxylic
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
CH 3 HOj I
HO A C< 1
VIII
-*-CHBr 3 +
C0 2 H
Ba(OH)2
bromopinic acid
CQ 2 H COIpj
hcAK
hydroxypinic acid
COjjH
[o]
H0 2 Cn
CN CN
CHCCk
CH 2 C0 2 C 2 H 6
C,H,ONa
CN lWcC>
Hch 3 ) 2 c v
;nh
CH 2 I a
■"CNa-CO I
CN
(CH 3 ) 2 C^
^CH-CO-I
CN
CN ,C—COv.
pH 2 "CWX)'
CN
NH
:nh
/C0 2 H
C;C0 2 H CH-C0 2 H
C0 2 H
The total synthesis of oc-pinene has
now been carried out in the
following way. Guha et al. (1937)
synthesised pinic acid from
norpinic acid, and Rao (1943)
synthesised pinonic acid from
synthetic pinic acid.
,C0 2 H
(i)HBr
.CH 2 OH (ii,KCN rraMS-norpinic
acid as-anhydride ^C0 2 H C0 2 H
C0 2 CaH5
hydrolysis [C C0 2 H C 3 H 5 OH S^
C0 2 C 2 H 5 partial
pinic acid
CH 3 CH 3
CO CO
(i)SOCl a (\ CO-N(C 6 H 6 ) 2
(i)KOH^K 9°2 H
rraws-pinonic acid ■
,0° / C^ : ^1CH-C0 2 C 2 H 5
C0 2 C 2 H s + CHgClCOAHs ^
j^COAHj ac ,d >
jas^j^pg^g^K^S.
(Dieckmann I "T— ! I I J (") M
■ 0 , i )NH 8 OH^/\-^
/n/ 1
,N(CH 3 ) 3 } + OH
a-pinene 8-pinene
CHC0 2 C 2 H 6 CH 3 /G0 2 H
[o]
H0 2 C
C0 2 H
COgH CH-CQAHfr' ^
H0 2 C
8-pinene
§23a]
TERPENES
279
p-pinene
8-pinene
is a
syn-
CH,-CO a H
camphor
camphane
C,H,ONh heat *
"- +N 2
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
CH 3
CHs— C— C0 2 H
\ H--\ 9(CH 3 ) 2
it!0 2 iH C0 2 H
CH 3 CHjj— C—C0 2 H
7'A
Iheat
QH 3
C0 2 + 2CH 3 —CH-C0 2 H II \
,(CH 3 ) 2
,co£h co 2 h
CH3
C0 2 + H—C—C0 2 H C(CH 3 ) 2
C0 2 H , III
2H +C
CH 3
C(CH 3
^X
C0 2 H C0 2 H
H0 2 C' / N
IV
IVa
/V) 2 H •\s, v C0 2 H
OH _
-CO.
'V) 2 H^/\30 2 H H0 2 C C0 2 H
OH
VII
CH(CH 3 ) 2 VIII
rejection of VII is that camphor
gives carvacrol, VIII, when distilled
with iodine. The formation of this
compound can be expected from VI
but not from VII.
CH 3 CH 3
CH,
Zn + CH a BfCOjCjH|
CH.
coah 5
(ii) CH 3 I
CHCH 3 C02C2H B
(ii) GH S
I CO2C2H5
*-
CH 3 CH 3
/C\ ^c^
I I * I I (ii)KCN
C0 2 C 2 H 5 C0 2 C 2 H 5 C0 2 H
C0 2 H
CO2C2H5
(CH 3 ) 2 C=CHCOCH 3 + CH 2 (C0
2 C 2 H 5 )2 C '" 5 ° Na >
(OH 3 ) 2 C ^C0 2 C 2 H 5 CH 2
^CH,
CjH 5 ONa
C0 2 C 2 H 6
^CH^
(CH 3 ) 2 C CO (i ) Ba(OH) a
CH 2 CH 2 ^CO
NaOEr
J 2 0 2 rl5
CO2C2H5 C0 2 C 2 H 6
CH 2 C0 2 C 2 H 6
C(CH S ) 2
CH 2 -C0 2 C 2 H 5
diketoapocamphoric ester
§23a]
TERPENES
283
(i)Na
V'VjO-A
(ii)CHjI
H5
0^\ /C0 2 C 2 H 5
diketocamphoric ester
Na-Hg NaOH
HO.
HO
/NjObH
HBr
^ C0 2 H
/\x) 2 H / J^ / C0 2 H
/^COgH
CH,C0 S H^ | TpQM
Zn
\ / C<
CH 3
C0 2 H
C0 2 H
CO2H
CH 3
CH 3
C0 2 H
CH,COCl
02H
camphoric acid
CO
camphoric o-campholide
anhydride
/N>
KCN
hydrolysis f ^
J21
X!H 2 -CN
Ca salt
—: »-
^ CH 2 C0 2 H
homocamphoric acid
<lr
p-campholide IX
|/\iH 2 -C0 2 H *\/C0 2 H X
Stereochemistry of camphor.
Camphor has two dissimilar
asymmetric carbon atoms (the
same two as in camphoric acid), but
only one pair of enantiomorphs is
known. This is due to the fact that
only the cw-form is possible; trans
fusion of the gew-
dimethylmethylene bridge to the
cyclo-hexane ring is impossible.
Thus only the enantiomorphs of the
a's-isomer are known (c/. a-pinene,
§22a).
10P(u)
Commercial preparation of
camphor. Synthetic camphor is
usually obtained as the racemic
modification. The starting material
is a-pinene, and the formation of
camphor involves the Wagner-
Meerwein rearrangements (see
§23d). Scheme (i) is the earlier
method, and (ii) is the one that is
mainly used now.
■ t. r NaOH . O,
J Ni; 200° r
Na-Hg / I / Na
C0 2 H
1 l^ C0 2 H *" iT^COaH
CH,CO»Na -HC1 *"
bornyl camphene
carboxyapocamphoric
apocamphoric
CH.
C=CH 2 ? H a l/OH 3
\I/ N CH 3 N CH
vCH,OH (7 r-G0 2 H
camphene
glycol
III
camphenylic camphenilone
V
carbocamphenilone VI
C,H e OH
to]
bornyl iodide
bornylene
camphoric acid
+ CH 2 0
II V
+ CHN 2 C0 2 C 2 H 6
(Df
CO2C2H5
VIII
COjjH
cycZopropane-1:1:2-tricarboxylic
acid, VIII, is produced. VIII is to be
expected from structure II, but not
from I; I (bornylene) would give
cyclo-propane-1 : 2 : 3-tricarboxylic
acid, IX.
COjJI
0O 2 H IX
CO,H
+ 11 >-
CH 2
CHO
H 2 -Pd
CHO.
(CH 3 CO),0
CHO-COCH,
(i)NaNHa (ii) CH S I
CH 3 M g I
acid
(-H s O)
§23d. Wagner-Meerwein
rearrangements. Wagner, as we
have seen, proposed a molecular
rearrangement to explain the
formation of camphene from the
borneols and bornyl chlorides.
Wagner also recognised that a
molecular rearrangement occurred
when oc-pinene was converted into
bornyl chloride. Many other
investigations concerning
rearrangements in the ter-pene
field were carried out by Meerwein
and his co-workers, e.g., when oc-
pinene is treated in ethereal
solution at —20° with hydrogen
chloride, the product is pinene
hydrochloride. This is unstable, and
if the temperature is allowed to rise
to about 10°, the pinene
hydrochloride rearranges to bornyl
chloride (Meerwein et al., 1922).
Rearrangements such as these
which occur with bicyclic
monoterpenes are known as
Wagner-Meerwein rearrangements.
Furthermore, Meerwein extended
the range of these rearrangements
to compounds outside bicyclic
terpenes; these compounds were
monocyclic. Finally, the range was
extended to acyclic compounds, the
classical example being that of
weopentyl into i-pentyl compounds
(Whitmore et al., 1932- ).
ya
$?*
0?'
cr
Me Me 3 C — CH 2 OH ^- Me 3 C —
CHr^Hg ""'"Mef-C —CH 2
uct
CI
§23d]
TERPENES
291
isobornyl chloride
CI bornyl chloride
attack the C+ (of the C—CI) at the
rear, thereby assisting ionisation;
this neighbouring group
participation cannot occur with
bornyl chloride. Various
representations of this bridged-ion
are possible; I has been proposed by
Winstein et al. (1952).
e#o-norbornyl alcohol
endo-norbornyl alcohol
[CH. VIII
© C-bridging
H-bridging
CHO
HO—C—H
L-glyceraldehyde
CH 2 -C0 2 H
l(— )-methyl-succinic acid
CO a H (CH S ) 2 CH-C—H
l( — )-isopropyl-succinic acid
§24]
TERPENES
293
H. Me H. Me H v Me H Me
(X
OHC
CMe 2 (+)-citronellal
O Me 2 CH N H
(-)-menthone
trans-(+)-
tetrahydro-
carvone
Me 2 CH 'H
d-(+)-methyl- (+)-piperitone
succinic acid
Me 2 CH V H
phellandrene
HO,0
D-(+)-isopropyl-succinic acid
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
or
III
o»
II
o /Nx> 2 h
^/X> 2 H
IV V
It should be noted that the
dehydration of fenchyl alcohol, II,
to oc-fenchene, III, occurs via a
Wagner-Meerwein rearrangement;
the mechanism for this reaction
may thus be written (cf. §23d):
-H 1
or
(■) PBr 3
(ii) heat
HO CHg-COgCgHs I0 2 H ^
!0 2 H
CH 2 C0 2 H
2 vv/ 2 v 2 ri5
CH 2 C0 2 H
Pb salt heat
§26]
TERPENES
295
SESQUITERPENES
CCC
III
c^?
o=c—c-c=c-c—c— c =c—c—c=c
ACYCLIC SESQUITERPENES
;-farnesene
/3-farnesene
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
(i) NH,OH
(ii) (CHs-CO)sO
farnesol
farnesal
KOH
farnesenonitrile
farnesenic acid
geranylacetone
o
CH 2 OH CHO
CHO
Ozonolysis, however, also gave
some formaldehyde, thus indicating
the presence of the isopropenyl
end-group as well as the
isopropylidene end-group (but c/.
citral, §5). Ruzicka (1923)
synthesised farnesol (with the
j'sopropylidene end-group) by the
action of acetic anhydride on
synthetic nerolidol (cf. linalool, §8).
§27]
TERPENES
297
nerolidol farnesol
+ CHjCOCHa-COaCaHs
CH-COAHs COCH 3
geranyl chloride
•* (in) HjO
geranylacetone
(±)-nerolidol
MONOCYCLIC SESQUITERPENES
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
hydrogen chloride (by means of
sodium acetate in acetic acid)
produces bisabolene; thus
bisabolene could be I, II or III,
since all three would give the same
bisabolene trihydrochloride.
OH H »°>
nerolidol
/CI
biaabolene trihydrochloride
-bisabolene
II
p-bisabolene
III
y-bisabolene
Ruzicka et al. (1929) showed that
synthetic and natural bisabolene
consisted mainly of the y-isomer
(III), since on ozonolysis of
bisabolene, the products were
acetone, laevulic acid and a small
amount of succinic acid. These
products are readily accounted for
by III; and this structure has been
confirmed by synthesis (Ruzicka et
al., 1932).
§28]
TERPENES
299
III
C0 2 H C0 2 H
G0 2 CH 3
C
III —
? C0 2 CH s
COuCHs C0 2 CH 3
humulene
OAc pyrethrosin
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
CH 2 OH
geraniol
dipentene
p-cymene
farnesol
cadinene skeleton
cadalene
1 : 6-Dimethyl-4-
wopropylnaphthalene was
synthesised by Ruzicka (1922), and
was found to be identical with
cadalene.
et al.
Zn
CH 2 BrC0 2 C 2 H 6
CH 2 -C0 2 C 2 H 5
acid
(-H 2 0)
CH 2 C0 2 H
!H 2 OH
(i) HBr
(ii) CHyCNafCOaCaHaJa
C(C0 2 C 2 H s ) 2 0H 3
CHCH 3 C0 2 H
TERPENES
301
yCH*CH3
COGl
CH 3
Thus cadinene has the carbon
skeleton assumed. The only
remaining problem is to ascertain
the positions of the two double
bonds in cadinene. Since the
molecular refractivity shows no
optical exaltation, the two double
bonds are not conjugated (§11.1);
this is supported by the fact that
cadinene is not reduced by sodium
and amyl alcohol. Ozonolysis of
cadinene produces a compound
containing the same number of
carbon atoms as cadinene. The two
double bonds are therefore in ring
systems, but they cannot be in the
same ring, since in this case carbon
would have been lost on ozonolysis.
Ruzicka et al. (1924) were thus led
to suggest I (a or /?) for the
structure of cadinene, basing it on
the relationship of cadinene to
copaene, which had been given
structure II by Semmler (1914). I
was proposed mainly on the
I
II
CCcC
c-c
CH 3 -MgCI
ccII
H-C—C-C I I CH, OH
-H a O
rf
c=c-c
CH,
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
(benzene-1: 2 : 4 : 5-tetracarboxylic
acid), VIII. The formation of VIII
therefore rules out III as the
structure of dimethylcadalene, but
IV, with
VIII
VII
§28a]
TERPENES
303
copaene
§28a. Selinenes, C 1B H M .
Selinene occurs in celery oil; when
treated with hydrogen chloride, it
forms a dihydrochloride which,
when warmed with aniline, is
converted into the compound
C^H^. This is isomeric with
selinene, and the natural compound
was called /3-selinene, and the
synthetic isomer a-selinene
(Semmler et al., 1912). Semmler
showed that the catalytic
hydrogenation of the two selinenes
gives the same tetrahydroselinene,
C 1S H 28 . Thus they each contain
two double bonds, and are tricyclic.
Ozonolysis of /3-selinene produces
a diketone (I) with the loss of two
carbon atoms, and oxidation of I
with sodium hypobromite gives a
tricarboxylic acid (II), with the loss
of one carbon atom. From this it
follows that I contains a CHg'CO—
group. Ozonolysis of a-selinene
gives a diketo-monocarboxylic acid
(III) with loss of one carbon atom,
and III, on oxidation with sodium
hypobromite, loses two carbon
atoms to form II. Thus III contains
two CHj'CO— groups (Semmler et
al, 1912). Ruzicka et al. (1922)
distilled /S-selinene with sulphur,
and thereby obtained eudalene (see
§28b for the evidence for the
structure of this compound). If we
use the isoprene rule, all the
foregoing facts are explained by
giving the selinenes the following
structures (Ruzicka et al., 1922).
The relationship of the selinenes to
eudesmol (§28b) confirms the
nature of the carbon skeleton given
to the selinenes.
CHg-CO
eudalene
NaOBr
H0 2 C
NaOBr
C0 2 H C0 2 H CH 3 -CO'
II
§28b. Eudesmol, C 15 H 26 0,
occurs in eucalyptus oil. Catalytic
hydro-genation converts eudesmol
into dihydroeudesmol, C 15 H 28 0.
Thus one double bond is present in
the molecule, and since eudesmol
behaves as a tertiary alcohol, the
parent hydrocarbon is Ci 6 H 28
=C„H2,i-2; eudesmol is therefore
bicyclic. When dehydrogenated with
sulphur, eudesmol forms eudalene,
C 14 H 16 , and methanethiol
(Ruzicka et al., 1922). Eudalene
behaved as an aromatic compound
(cf. cadalene, §28), and its structure
was deduced as follows. Since
eudalene was a naphthalene
derivative, and since it contained
one carbon atom less than cadalene,
it was thought to be an
apocadalene, i.e., cadalene minus
one methyl group. Thus eudalene is
either l-methyl-4-
wopropylnaphthalene (II«) or 7-
methyl-Wsopropyl-naphthalene
(la). To test this hypothesis,
Ruzicka oxidised cadalene with
chromic acid, and thereby obtained
a naphthoic acid, C 15 H 16 0 2 ,
which must
C0 2 H
J°U
C0 2 H
cadalene
soda lime
[o].
CO„H
CO,H
la 2 eudalene
§28b]
TERPENES
305
-HjjO V J CH Na-C 2 H 6 OH
y-\J C0 2 C 2 H, *
CHOH N CH 8
COjCjHs
(i)HBr
CH 2 CN
eudalene
III c
, HCl
p-selinene
CI selinene dihydrochloride
or
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
VII
VIII
OH IV
o-eudesmol
OaH
X CH,
O,
+ CHjjO
OH
p-eudeamol
The proportions of these two
isomers vary with the source, and
McQuillin et al. (1956) have
succeeded in separating them {via
their 3 : 5-dinitrobenzo-ates), and at
the same time have characterised a
third, synthetic y-isomer.
OH
y -eudesmol
§28c. Caryophyllene, C 15 H 24 ,
b.p. 123-125°/10 mm., is a bicyclic
sesquiterpene containing a fused
system of a four- and a nine-
membered ring. The main source of
this compound is the sesquiterpene
fraction of oil of cloves, and three
isomeric hydrocarbons have been
isolated. These were originally
called
caryophyllene
§29]
TERPENES
307
isocaryophyllene
santonin
Na a CQ 3
solution
ryc/odecane-1:6 -dione
C,H B OH
azulene
OH guaiol vetivone
Azulene is a non-benzenoid
aromatic compound in which n
0@>
2 (aromatics
dipolar structure
Ci 8 H 36 =CH-CH 2 OH 22 *-
0^380+ CHO-CH 2 OH
r „ CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
^CH-CH 2 -CH 2 -!CH 2 CH-CH 2 -
CH 2 -;CH 2 -CH-CH 2 -CH 2 -;CH 2
-C=0
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
JHj-Pd
CrLi CILi (-*H 3
13II
CH 3 -CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -
CH-CH 2 -CH 2 OH
II
|PBr 3
I3II
CHa-CH-CCH^-CH-CCHj^-CH-
CHa-CHaBr III I
CH s CO-CHNhCOjCjH 6
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3 ^CO-CHj
CH 3 -CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -
CH-CH 2 -CH 2 -CH
Iconic C0 2 C 2 H 5
I hydrol\-sis
CHq ch 3 ch 3
§31]
TERPENES
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
IIII
CH 3 - CH-(CH 2 ) 3 - CH-(CH 2 ) 3
-CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -C=0
309
IV
|0>
) NaNHj )CH=CH
CH 3
CH,
CH,
CH,
CH 3 -CH-(CH 2 ) 3 • CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -
CH-(CH 2 ) 3 - C ■ C=CH
OH
i3i3i3i
CH 3 -CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -
CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -C-CH=CH 2
OH
(CH 3 CO) 2 0
CH 3
CH3-CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -
CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -C=CH-CH 2 OH
phytol
•C0 2 H
abietic acid
Me' v C0 2 H
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
be l-methyl-7-
i'sopropylphenanthrene (Bucher,
1910), and this structure was later
confirmed by synthesis, e.g., that of
Haworth et al. (1932).
CIVCO^
~Y fl 1 CH,-CC~
A1C1 3
(CH 3 ) 2 CH
ch 3 oh (CH 3 ) 2 CH
(i)CH 3 M g I
H0 2 C CH 2 CH,
CH 3 0 2 C N /XR^ CH a
(CH 3 ) 2 CH-
(OH 3 ) 2 CH
HI _ P (CH 3 ) 2 CH
C-CH,
H0 2 C GH CH,
Zn-Hg (CH 3 ) 2 CH
HjSO«
(CH 3 ) 2 CH-XV\
XXX
retene
CH.
CH(CH 3 ) 2
N cr N c
TERPENES
311
.C0 2 H
J2L
II
C0 2 H
III
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
v XJOaH
II V
[o]
COoH
VI
H C-C0 2 H
CH,
/X^CHg
,CH,OH
_EL
PC1 5
CoH
DCH(CH 3 ) 2 homoretene
TERPENES
313
,CO(,H
,C0 2 H
CH(CH 3 ) 2
CH(CH 3 ) 2
:7-
7:8-
£0 2 H
COjjH
CH-CO \
abietic acid
sapietic acid (levopimaric acid)
adduct
TRITERPENES
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
+ MgBr 2
Cm.
-Cc—Cm—Cc Cm/
| | HO^ Me HO -Me
II-||!
HMG
leucine
Me Me HO. .Me
CH Me =^^= CH CH 2 CH 2 ^CH 2
IIIII
COCoA COCoA C0 2 H CH 2 OH C0
2H
MVA
senecioic acid
CH„—O—P CH a —O—P
II
/OH CH,
CH/ NMe J\
| CH 2 ^ Nvie
CO a H
I
Hv XH 2 —O—P -t> P—O—CH
il Me/ Nvie
OBs
p>
\±C r X 0 »- PhCsCCOi+ co 2 + ob s
-
CoBs C0"" 2
C0 2 H
XiOCoA
ft
enzyme Me ^ /"V 0 ^
^j> bOCoA P
POLYTEKPENES
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. VIII
CH 3
CH,
CH,
CHo'C — Cri'CHg'CxTo' C—
CH'CHo'CIio *C— CH'CJL
2'
CH,
pzonolysis
CH,
13 ^Xl 3 CH3
CH,-CC-CH 2 -CH,-CHO
-CH 3 -CC-CH 2 -CH 2 -C0 2 H
\ *~ CH 3 .CH 2
II G
8-10 A fobs.) H / CH2 9-13A
(theor.) CH 2 ,CH 3
CH^ H
CH3 yCH 2
\/
CH 2 H \ /
H
H CH 2
rubber cis-form
C /\ CH,
II
CH 2 H
\2
gutta-percha trans-iorm
.NH-C 8 H 5 § ff
NHC 6 H,
•e*H
tetramethylthiuram
diphenylguanidine disuJphide
SS
II II
(CH 3 ) 2 N- C-S-Zn-S-C-N(CH 3 ) 2
zinc dimethyldithiocarbamate
C-SH
mercaptobenzothiazole
Mercaptobenzothiazole is the most
widely used accelerator. Many
inorganic compounds can also act
as accelerators, e.g., zinc oxide.
Organic accelerators are promoted
by these inorganic compounds, and
current practice is to vulcanise
rubber with, e.g.,
mercaptobenzothiazole in the
presence of zinc oxide.
READING REFERENCES
CHAPTER IX
CAROTENOIDS
H CH 3 H CH 3 H H H H H
AVvSVvvvy*
iTiTiiiIi
H H H H H CH 3 H CH 3 H
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. IX
o».
v CO-C0 2 H COCH 3
I II
Thus a tenta-
CH,
.CH=CH-C=
C l:
3 f—C M j
CH 3 =OCH=CH
Since the colour of /3-carotene is
due to extended conjugation (§1),
the C 14 portion of the molecule
will be conjugated. The presence of
conjugation in this central portion
is confirmed by the fact that jg-
carotene forms an adduct with five
molecules of maleic anhydride
(Nakamiya, 1936).
TOjjH
JSL
CO-CH,
II
*-CH 3 -C0 2 H +
C0 2 H
[O]
>■—i
\» 2 H [o] H0 2 C
^XJOjH
C0 2 H IV
(a) I
V ; CH
CH 3 —C CH
CH CH
CH toluene
CH N CH CH 3 C / \>CH S GB. 3 f\
11 II or I II —" L
CH
1:3 1:5
(c) I I
CH y CH CH /C ^
CH CH C-CHj CH 3 -C CH CH
7K-xylene
ch 3 -c /CH xm CH CH /-CHj
xm N CH X CH 'CH
2:6- dimethylnaphthalene
1:6 1:8
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. IX
<?H 3
CH 3
=CH-C=CH-CH=CH-C=CHCH=CH-
CH :
234 5 6 7 I 9 10 11
CH 3
= C-CH=
12 13
-1:5-(*)
-1:6-
(c)
<jJHs =CH-CH=C-CH=CH-
14 15 16 17 18
-1:5-
(*)
This symmetrical formula for /S-
carotene has been confirmed by the
following oxidation experiments
(Kuhn et al., 1932-1935). When /S-
carotene is oxidised rapidly with
potassium dichromate, dihydroxy-
/5-carotene, VI, is obtained and
this, on oxidation with lead tetra-
acetate, gives semi-/3-carotenone,
VII, a diketone. Since both VI and
VII contain the same number of
carbon atoms as /S-carotene, it
follows that the double bond in one
of the fi-ionone rings has been
oxidised; otherwise there would
have been chain scission had the
chain been oxidised. Oxidation of
semi-/S-carotenone with chromium
trioxide produces /S-carotenone,
VIII, a tetraketone which also has
the same number of carbon atoms
as /S-carotene. Thus, in this
compound, the other /S-ionone ring
is opened. Now only one dihydroxy-
/S-carotene and one semi-|S-
carotenone are obtained, and this
can be explained only by assuming
a symmetrical structure for /S-
carotene. Thus the oxidations may
be formulated:
,CH—CH-
p-carotene
\X)-CH—CH-CO-CH 3 VII
§3]
CAROTENOIDS
CH 3
H=CH-C-CH 2 -C=CH OH
IX
CjHjMgBr
CH 3 !H=CH-C-CH 2 -C=C-MgBr
OMgBr
CH,
CH 3 CH 3
OH OH
Hj-Pd
CH,
CH 3
CH=CH-C-CH 2 -CH=CH-C-CH 2 -
CH=
OH
CH 3
I OH
CH,
J2
325
p -carotene jg
CH,
CH=CHCO + CH 2 BrCHCH
Zn
A/
CH 3
CH=CHC-CH 2 -C=CH
OH
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. IX
O. UAIBt
CuCl-NH.Cl
CH 3 -CHOH-CH=CH-CH=CH-
CHOH-CH 3
Zn
MnO, >•
CH 3 -CO-CH==CH-CH==CH-CO-
CH 3
CH.COjH
+ BrMgC s=CMgBr
OH
OHO
OH
HC(OEt), P5SJ
OEt
OEt
I' 0Et
OEt OEt
OEt lAcOB
Im-1
■P-Y reduction H
(i) allylio rearr. and dehydration (ii)
partial hydrogenation" (MY
stereomutatioit
jS-carotene
§5]
CAROTENOIDS
327
,CH=CH-CO-CH,
[O],
CH-C0 2 H CO-CH 3
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
!H=CH-C=CH-
CH=CHC=CHCH=CHCH=CCH=CH-
CH=CCH=CH N
As we have seen, a-carotene is
optically active (§1), and this is due
to the presence of the asymmetric
carbon atom (*) in the a-ionone
ring. The structure given for a-
carotene has been confirmed by
synthesis (Karrer et al., 1950). The
method is the same as that
described for ^-carotene, except
that one molecule of the acetylenic
alcohol (structure IX, §3) is used
together with one molecule of the
corresponding a-ionone derivative:
CH,
=CH-OCH 2 -C=CH I 2 OH
CH,^
CH 3 -acetone
H.C .
iI!
II
laevulic acid J
- methylheptenone
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
(CH 3 ) 2 C=CH-CH 2 -CH z -C=CH-
CH=CH-i = CH-CH=CH-C=CH-CH
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
lycopene
J Cr 03
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
lycopenal
Cr0 3
i CH 3 CH 3
CH 3 CHO-CH=CH-C=CH-CH=CH-
C=CH-CH
(CH^C^HCHs-CTVcUo + CHO-
CH=CH- C=CH-CH=CH-C=CH-CH
methylheptenone CH 3 CH 3
bixindialdehyde
(i) NH 2 0H
(HXCHa-COJaOG-HjO] )
hydrolysis
CH 3 CH 3
C0 2 H-CH=CH-C=CH-CH=CH- C
=CHCH
0O 2 H- CH=CH-C=CH-CH=CH-
C=CH-CH
CH 3 CH 3
norbixin
§6]
CAROTENOIDS
329
^C(CH S ) 2 CH 3
OH CH-CH=CH-C-CH 2 CsCH
CH 2 C-CH, OH
M
H=CH-C=CH-CH=CHC=CH-
CH=CH-CH=CCH=CH-CH=C-
CH=CH-CH
y-carotene
CH 3 C CH S CH,
This structure for y-carotene is
supported by the fact that the
absorption maximum of y-carotene
in the visible region lies between
that of /5-carotene and that of
lycopene. Final proof for this
structure has been obtained by the
synthesis of y-carotene (Karrer et
al., 1953); the following reactions
are written with the conventional
formulae (see §1):
,CsCMgBr OMgBr +
BrMgO .0 + BrMgC=C
y-carotene
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. IX
Se
HCl-CjH 5 OH
CH CH 3
CH=CH-C=CH-CH 2 OH
CH 3
CH3T CHs
OH=CH-C=CHCH 2 OH
II
Perhydrovitamin A t has been
synthesised from /3-ionone
(Karrer, 1933), and was shown to be
identical with the compound
obtained by reducing vitamin A t ;
thus there is evidence to support
the structure assigned to vitamin A
r Final proof of structure must rest
with a synthesis of vitamin A t
itself, and this has now been
accomplished by several groups of
workers.
§7]
CAROTENOIDS
331
The following synthesis is that of
Isler et al. (1947). This starts with
methyl vinyl ketone to produce
compound IV, one stage of the
reactions involving
Preparation of IV.
CH 3
CH 3
ONa
OH 3 CH 3
CHi=CH-C-C=CH H,S °* > CH 2
OH-CH=C-CsCH
OH
C a H B M s Br
CH 3
^BrMgOCH 2 CH=C-C=CMgBr IV
Preparation of V.
<pH 3 CH=CH-O0
hydrolysis
+ CHj,C] •C0 2 C 2 H r C ' H ,' ,ON >
z z *^ » in hquid
NH,
CH 3 .CH=CH-CH-CO-COs|H
heat with Cu
isomerises
CH 3 CH 2 -CH=C-CHO
CH 3
■CH=CH-C—■.
CH-C0 2 C 2 H 6
CH 3 -!H=CH'CH-CHO
CH 3
[CH. IX
CH 3
+ BrMeCsOO=(
IV
CH 3 CH 3
CH 9 -CH=C-CH-C=C-C=CH-CH 2
OH
/ CH 2 -OH=C- CH- CH=CH-C=CH-
CH 2 OH OH vil
l(CH,-CO) a O
CH 3 CH 3
CH 3
I3
?H 3
j_H a O
CH 3 ' CH 3
H=CH-C=CH-CH=CH-C=CH-CH 2
0-CO-CH 3
IX
hydrolysis
CH ;
CH 3
CH=CH-C=CH-CH=CH- C=CH-CH
2 OH
CAROTENOIDS
333
Zn (Reformatsky)
OH
CH 3
CH 3 CH 3
CH 2 Br-CO s C 2 H 5 /Zn (
Reformatsky)
CH,
CH,
CH=CH-C = CHCH=CHC-CH 0 CO.
) C > H,
OH
CH 3 CH 3
,CH=CHC = CHCH=CHC =
CHCOoH
LiAlH 4
CH 3 CH 3
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. IX
NaNH 2 CH S I 3
CHSCH,
Na/NH 3 '
ft r
(i) EtMgBr
(ii) CH a CH 3
CO-CH=CH-CH=CCH=CH 3
CH,
CEU
= C-C-CH=CHCH = CH-C-CH=CH,
i-
OH
XI
acid
(rearr.)
CH 3
CH,
,C = C-C=CH-CH=CH-C=CH'CH 2
OH
\)H
XII
(i) LiAiH 4
CH,
CH,
Ca h xnl
CH,
CH=CHC = CHCH=CH-C =
CH-CH 2 OH
CH 2 OH
vitamin A x
CH 2 OH
neovitamin a
CftjOH
neovitamin t>
§8]
CAROTENOIBS
335
Vitamin A a . A second vitamin A,
vitamin A a , has been isolated from
natural sources, and has been
synthesised by Jones et al. {1951,
1952); it is dehydrovitamin A x .
CH,
CH 3
vitamin Ag
Jones et al. (1955) have also
introduced a method for converting
vitamin A x into vitamin A 2 .
Vitamin Aj may be oxidised to
vitamin A x aldehyde (retin-enej) by
means of manganese dioxide in
acetone solution (Morton et al.,
1948), and then treated as follows:
.N- phenyl -
morpholine
(-HBr)
CH;
rubixanthin
(CH„) 2 C. —CH II P
HO
fXPBtk (CH S ) 2 C CH CH
CH 3 CH; lycoxanthin
Rhodoxanthin, C M H 52 0 2 , m.p.
219°, is believed to be the following
diketone.
Lutein, C 40 H 56 O 2 , hydroxy-a-
carotene.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
m.p.
[CH. IX 193°, was formerly known
as xanthophyll; it is di-
,C(CH S ) 2 CH—
OH
HO
zeaxanthin
CH 3 CH, lycophyll
(CHa^C.
■OH
JCH 3
CH 3 =CH-CH=CH-C=CH-CH=
^H 3 CH 3
=CH-C=CH-CH=CH-C=
CH 3 H0 2 C-CH=CH-C=CH-
CH=CH-
CH,
CH
,O 2 C-CH=CH-C=0H-CH=CH-
C0 2 H
C0 2 CH 3
H0 2 C-CH=CHG=CH-CH=CH-
C=CH-CH=CH-CH=CCH=CH-
CH=C-C!H=CH-C0 2 CH,
Me0 2 C
C0 2 Me
Crocetin, C 20 H 24 O 4 . Crocetin
occurs in saffron as the
digentiobioside, crocin. The
structure of crocetin was elucidated
by Karrer et al. (1928) and Kuhn et
al. (1931). Crocetin behaves as a
dicarboxylic acid and has seven
double bonds (as shown by catalytic
hydrogenation to perhydrocrocetin,
C 20 H 38 O 4 ). On oxidation with
chromic acid, crocetin gives 3-4
molecules of acetic acid per
molecule of crocetin; thus there are
3-4 methyl side-chains. The
structure of crocetin was finally
shown by the degradation of
perhydronorbixin, C 24 H 46 0 4 ,
by means of the following method:
R-CIVC0 2 H ^U-R-CHBrC0 2 H
hytlrolysis > RCHOHCOjjH
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
H0 2 CC=CH-CH=CH-
C=CHCH=CH-CH=C-
CH=CHCH=C-C0 2 H
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. IX
Me0 2 C
PPh 3 OHC
CO, Me
READING REFERENCES
CHAPTER X
POLYCYCLIC AROMATIC
HYDROCARBONS
+ 4Na + Br BrCH 2 /
-fY H "
CO]
anthracene
sifr BrUH 2
H,c—c;
[o]
phenanthrene
(ii) Ullmann diaryl synthesis. This
method results in the formation of
isolated polynuclear compounds,
e.g., heating iodobenzene with
copper powder in a sealed tube
produces diphenyl.
2C 6 II 5 I + 2Cu
+ 2CuI
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. X
CH,
+H2
CH 3 CH 3
oo
+ 21L
CH 3 CH 3
+ 2H 2 S
/y CH2C1
C1CHJ
MCI.
co-co,
oo
^^_^^y_^>^
Aicu
H a SQ 4
(v) Elbs reaction. In this method,
polynuclear hydrocarbons are
produced from a diaryl ketone
containing a methyl group in the o-
position to the keto group. The
reaction is usually carried out by
heating the ketone under reflux or
at 400-450° until water is no longer
evolved, e.g., o-methyl-
benzophenone forms anthracene.
-H a O
CHO
N0 2 +
(CJVCOJjO .
CFt=C^CQ 2 H ■N0 2 <Q»
(i) M (ii)NaNO,/H,S0 4
heat
-CO*
* A"^>A
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. X
CO CH 2
CO,H
+ I >0
CH 2 CO
A1CI,
H0 2 C CH,
Zn-Hg: HCI
Zn-Hg; 1 HCI
H,SO t
H 2 SO»
OH CH.
3 Pd-C
§2]
POLYCYCLIC AROMATIC
HYDROCARBONS
343
CH^CH H0 2 C N CH 2
CH 3 -CH-C(X + I >0
CHjj-CO
Aids
CO
a-Bromoketone derivatives of
naphthalene may be used in the
malonic ester synthesis to prepare
alkylphenanthrenes, e.g.,
A1C1.
CO-CH 2 -CH 3
Br 8
main product
'CHBr CHNa(COjCjH 6 )a
CH-CH 3
CH(COAH 6 ) 2
(i) KOH
CH 2 CO
y\2
H0 2 C CH-CH 3
+ I CHa-CO,
° A \XJ
I CH 3 C0 2 C2H 6
HBr-CH,-C0 2 H reflux
CH 3 CH-CHa-CHa-OQiH
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. X
/K
HBr
"*^/i „„_„_ ^i^Vc 6 H 5 -CH 2 -CH
2 OH^^C 6 H 5 -CH 2 -CH 2 Br
,COC0 2 C 2 H 5
iCOAHs
CH2—CH.2
moist ether
^CHjCHjMgBr *f 2 HO I I
+
H;,S04
OH
, HO
III
(vii) Dehydrogenation of
hydroaromatic compounds with
sulphur, selenium or palladised
charcoal. This method is mainly
confined to the dehydrogenation of
six-membered rings, but five-
membered rings may sometimes be
dehydrogenated when they are
fused to a six-membered ring. The
general methods are as follows:
(a) Heating the compound with the
calculated amount of sulphur at
200-220°; hydrogen is eliminated
as hydrogen sulphide (Vesterberg,
1903).
+ 3H,
cyc/ohexane
hydrindane
+ 5H,
+ 4H 2
indene
0 OH
S or Se
CH,
Se
eyc/oheptane
CH 3 .
CH,
§3]
POLYCYCLIC AROMATIC
HYDROCARBONS
347
CH 2 -CH 2 CH 2 -C0 2 H
OGEL
Se
Se
HO
Pd-C
cm ch.
BENZANTHRACENES §3.
Naphthacene (2 : 3-
Benzanthracene), C 18 H 12 , is an
orange solid, m.p. 357°. It occurs in
coal-tar, and has been synthesised
as follows (Fieser. 1931).
When oxidised with fuming nitric
acid, naphthacene forms
naphthacene-quinone.
CsHs C 6 H 5
CeH 5 CeHj
It is interesting to note that
Dufraisse originally gave rubrene
structure II, but changed it to I in
1935. The mechanism of the
reaction is uncertain. Rubrene is an
orange-red solid, m.p. 334°. Its
solution in benzene has a yellow
fluorescence, but when this
solution is shaken with air in
sunlight, the fluorescence slowly
disappears, and a white solid can
now be isolated. This is rubrene
peroxide, and when heated to 100-
140° in a high vacuum, it emits
yellow-green light and evolves
oxygen, reforming rubrene.
CeHij C 8 H 5
air—sunlight
heat in a vacuum
IS 14 1 12 13 14 15
2 UC
3 10$ 7 6 5 4
pentacene
iMgBr
xxco
1-naphthalene-magnesium bromide
COOl
2-naphthoic acid
2-methyl-naphthalene
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. X
pyrene
H0 2 C
'Ho
Zrt dust distil
HO 2 0. CR. XIH,
§3f. 20-Methylcholanthrene is a
pale yellow solid, m.p. 180°. It is a
steroid derivative, and has been
prepared by the degradation of, e.g.,
cholesterol (see §3 iii. XI). Cook
(1934) showed that
methylcholanthrene has powerful
carcinogenic properties, and Fieser
et al. (1935) synthesised it in the
following way:
§4]
POLYCYCLIC AROMATIC
HYDROCARBONS
351
CH
CI AIC1,
+ COCl-CH 2 -CH 2 Cl -^ J -
COCH 2 -CH 2 Cl CH 3 '
CO-CHaCI^Cl
CH 3
PHENANTHRENE DERIVATIVES
/CHjjMgBr CH,
[CH. X
HjS0 4
(iii) By a Pschorr synthesis [cf. §2
(vi) a].
(II) A1C1 3
§4c]
POLYCYCLIC AROMATIC
HYDROCARBONS
353
synthesised by heating 1-
methylnaphthalene with sulphur at
300° (see also §3d).
CH 2 COC1 1 I Alcia x
„ n x^ C0CI c 6 h b no 2
Buchta et al. (1958) have
synthesised pyrene using an
internal Stobbe reaction [§2 (vi) c]:
C0 2 Et ^2
C0 2 Et
CH
+ J30 _MfONa^
QH 2
Zn
heaT
C0 2 Et
OH
§4c. Perylene is a very pale yellow
solid, m.p. 273°. It occurs in coal-
tar, and has been synthesised in
several ways.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. X
9 10
IIII
120-260°
(iii) Perylene is formed when 1 : l'-
dinaphthyl is heated with hydrogen
fluoride under pressure.
HF
Robertson et al. (1953), by X-ray
analysis of perylene, have shown
that the two bonds connecting the
two naphthalene units are longer
(1-50 A) than the usual aromatic C
—C bond (1-38-1-44 A). The
existence of these long bonds is
supported by some magnetic
susceptibility measurements
(Hazato, 1949).
§4d]
POLYCYCLIC AROMATIC
HYDROCARBONS
CH 3
355
CI p-co
CH 3
+2
1GR c « H » NO »
CO-O CI
alkaline KMn0 4
C0 2 H
C0 2 H
C0 2 H
COoH
C0 2 H
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY C0 2 H
|CH. X
C0 2 H
C0 2 H C0 2 H
Newman (1940) has also
synthesised coronene, starting from
7-methyl-tetralone, and proceeding
as follows:
OH heat
OH (-2HaO)
§4d]
POLYCYCLIC AROMATIC
HYDROCARBONS
357
The simplest and most efficient
synthesis of coronene appears to be
that of Clar et al. (1957). The
starting material is perylene (§4c),
and this is treated with (i) maleic
anhydride and chloranil, and
followed by (ii) heating with soda-
lime; these processes are then
repeated:
(i)
(ii)
(i)
(ii)
READING REFERENCES
Encyclopaedia of Organic
Chemistry, Elsevier. Vol. 14 (1940).
Tetracyclic and Higher-Cyclic
Compounds. See also Vol. 14
Supplement (1951).
CHAPTER XI
STEROIDS
§1. Introduction. The steroids form
a group of structurally related
compounds which are widely
distributed in animals and plants.
Included in the steroids are the
sterols (from which the name
steroid is derived), vitamin D, the
bile acids, a number of sex
hormones, the adrenal cortex
hormones, some carcinogenic
hydrocarbons, certain sapogenins,
etc. The structures of the steroids
are based on the 1 : 2-
cjyc/opentenophenanthrene
skeleton (Rosenheim and King,
1932; Wieland and Dane, 1932). All
the steroids
1:2-cyc/opentenophenanthrene
Diels' hydrocarbon
STEROLS
HO
have the established structure of
cholesterol at the beginning of our
discussion. I is the structure of
cholesterol, and shows the method
of numbering. The molecule
consists of a side-chain and a
nucleus which is composed of four
rings; these rings are usually
designated A, B, C and D or I, II, III
and
Me
I CH(CH 2 ) 3 CHMe 2
C27H46O C 27 H 4g 04 C 2g H 44 0
III V VI
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
H O CrO
VII
VIII
(i) -H,0
CrO,
(ii) Zn—OH.-COjH
IX
*-'27"44^8
In the conversion of I into VII, the
double bond in I is hydroxylated.
Since only two of the three hydroxyl
groups in VII are oxidised to
produce VIII, these two groups are
secondary alcoholic groups (one of
these being the secondary alcoholic
group in cholesterol), and the third,
being resistant to oxidation, is
probably a tertiary alcoholic group.
Dehydration of VIII (by heating in
vacuo) and subsequent reduction of
the double bond forms IX, and this,
on oxidation, gives a tetracarboxylic
acid without loss of carbon atoms.
Thus the two keto groups in IX
must be in different rings; had they
been in the same ring, then carbon
would have been lost and X not
obtained. It therefore follows that
the hydroxyl group and double bond
in cholesterol must be in different
rings. Furthermore, since IX forms
a pyridazine derivative with
hydrazine, IX is a y-diketone. Since
we have already tentatively placed
the hydroxyl group in ring A, the
above reactions can be readily
explained if we place the hydroxyl
group at position 3, and the double
bond between 5 and 6. In the
following equations only rings A
and B are drawn; this is an accepted
convention of focusing attention on
any part of the steroid molecule
that is under consideration (also
note that full lines represent groups
lying above the plane, and broken
lines groups lying below the plane;
see also §§4, 4a, 4b). Noller (1939)
has shown that the pyridazine
derivative is a polymer, and so the
interpretation that IX is a y-
diketone is rendered uncertain.
Supporting evidence, however, for
the above interpretation is afforded
by the fact that when cholesterol is
heated with copper oxide at 290°,
cholestenone, XI, is produced, and
this on oxidation with
permanganate forms a keto-acid,
XII, with the loss of one carbon
atom. The formation of XII
indicates that the keto group and
the double bond in cholestenone
are in the same ring. The ultraviolet
absorption spectrum of
cholestenone shows that the keto
group and the double bond are
conjugated (Menschick et al., 1932).
These results can be explained if we
assume that the double bond in
cholesterol migrates in the
formation of cholestenone, the
simplest explanation being that the
hydroxyl group
VIII
§3]
STEROIDS
363
HOjC HQjC,
J 4T pyridazine derivative
+ CO,
XI
XII
HO-^/?\/ HO
Vila VIIA
§3]
STEROIDS
365
HO'
CH 3 -COO
CrOj
CHsCOO'
CrO,
CH 3 COO'
CH.
3\
CHirCHaCHgCH
X CH 3
HCl
H20
R-CH 2 -C(OH)(C 6 H 5 ) 2 — *-> R-
CH=C(C 6 H 5 )
CrO,
R-C0 2 H + (C 6 H 5 ) 2 CO
Ar—C„ Ar—C M _ 3
B-W
(C 6 H s ) a CO + Norcholanic acid
>
Ar—C n _ 4
B-W
(C 6 H 5 ) 2 CO -f- Bisnorcholanic
acid >
Ar—C n _5
CtO
(C 6 H 5 ) 2 CO + ^tiocholyl methyl
ketone '-> Etianic acid
Ar—C„_ 6 Ar—C„_7
(ii) CHjN,
CrO
Ar-CHMe-CH=CH-CO-CH 3 V Ar-
CHMe-C0 2 H
Ar-CHMe-CH 2 -CH=CPh 2
^""""""V Ar-CHMe-CHBr-CH=CPh
2 ^% succinimide
CrO
Ar-CMe=CH-CH=CPh 2 V Ar-COMe
§3]
STEROIDS
367
CrO,
dehydronorcholene 20-
methylcholanthrene
C0 8 H
CrO.
C0 2 H
5:6-dimethyl-l:2-
benzanthraquinone-
HOjC
HOijC
anthraquinone -1:2:5:6-
tetracarboxylic acid
It should be noted that the isolation
of methylcholanthrene affords
additional evidence for the presence
of the cycfopentenophenanthrene
nucleus in cholesterol.
[CH. XI
OH 3 -COCH 3 + f
00 2 H B _.
coprostane
cholanic acid
CO-H
B--W
C0 2 H
B-W^
norcholanic acid
C0 2 H
bisnorcholanic acid
CrO, ,
B-w
hno 3
M/
.CO a H
?OaH
etianic acid
setiocholanone
setiobilianic acid
ffitiobilianic acid XV
anhydride
1:2-dimethylphenanthrene XVI
§3]
STEROIDS
369
CL
C-C-C—C-C0 2 H
2B-\V
Zn-Hg HCl *
H0 2 <I
CO.H
HO
cholesterol
Diels' hydrocarbon
chrysene
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
C0 2 H
HNO3
deoxycholic acid
dehydrodeoxycholic acid
CO,H
H0 2 C
deoxybilianic acid
pyrodeoxybilianic acid
KMn0 4
CO,H
C0 2 H C0 2 H XVII
diketo-dicarboxylic acid
heat
C0 2 H
HO,
HNO a
C0 2 H
HO.C
§3]
STEROIDS
371
if\(
C Ho(J CH3+ ^ S °— ° H3
CH 3
'NO,
Sn-HCl CH 3 Of
CH 3 Ol
^H 3 FeC i 8 T nCH 3
^ m '°\Ao
XXI
§3]
373
CH;
/>H 2 CH, CH
+ CH
LiAlH,
CH3O
C a H 8 -CO (CH
Hoso4
XXIX
/CH3
^Q-CH=CH 3 CH 2 s)aCOK pQ
CH^oHd H !HO
XXVIII
XXX
KOH
(CHs)aCO
C(CH,) 2
XXXI
:C(CH 3 ) 2
XXXV
0^\}
XXXVI
(CH 3 )2
XXXVII
XXXVIII
CHO
XL
XXXIX
C0 2 CH 3
XLI
§3]
STEROIDS
375
HO
C0 2 CH 3 L--H
C0 2 CH 3
CH 3 -COO
XLVI
XLVII
XLVIH
cholestanol
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
(CH 3 CO)jO
CH3COO'
LII
LIII
cholesterol
STEROIDS
377
conventions). Furthermore, by
convention, the methyl group at C
10 in cholestane has been placed
above the plane of the molecule,
and therefore this leads to four
possible stereoisomers for
cholestane (I-IV). X-ray
analysis has shown that the
hydrogen atom at C 9 is trans to the
methyl group at C 10 (Bernal et al.,
1940), and this conclusion is
supported by chemical evidence.
Thus cholestane must be I or III.
Further chemical work has shown
that the methyl groups at C 10 and
C 13 are cis, and so cholestane is I,
and consequently coprostane is also
I, except that in this case the
hydrogen atom at C 5 is above the
plane (rings A/B are cis in
coprostane). The final point to be
settled in connection with this
problem of the configuration of
cholestane is the orientation of the
side-chain R at C 17 . Chemical
evidence and X-ray analysis studies
have shown that this side-chain is
above the plane of the molecule
(i.e., cis with respect to the two
angular methyl groups). Thus
cholestane and coprostane are:
Cholestane
Coprostane
OH I
§4c]
STEROIDS
379
Correlation of configurations in
steroids has also been carried out
by the method of rotatory
dispersion (§12a. I). Saturated
steroids have been examined
(Djerassi et al., 1956) and the
results show that as the position of
the carbonyl group changes in A/B
foms-steroids, the curves change in
sign, shape and/or amplitude. Thus
this method may be used to locate
the unknown position of a carbonyl
group in a steroid. The authors also
showed that for a given position of
the carbonyl group, the shape of the
curve depends on the conformation
of the molecule. Thus, by
comparing the curve of the
compound under investigation with
that of a compound of known
absolute configuration and
containing the carbonyl group in
the same position, it is then
possible to deduce the absolute
configuration of a group in the
unknown compound.
H.-Pt
cholesterol
cholestanol
cholestanone
Hj-Pt
solution
HO
H cholestanol
(main product)
epicholestanol
(main product)
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
HO
Oppenauer oxidation
cholesterol
cholest-4-en-3-one
coprostanone
H s -Pt
H
coprostanol
neutral
H epicoprostanol
II
aa
III
Cholestanol [30(e)]
io%i
* 80%
Epicholestanol [3<x(a)]
Coprostanol [30(a)]
I 90% T
Epicoprostanol [3oc(e)]
[CH. XI
!0 2 H
CH,-COO
COJI
§5]
STEROIDS
383
C0 2 H
CHO I CH-CH(CH 3 ) 2
CH S IV
CHvCOO'
'C0 2 H
ergostanyl acetate
+ CH 3
CO-CHfCHak
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
HO
ergosterol
§6. Vitamin D. This vitamin is the
antirachitic vitamin; it is essential
for bone formation, its function
being the control of calcium and
phosphorus metabolism.
HO
ergosterol
pre-ergocalciferol
OH tachysterol
HO-ergocalciferol
HO
lumisterol
hv hv hv
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
FH
.^COjH
STEROIDS
387
CHs-COO'
Cr0 3 ,
cholesteryl acetate
CH,CO
uaih 4
HO'
C 8 H 6 COO
OCOC 6 H 6
C t H.N(CH»)a reflux
0 6 Hfi-COO
7-dehydrocholesterol
7-Dehydrocholesterol, on
irradiation with ultraviolet light,
gives a product that is about as
active as ergocalciferol (vitamin D 2
). This product was shown to be
impure, and the pure active
constituent was isolated as the 3 :
5-dinitrobenzoate (Windaus et al.,
1936). This vitamin D with a
cholesterol side-chain is named
vitamin D 3 , and has been shown
to be identical with the natural
vitamin that is isolated from tunny-
liver oil (Brockman, 1937). Vitamin
D 3 has also been isolated from
other fish-liver oils, e.g., halibut.
The Chemical Society (1951) has
proposed the name cholecalci-ferol
for vitamin D 3 . It has now been
shown that the irradiation of 7-
dehydrocholesterol (at low
temperature) first produces the
previtamin D 3 , and this, on gentle
heating, is converted into the
vitamin itself (cf. ergocalciferol, §6).
Irradiation of 22 : 23-
dihydroergosterol gives a
compound with antirachitic
properties (Windaus et al., 1937);
this is known as vitamin D 4 .
HO
HO
vitamin D 3
vitamin D t
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
C0 2 H
CH 3 -000
stigmastanyl acetate
CH 3 -00O /
acetate of 3p-hydroxynor-
a//ocholanic acid
et al., 1934; cf. ergosterol, §5).
Ozonolysis of stigmasterol gives,
among other products,
ethyh'sopropylacetaldehyde
(Guiteras, 1933). This suggests that
the side-chain is as shown in I, with
a double bond at 22 : 23.
CHO I CH-CH(CH3)2
C2H6
ethyhsopropylacetaldehyde
Thus the final problem is to
ascertain the position of the second
double bond in stigmasterol. This
has been shown to be 5 : 6 by the
method used for cholesterol
(Fernholz, 1934). Stigmasterol, on
hydroxylation with hydrogen
peroxide in acetic acid, gives a triol
which, on oxidation with chromium
trioxide, forms a hydroxydiketone.
This, on dehydration followed by
reduction, forms a dione which
combines with hydrazine to form a
pyridazine derivative. These
reactions can be explained as
follows (cf. cholesterol, §3 ii):
hydroxydiketone X.
dione
pyridazine
§7a]
STEROIDS
389
stigmasterol
§7a. Biosynthesis of sterols. It has
long been known that animals can
synthesise cholesterol, but the
possible pathways were unknown
until biosynthetic cholesterol was
prepared from acetic acid labelled
isotopically (with "C) in either the
methyl (m) or the carboxyl (c)
group, or labelled in both groups (
13 CH 3 a4 C0 2 H). These tracer
studies were carried out mainly by
B\och etal. (1942-) and by
Cornforth et al. (1953-), and the
results established that the
distribution of the carbon atoms is
as shown in I. Thus
cc
m I | /m
III
m^ / m \ / m
C0
-tn
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
squalene
lanosterol
HO'
cholesterol
Bloch et al. (1957) also found that
the three methyl groups of
lanosterol are eliminated as carbon
dioxide (via oxidation to carboxyl
groups). Several intermediates and
new precursors which function
between lanosterol and cholesterol
have now been identified
(Cornforth, 1959; Crabbe, 1959).
Finally, studies with yeast extracts
have shown the mevalonic acid 5-
pyro-phosphate, isopentenyl
pyrophosphate, geranyl
pyrophosphate and farnesyl
pyrophosphate are successive
intermediates in the biosynthesis of
squalene (see §32a. VIII).
The biosynthesis of ergosterol from
acetate has been carried out by
Bloch et al. (1951), and the
distribution pattern corresponds to
that of cholesterol. Bloch et al.
(1957) also showed that formate is
an efficient source for the methyl
group at C 28 .
BILE ACIDS
C0 2 H
cholanic acid
a/Zocholanic acid
AZ/ocholanic acid.
HO'
cholesterol
cholestanol
cholestanone
C0 2 H
cholestane
a/focholanic acid
Cholanic acid.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
cholesterol
cholest-4-en-3-one
(!) CrOa
(ii) Zn-Hg/HCl
coprostanol
C0 2 H
coprostane
cholanic acid
HO
H
lithocholic acid
H 2 -Pt
HH
cholenic acid
C0 2 H
cholanic acid
STEROIDS
393
C0 2 H
C0 2 H
The above evidence is not
conclusive, since had the hydroxyl
group in lithocholic acid been at
position 4, III could still have been
obtained. In practice, however, the
oxidation of I produces two
isomeric acids for II, one being II as
shown, and the other Ila, in which
the ring A is opened between C 2
and C 3 ; this acid, on further
oxidation, gives wolithobilianic
acid, Ilia. Since the oxidation of
lithocholic acid, IV, also produces a
mixture of the same two acids, III
and Ilia, there can be no doubt that
the hydroxyl group is at position 3.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
HO
H0 2 C H0 2 C
C0 2 H
Ilia
lithocholic acid
5 - jsoandrosterone
epicoprostanol
SEX HORMONES
§12]
STEROIDS
395
ANDROGENS
§12. Androsterone, C 19 H 30 O 2 ,
m.p. 184-185°, is dextrorotatory. It
was first isolated by Butenandt et
al. (1931) from male urine (about 15
mg. from 15,000 litres of urine).
Androsterone behaves as a
saturated compound, and since it
forms mono-esters, one oxygen
atom is present as a hydroxyl group.
The functional nature of the other
oxygen atom was shown to be oxo,
since androsterone forms an oxime,
etc. The parent hydrocarbon of
androsterone, C^rl^Oa, is therefore
C 19 H 32 , and since this
corresponds to the general formula
C„H 2 „_6, the molecule is
tetracyclic. This led to the
suggestion that androsterone
probably contains the steroid
nucleus, and since it is a
hydroxyketone, it was thought that
it is possibly related to
CH s -COO
cholestanyl acetate
epiandrosterone
CH,-COO'
HO'
epicholestanyl acetate
H androsterone
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
TsO'
Soon after the discovery of
androsterone, Butenandt et al.
(1934) isolated two other hormones
from male urine, 5-woandrosterone
and dehydroepi-androsterone. Then
Laqueur (1935) isolated the
hormone testosterone from steer
testes (10 mg. from 100 kg. of
testes).
HO-'
5-z.s0androsterone
dehydroepiandrosterone
testosterone
§13. Testosterone, C ]9 H 28 0 2 ,
m.p. 155°, is dextrorotatory.
Testosterone has been produced
commercially by the following
method of Butenandt
§13]
STEROIDS
397
CrOa-CKs-COsH
cholesterol
CH,COO
HO dehydroepiandrosterone
OH
CH 3 -COO'
(i) CeHfCOCl (ii) mild hydrolysis
(CH 3 OH-NaOH)
HO
OCO-C«H 5
0-CO-C 6 H 5
testosterone
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
HO' V V O" V \y O*
dehydroepiandrosterone androst-4-
ene-3:17-dione
testosterone
(ESTROGENS
%U]
STEROIDS
399
,CH 2 MgBr
/CH 2 , OH.
CH 3 0
CH3O'
7-methoxy-l:2-
cyc/opentenophenanthxene
CH,0
O HO, y CH,
GH 3 0
(-H a O)
II
CH 3 , /CH 3
CH 3 \ yCH 3
CH3O
CH,0
The structure of V has been
confirmed by synthesis (Cook et al.,
1935). Thus the structure of
cestrone is:
cestrone
§15]
STEROIDS
401
CH 3 0
POClj
,C0 2 CH 3 ^^COjCHs
+ CUJBr-COJJH.n+Zrt-* I C
0 /\ZV/rCH,<XV3H,
CH.N / ^W
CH 3 0*
C0 2 CH 3 aq. /\l/C0 2 CH 3
methanolic I ^
^CHC0 2 CH 3 AyAcH^COjCHs^"
<\Vm3H 2 -C0 2 H
(COCI)j
(\>AcH 2 -COCl
C0 2 CH 3
AgOH ^ CH s OH
CH 2 -CO-CHN 2 diazoketone
^ N i / C0 2 CH 3
I C 160
C0 2 H
Pb(CO„),
CH 2 -CH 2 C0 2 H
CH 3 0
HBr
CH 3 -COjH
HO
(±)-oestroDe
(±)-cestrone resolved with (—)-
menthoxyacetic acid. The (+)-
enantio-morph that was obtained
was shown to be identical with the
natural compound.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
and cestrone is produced. It
therefore follows that cestriol has
the same carbon skeleton as
cestrone, and that the two alcoholic
groups in cestriol are at positions 16
and 17. Structure I for cestriol fits
the above facts, and is supported by
the following evidence. When fused
with potassium hydroxide, cestriol
forms marrianolic acid, II, and this,
on dehydrogenation with selenium,
is converted into a
hydroxydimethylphenanthrene, III,
which, on distillation with zinc
dust, gives a
dimethylphenanthrene, IV. The
structure of IV was shown to be 1 :
2-dimethylphenanthrene by
synthesis, and since marrianolic
acid forms an anhydride when
heated with acetic anhydride, it
therefore follows that cestriol
contains a phenanthrene nucleus
and a five-membered ring, the
position of the latter being 1 : 2
(where the two methyl groups are
in IV). Finally, the structure of III
was shown to be 7-hydroxy-1 : 2-
dimethylphenanthrene by synthesis
(Haworth et al., 1934), and so if I is
the structure of cestriol, the
degradation to the phenanthrene
derivatives may be explained as
follows:
HO
..OH
HO
C0 2 H
Hg-COgH Se
II
HO
III
HO
cestrone
cestradiol
§15]
STEROIDS
403
CH 3 0
methyl ether of cestrone
CH3O
Na
(CH,) s CHOH
CH3O
OH
NOH
Zn dust CH 3 -COjH
/OH
HBr
CUs-COjH
OAc
HO
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
§16. (Estradiol, C 18 H 24 0 2 .
HO. ,H
HO
HO
OH
ot-cestradiol (oestradiol-17(3)
p-oestradiol (cestradiol-17et)
OH
CHjN a
HO
CH 3 0
-oestradiol
CH3O
7-methoxy-3 -methyl-1:2-
cyc/opentenophenanthrene
§17]
STEROIDS
405
HO
cestrone
K-NH. C 2 H 2
HO
OH /C=CH
17a-ethinylcestradiol
§17. (+)-Equilenin, C 18 H 18 0 2 ,
m.p. 258-259°, has been isolated
from the urine of pregnant mares
by Girard et al. (1932); it is not a
very potent oestrogen. The
reactions of equilenin show that a
phenolic hydroxyl group and a
ketonic group are present, and also
that the molecule contains five
double bonds (cf. cestrone, §14).
When the methyl ether of equilenin
is treated with methylmagnesium
iodide, then the alcohol dehydrated,
cata-lytically reduced and then
dehydrogenated with selenium, the
product is 7-methoxy-3': 3'-
dimethyl-l: 2-
cycZopentenophenanthrene, II (cf.
cestrone, §14). Thus the structure of
equilenin is the same as that of
cestrone, except that the former has
two more double bonds than the
latter (Cook et al., 1935). Now the
absorption spectrum of equilenin
shows that it is a naphthalene
derivative. Thus, since ring A in
cestrone is benzenoid, it appears
probable that ring B in equilenin is
also benzenoid, i.e., rings A and B
form the naphthalene nucleus in
equilenin. All the foregoing
reactions of equilenin may be
readily explained by assuming that I
is its structure, and further
evidence that has been given to
support this is the claim by Marker
et al. (1938) that equilenin may be
reduced to cestrone, III, by sodium
and ethanol. This reduction,
however, has apparently never been
substantiated (cf. Dauben et al.,
1956).
Cxi» v CxLj
CHoO
HO
equilenin
[CH. XI
H0 3 S
NH,
NH-CO-OHs
HO
(CH 3 -CO) s O
Cleve's acid
NH,
CH 3 0
CH.OH
(i) N aN02-H 2 S0 4
/ CH 2 Br CH 2
PBr 3
CH 3 0
CH3O
.CH^ OH. QH 2
C0 2 H
(i)SOCla^ (ii)SnCU CH 0
IV
§17a] STEROIDS
407
CH,0
) HCOjCjH.
CH.ONa * r A
CH 3 o
OHO
n ^ NHaOHHCl
' CHj'COjH
CH 3 I
. CH 3
Pd-C
Reduction of V gives a mixture of
(±)-equilenin methyl ether, VI
(rings C/D trans), and woequilenin
methyl ether (rings C/D cis); these
are separated by fractional
crystallisation from acetone-
methanol, the equilenin derivative
being the less soluble isomer.
Product VII is (±)-equilenin, and is
resolved via the menthoxyacetic
ester. The (+)-equilenin so obtained
is identical with the natural
product. It should be noted here
that equilenin contains only two
asymmetric carbon atoms, and so
the stereochemical problems
involved are far simpler than those
for cholesterol and cestrone.
§17a. (+)-Equilin, C 18 H 20 O ?)
m.p. 238-240°, has also been
isolated from the urine of pregnant
mares (Girard et al., 1932), and its
structure has been shown to be:
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
HO
equilin
Stilboestrol (4 : 4'-
dihydroxydiethylstilbene) was
prepared by Dodds et al. (1939) as
follows:
CH 3 0 <r~^CH 2 CO^T~^OCH 3
deoxyanisoin
anisaldehyde
C 2 H 6 ONh
c2hbi
QHsMgl
*■ CH 3 0
*- CH,0
PBr 3
(-H2O)
->- CH3O
ethanolic KOH
HO
C2H5
CH-CO
Q2HS C2H5
CH—C I OH
C2H5 C 2 H 5 C==C
O2H5 CjHs C=C
OOH 3
OCH 3
OCH,
OH
HO
rrans-stilboestrol
CH 3 0<^ J>CH=CH-CH 3 -^ CH 3
0<^ J)>CHBrCH 2 -CH 3 anethole
NaNH 3
liq. NH 3
c H30Yy-CH-CH-<^y>0CH3
CH CH 2
II I
Hexoestrol (dihydrostilbcestrol)
may be prepared from anethole
hydro-bromide as follows:
m^t c 2 h 6
KOH
C 2 H 6 C2H5 hexoestrol
GESTOGENS
§19. Progesterone, C 21 H 30 O 2 ,
m.p. 128°, was first isolated in a
pure form by Butenandt et al.
(1934) from the corpora lutea of
pregnant sows.
The chemical reactions of
progesterone show that there are
two keto groups present, and since
on catalytic reduction three
molecules of hydrogen are added to
form the dialcohol C 21 H 36 O s , it
therefore follows that progesterone
contains one double bond (four
hydrogen atoms are used to convert
the two keto groups to alcoholic
groups). Thus the parent
hydrocarbon of progesterone is C 21
H 36 , and since this corresponds to
the general formula C„H 2 „_ 6 ,
progesterone is therefore
tetracyclic. Furthermore, X-ray
studies have shown that
progesterone contains the steroid
nucleus, and this is further
supported by the fact that
progesterone may be prepared
from, e.g., stigmasterol and
cholesterol. These preparations also
show the structure of progesterone,
but do not provide conclusive
evidence for the position of the
double bond in progesterone, since
the results can be interpreted
equally well on the assumption that
the double bond is 4 : 5 or 5 : 6. The
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
absorption spectrum of
progesterone, however, shows that
it is an a: /S-unsaturated ketone,
and this suggests that the position
of the double bond is 4: 5 (see
below). Finally, progesterone has
also been synthesised from
diosgenin and from pregnanediol,
and the preparation from the latter,
taken in conjunction with the
others, definitely shows that the
position of the double bond in
progesterone is 4 : 5.
CH 3 CO
CH 3 N C=C(C 6 H 5 ) 2
CH 3 CO
pregnenolone progesterone
HO'
cholesterol
HO
dehydroepiandrosterone
HO v CN
CH 3 COO
HO
CH,M g Br
pregnenolone
progesterone
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
diosgenin
CrO,
CH,COO
pregnenolone
progesterone
Saponins and Sapogenins. Saponins
are plant glycosides, and the
aglycon is known as the sapogenin
(cf. §24. VII). Saponins are very
powerful emulsifiers, and derive
their name from this property; they
are used as detergents.; There are
two groups of saponins, the steroid
and the triterpenoid saponins, and
these two groups may be
distinguished by the fact that only
the former group gives Diels'
hydrocarbon on distillation with
selenium; the triterpenoid group
gives mainly naphthalene or picene
derivatives (cf. §1).
§19]
STEROIDS
413
CH,
CHOH
CH,
HO
H pregnanediol
CH,COO
IHO-COCH.
KOII
HO'
CH 3 CHO-COCH 3
(ii)CrOa
O"
Br
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
ergosterol
ergosterone
MeO 1
jjoergosterone CHO
C 6 H 10 NH
CH,
progesterone
CH 3 CHOH
HO'
H pregnanediol
pregnanedione
Zn-Hg ; HCl
ADRENAL CORTICAL HORMONES
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XI
andrenosterone
Substance Q;
11-Deoxycorticosterone; 21 -Hy
droxyprogesterone
Substance H;
Corticosterone; 11 : 21-Dihydroxy-
progesterone
Compound A;
11 -Dehydrocorticosterone; 21 -
Hydroxy-11 -keto-progesterone
Substance S;
1 l-Deoxy-17-hydroxy-corticosterone
Substance M;
17-Hydroxy-corticosterone
Substance F;
Compound E; 11 -Dehydro-17-
hydroxy-corticosterone; cortisone
§22]
STEROIDS
417
C0 2 H
HO
HO
pregnenolone
COC1
CHa-COO'
(i)CH 2 N g (ii)KOH
HO
O-0HN 2
0'
ov
deoxycorticosterone
CH 3 COO v H
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
CH 2 0-COCH 3
I CO
CH 3 -COO'
[CH. XI CH2OCOCH3
C(OH)-CN
CH 2 OH
C-CN
HO'
CH 2 OCOCH 3
I /ON
°-°>o 2 -o
(i)(CH,-CO) a O
CH 2 0-COCH 3
00 -OH
CH 2 0-COCH 3
I OCN
CHoOH
CHjOH
(i)-HBr
cortisone
A UXINS
§23. It had been suggested for some
years by botanists that various
substances had plant growth-
promoting properties, but it was not
until 1933 that such compounds
were actually isolated. In 1933, K6gl
et at. isolated an active compound
from human urine, and they named
it auxin a and showed that its
structure is I. Soon afterwards, Kogl
et al. isolated auxin b (II) from
maize germ oil.
C,H,-CH-^ ^-CH-CsHs
^CHOH-CHuCHOHCHOHCOjH
I
auxin a
^CHOH-CHjCOCHjCOjH II auxin b
CH,-C0 8 H
indole-3-aoetic acid
^jOCHjCOaH
IV V
CHAPTER XII
HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
CONTAINING TWO OR MORE
HETERO-ATOMS
AZOLES
III + CH 2 N 2 CH
CH-ti*
CH
CH 5 . 2N H
(ii) By heating epichlorohydrin with
hydrazine in the presence of zinc
chloride (Balbiano, 1890).
CHOH -CH 2
CH 2 NH
\ / NH
HO,C HO
|C0 2 H gjjO
o-
3 CO,
(C a H B 0) a CH.CH a -CH(OC a H
6)a,
o
3 II
NH
^H
II
v"
-Q 1
H
H
3-substitution
4-substitution
-Oil, ,0-07
HHH
pyrazoline pyrazolidine
RRR
1I„I
(a) CH 2 =^^= CH + | *■ CH | + 2H
20
X CO V CO H 2 N X C=N
I, I, ',
R R' R
RRR
III
/CO CO H 2 N /C=N
(b) CH 2 =?=^ CH + I *- CH | + 2H
20
T =f=*= II *~ || || 1 Q xt 0
NH N
CeH 5 C 6 H 5
In a few cases, two isomers have
been isolated, e.g., 3-a-
benzoylacetyl-l : 5-
diphenylpyrazole, I, reacts with
phenylhydrazine to produce a
mixture of 1:1': 5 : 5'-tetraphenyl-3 :
3'-dipyrazolyl, II, and 1 : 1': 3': 5-
tetraphenyl-3 : 5'-dipyrazolyl, III
(Finar, 1955).
C 6 H 5 -CO-CH 2 -CO-C CH
|| II + C 6 H 5 NH-NH 2 *■
N C-C 6 H 5
IIC6H5
CH—C—C—OH C 6 H 5 -C CH
II II II II + 11 II C 6 H 5 -0 .N N CC
6 H 5 N C-C CH
V V V II ll
II IN. X>C 6 H 5 C 6 H 5 6 6 H 5 C 6
H5\N/
II III C 6 H 5
I Jl >-H 2 0+ | B —»-| II +C 2 H 6
OH
C2H 5 0 2 C O C 2 H 5 0 2 C JZ CO
N
/NH 2 H 2 N W
H 2 1T H
C 2 H 5 0 2 C-C CH-C0 2 C 2 H 5 C
2 H 5 0 2 C-C — C-C0 2 C 2 H 5
III + II * II II
C 2 H 5 0 2 C-C N 2 C 2 H 6 0 2 C-C
sN
C 2 H 5 0 2 C-CH CH-C0 2 C 2 H 6
C 2 H 6 0 2 C-CH— CC0 2 C,H 5
+"—'1
CH-00 2 C 2 H 6 N 2 0 2 H 5 0 2
CCH
NlH
\N/
\I
CH—C-R' R-C CH
II II II II
R-C /N N C-R'
1* N
i i-
OH—CHO CH — CH CH 2 —OH
CH 2 + NH 2 CH 2 N CH 2 #
NH 2 H 2 lT V
II
0 6 H 5 0 6 H5
H0 ° C V V V N
HHH
CHr-CH
N / C,H,OH ^*/
II
CeH 5 CeHs
1-Unsubstituted pyrazoles
apparently cannot be
chloromethylated; carbinols are
produced, e.g. (Dvoretzky et al.,
1950):
n CH 3 HC ,
+ CH 2 0 *-
CH 3 V N/ N H
?H7
CH 2 OH CH 2 OH
(main product)
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XII
™CH 2 C1
N 0 + CH 2 0 + HCI N
C,H 6
I
+H20
4-Chloromethyl-l-phenylpyrazole
can be converted into 1-
phenylpyrazole-4-aldehyde by
means of the Sommelet reaction
(see Vol. I). The 4-aldehyde is more
conveniently prepared by the direct
formylation of 1-phenylpyra-zole
with dimethylformamide and
phosphoryl chloride (Finar et al.,
1957). 1-Phenylpyrazole can also be
mercuratedin the 4-position (Finar
et al., 1954). When boiled with
concentrated aqueous potassium
hydroxide, quaternary pyrazoles are
converted into hydrazines (Knorr et
al., 1906), e.g.,
O + cH 3 i-^ri
IC6HB
N I c bH s
R-CH N.
RCH,
RCH-RCH N H
Cu heat
RCH
I CH-C0 2 C 2 H 5 + N 2
Antipyrine (2 :3-dimethyl-l-
phenylpyrazol-5-one), m.p. 127°, is
very much used in medicine as a
febrifuge. It is prepared industrially
by condensing ethyl acetoacetate
with phenylhydrazine, and
methylating the product, 3-methyl-
l-phenylpyrazole-5-one, with
methyl iodide in alkaline ethanolic
solution, or with methyl sulphate in
the presence of sodium hydroxide.
CH 3 - C • OH 2
0 CO.C 2 H 5
+ C.H.NH-NH,
N C0 2 C 2 H 6 NH
IC6H5
CH,C-
-CH 2 +
C 2 H 5 OH
CH 3 I
CH,C=
?H
IC6H5
3-methyl- l-phenylpyrazol-5-one
CH 3 JJ CO N I CeHs
antipyrine
HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
427
§2b]
CH 3 C=CH
HN CO
C6H5
VI
produced in a small amount when
methyl iodide is used as the
methylating reagent). This raised
some doubts as to the structure of
antipyrine, since for its formation,
the tautomeric form VI must also
be postulated. The structure of
antipyrine was shown to be that
given above by its synthesis from
sym.-methylphenylhydrazine and
ethyl acetoacetate.
CH.
rc=c:
H
OH CO
OC 2 H 5 '
CH 3 -NH V
N NH
C6H6
CH 3 C — CH CH 3 N CO
I C«H«
+ H 2 0 + C 2 H 6 OH
-HjO
Indazole may conveniently be
prepared by heating o-2V-nitroso-
2V-benzoyl-toluidine in benzene
solution.
kAcH 3
CO-C 6 H 5 NO
J*+C 6 H s -C0 2 H
| + h-CHO >- II II + 3H 2°
CHO „„ CH CH
NH 3 \ N /
R— c=0 „ RC N
H
Imidazole itself is best prepared by
the action of ammonia on a mixture
of formaldehyde and tartaric acid
dinitrate (" dinitrotartaric acid "),
and then heating the dicarboxylic
acid thereby produced.
C0 2 H C0 2 H
II
C0 2 H C0 2 H $ H
Another good method is to
brominate paraldehyde in ethylene
glycol and to heat the product, 2-
bromomethyl-l : 3-dioxalan, with
formamide in the presence of
ammonia (Bredereck et al., 1958);
bromoacetaldehyde is probably an
intermediate:
CH«—O. CHO
| >H.CH 2 Br —^ I -S»
CH.-0 7 CH 2 Br NHs
-N
)
Imidazole, m.p. 90°, is a weak base,
but it is more basic than pyrazole.
Imidazole is a tautomeric
substance, since positions 4 and 5
are equivalent (positions 5, 4 and 2
have also been designated a, /5 and
fi, respectively).
CH* 2Cf
n—F
ch 3 i
o^a
KOH „ „ „ 1))CH
'N W
!H3
i.
An interesting method of preparing
4(5)-methylimidazole is by the
action of zinc hydroxide and
ammonia on glucose; the reaction is
assumed to occur via the
breakdown of glucose into
methylglyoxal and formaldehyde,
which then react as follows:
CH 3 -CO CH 3n N
CHO
The imidazole ring is extremely
stable towards oxidising and
reducing agents; hydrogen peroxide,
however, readily opens the ring to
form oxamide.
N h 3 q, , CONH 2
CO-NH 2
'N' H
ntnj/
N CH-NH-COC 6 H:
CH-NH-COC 6 H,
li
[J + 2C 6 H 6 -COCl+3NaOH H| +
H-C0 2 Na+2NaCl
HHHH
I II III IV
Brn N
+ 3HBr
Br
HH
§3a. Benzimidazoles
(benziminazoles). These are readily
formed by heating o-
phenylenediamines with carboxylic
acids, e.g., benzimidazole itself
+ jm »- [ H CH+2H 2 0
NH 2 (f W
OXAZOLE GROUP
I T ^=^ 0 H >■ II II
+H20
C-CHO
III + NH 2 OH-
CH
C CH
III II CH N
HO
CH —CH II II
CH N
OH—CH
II II -Ss^R-CO-CH^ON
RC. 2T XT
§4a. Oxazoles. Oxazoles may be
prepared by the condensation of
acid amides with oc-
halogenoketones, e.g., acetamide
and co-bromoacetophenone form 2-
methyl-4-phenyloxazole; the
mechanism of the reaction is not
certain but it may occur through the
enol forms.
C 6 H 5 -CO NH 2 __ C 6 H 5 -C0H
+ NH
+ HBr + H 2 0
A better method of preparation is
the dehydration of oc-
acylamidocarbonyl compounds with
sulphuric acid or phosphorus
pentachloride.
n—N
X OH HO' 0
NH> % Ay\.
OH H0 / VN/
THIAZOLE GROUP
S^ HS' N S/
I +1 ^=^ II + II »* +H 2 0+HC1
CH 2 C1 CH CHCI JCH ^ /
If thiourea or its substitution
products are used instead of
thioamides, then 2-aminothiazoles
are produced, e.g., thiazole may be
prepared from chloroacetaldehyde
and thiourea as follows:
CHO NH 2
CH 2 C1 + i-NH 2 "
CHOH NH n—N
II + \\ » + H 2 0+HC1
NaNO; HCI
OL •*- n
CH 2 —NH ^ CH N
\>H HO
2-Mercaptothiazoles may be
prepared by the condensation
between a-chloroketones and
ammonium dithiocarbamate.
R-CO NH 2 Rn N „ . , XTTI _,
I + | > I +H 2 0 + NH 4 C1
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XII
CH,
OOH
+ Br 2
chci 3
CH 3 , Br'
n— N
+ HBr
CHjj-NH, NH
I + II
CHjjBr OR
HS
CH.
■N
2 CR S
II + NH 4 Br
CH 2 —N
II .CCH 3
HCl
2-methylthiazoltne
CH 2 -NH 2 CH 2 SH
2 -ami noethanethiol
,HO2 C-CH-NH 2 CH 2 SH
+ R-CO-R
H0 2 C-CH—NH
■*" ' J, +
H,0
/y NH
CH
(CH 3 -CO)jO
HO
/
2JCH+2H 2 0
p s s«
NH-CO-CH.
C-CH,
§6]
HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
433
2-Mercaptobenzothiazole is a
vulcanisation accelerator (§33a.
VIII); it may be prepared as follows:
\AoH
+ CS 2
C-SH+H 2 0
iNH,
[o]
OC0 2 H -2co 2
fCOjH
TRIAZOLE GROUP
CH- .
Ill 3 CH^N
osotriazole
CH=N
iNH
FT
CHs zN H
HNj 5 CH
CHz A
triazole
CH CH—N
HN S
CH
CH N
CH 2 -C0 2 C 2 H 5 N CC0 2 C 2 H 6
C 6 H 5 -N 3 + J^ TI *- I | c „ + H 2
0
CO-CH 3
N CCH 3 N
C«H S
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XII
Derivatives of osotriazole may also
be prepared by the oxidation of
osazones with dichromate and
sulphuric acid, or with dilute copper
sulphate solution, e.g.,
benzilosazone gives 1:3: 4-
triphenylosotriazole.
C 6 H 5 -C=N-NH-C 6 H 6 C 6 H 6 -
C=N-NH-C 6 H 6
C 6 H 5 -C=N
NH,
OCH
N=
HC=0 H,N
NH
CH NH
CH
I + 2H 2 0
NH—NH I I
CH 3 -CO CO-CHs
V
I
CH,
N-
-N
ZnCla
KN
CH 3 -C ^C-CHs
OH HO
H vH
CH 3 C ^CCHa
NN
I CH,
II +2H 2 0
CH,
HNO,
HCl .
\K
=NC1
+HC1
CH—N II II
CH N
\>'
1:2:3-oxadiazole
f— ff H
cv
1:2:4-
oxadiazole
\/
1:2:5-oxadiazole
NN
II II
CH 6h \>
1:3:4-oxadiazole
NaOH R|? _
-C-B
II + h 2 o
/ ' * (CH,CO),0 / | T
c ^\ m ( _ Ha0) » W^l
CH, CH 3
Jm
>C0 2 H C CO
C 6 H B -K *" Ctf.-N I
X N0 N N—O
^N —O X N=0 + ^N—0 +
I II III
CH—C=0 Ar-N^ +
N—O
term meso-ionic to describe the
sydnone structure. Baker et al.
(1955) have, however, revised the
definition of the term meso-ionic,
and have proposed formula Va
instead of V. This is based on the
fact that sydnones are aromatic in
character, and the circle and plus
sign represent the sextet
Va
CH-C=0 5h-c=o
Ar-N/. | Ar-IST _ |
N N O X N—O
VI VII
TETRAZOLE GROUP
CH—N CH=N
I +HN 3 "I 1
\n-
C 6 H 5 -CH=N-NH-C 6 H 5 r H ON
C 6 H 6 -C=N-NH-C 6 H 6
. C a H 5 QNa^ I ^_
C 6 H 6 -N 3 N=N-NH-C 6 H 5
°< H ^ + C 6 H,NH 2
^ % >C 6 H 6
AZINES
DIAZINE GROUP
pyrimidine pyrazine
RRR
CO COH /\
CH 2 CH H^N CH NH
RRR
CHO CH NH a
II +1 *
CH NH Z
^
PYRIMIDINES
X NH 2 V NH 2 N NHCO-CH 3
acetylurea diacetyJurea
TTTWO
0.
.CO. .NH 2 H0 2 C / \
^ + W ^0£^ fH CH 2
x nh 2 ho 2 c x %ra /C °
.CO.
/NH 2 C 2 H 6 0 2 C v j^ \ H
\H 2 C^Ac' CO CO
X NH X
CH
§13b] HETEROCYCLIC
COMPOUNDS 439
Barbituric acid is a solid, m.p. 253°,
and is not very soluble in water. It
is strongly acidic due to enolisation
(lactam-lactim tautomerism); some
possible lactim forms are II-IV.
Structure IV represents barbituric
acid
OH OH
/a°\ / C °\ A A
I II III IV
as 2 : 4 : 6-trihydroxypyrimidine,
and this structure has been
proposed because of the acidic
nature of barbituric acid. On the
other hand, barbituric acid contains
an active methylene group, since it
readily forms an oximino derivative
with nitrous acid. Thus barbituric
acid behaves as if it had structure I,
II or III. Furthermore, it is very
difficult to acylate hydroxy-
pyrimidines containing hydroxyl
groups in the 2-, 4- or 6-positions,
thus indicating that structure I is
more probable than II or III. This is
supported by the fact that
methylation of hydroxypyrimidines
with, e.g., methyl iodide in the
presence of sodium hydroxide,
results in the formation of iV-
methyl derivatives; this indicates
the probable presence of imino
groups. On the other hand, it is
possible to replace three hydroxyl
groups by three chlorine atoms by
means of phosphoryl chloride; this
suggests barbituric acid behaves as
IV. Barbituric acid also forms O-
alkyl derivatives, thereby indicating
structures II, III and IV.
\ra 2 c 2 h A c^ W
5-cycZoHexyl-3:5-
dimethylbarbituric acid (Evipan) is
a better hypnotic than Barbitone
and is not so toxic. 5-Ethyl-5-
phenylbarbituric acid (Luminal) is
also used in medicine.
NH CH 2 NH C=NOH
I | + HN0 2 »- I I + H,0
CO CO CO CO
X NH 7 ^H^
/ C0 \ / C0 \ /*\
I I >■ I I ■< II
CO CO CO CO CO CO
N NH / ^NH 7 X NH
/C o CO CO
CO CO CO CO CO CO
N NH X X NH X N NH /
NH N CO NH V H0
I | + NH 4 -HS0 3 >- | l x S0 3 H -
^^-
CO CO CO CO
N NIT X NH X
H-NH 2
/ C0 \
NH OH'
CO CO X Nff uramil
+ H 2 S0 4
/CO\ /C O x DO
co do " bo co co Co
\NH / ^NH/ ^NH^
? H CI
/ C0 \ / C / C \ / C 6 H
NH CH 2 __ n' X CH pqc^ N^ CH
Zn dust ^ Ni'' N CH CO CO Hoi
JloH *~ClA ' CC1 h ° twater .CHt.
«CH
jy vu hou ooh cic cci cm,
x nh/ <*n' V ^/
4.CH
pyrimidine
§14]
HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
441
Ha
Pd-C
~v~0
X NH 2 OC<R'
R-C. + -CH,
^NH OCXR"
NH 2 OC;R' %H HOC^R"
R'
N-
R'
+ 2H 2 0
CH 3 -o( + \ H -£Hhm* f 1 f 1 ,
CH;
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XII
NH CN
4 + >H-N=N-C 6 H B *^> X NH 2
NC X
NH e
aN=N-C«H 5
"NH 2
NH,
Schaeffer et al. (1962) have shown
that s-triazine reacts with amidines,
amidine salts and imidates having
oc-acidic methylene groups to
produce 4 : 5-disubstituted
pyrimidines (yield: 51-100 per
cent.):
X— CHg-C
/*
N^N
•V
NH
XNX
Z = Y or NH,
urea ethyl
acrylate
ao°
/ C0 \ *H
dihydrouracil
Nra'
CH 2 CH 2
/ C0 \
Br t
CH s -CO s H
NH CH
CO CH
\nh'
CHBr
.CO
boil in C 6 H C N (-HBr)
Ah
NH "CH
Ao
X NH
uracil
/NH 2 c 2 H 5 o 2 a
CS + .CH
•NH 2
NaO<
CH
sodioformyl-thiourea acetic ester
/ C °\.
x eo
NH CH
I II
CS CH
\nh/
2-thiouracil
NH
CH
aq. CHjCI-CO a H C Q CH
^nh'
uracil
]| _ + CH 2 SH-C0 2 H CI
OH OH
/ C0 \ A\ / C0 \ // C \
NH CH __ N N CH ^ NH CH _^ IT
N CH
I II III IV
CO /CO N Br
^NH 2 CH 2 °Vh^ W 2
_/
COv
OH
J ^^ NH \jOH. __ /W
(-HBr) C0 CH " H0
^nh/
/ C V _„ ^°°v
S CH CO C
^SK N NIT
^NH 2 NaOci? CS CH CO CH
/NH 2 C 2 H 6 0 2 C C 2 H 5 S-C +
CH
NH NaOCH
^^
CH
■*■ I II
C 2 H 6 SC CH
pocu
[CH. XII
CI N CH c7h 6 SC .CH
NHs
NH 2 I
SK.
N CH
NH,
N CH ^
NH,
N' cytosine
Pyrazlnes
RCO
/NH 2
THg OO-R
.CH,
H,N
H 2 CR Hgci
R \S H >
Actually, only the salts of a-
aminoketo compounds are known;
addition of alkali liberates the free
base which immediately forms a
pyrazine in the presence of
mercuric chloride.
JSTHv
CH 2 C1 2 I +
CH(OC 2 H 5 ) 2
ehloroacetal
NH 3
HCl
NH N 3H,
heat
CH 2 CH 2 )CH CHC
CH 2 CH 2
CH(OC 2 H 5 ) 2 CH(OC 2 H B ) 2
diacetalylamine
NH 2 OH-HCl
HOCH CHOH
2:6-dihydroxymorpholine
§19]
HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
445
R-C
NH a
(CH,-CO)tO
C0 2 H
C0HBN
*~R-Cf
,NH-CO-CH 3
../ HCl
CO-CH,
/NHu-HCl *■ R-CH
CO-CH 3
HgCI.
r/\ch 3
^ch^JJr
Na
CjH 5 OH
C!H 2 CH 2
CH 2 CHjj N Nir
piperazine
BENZODIAZINES
quinazoline
quinoxaline
•CO-CH,
•N 2 C1
02N
+ HCl
+H20
0.H,
[CH. XII
"CH,
aco-c + NH 3 NH-CO-CHg
+ 2H 2 0
glyoxal
The formation of quinoxalines is
used to identify aromatic o-
diamines and 1 :2-diketones (see,
e.g., §9. XVII).
^.NH 2
\Anh 2 +
OC-R
I,
OC-R
, + 2H 2 0
Of the dibenzodiazines, only the
phenazines (dibenzopyrazin.es) are
important. Phenazine, m.p. 171°,
may be prepared by condensing o-
phenylene-diamine with catechol in
the presence of air.
9 10 1
,x NH 2 HC
^A
+ 3H 2 0
HO OH ' ^
- CH 2 (fH 2 -!iF- I I +H 2 0
CH 2 .CH. X NH
XNH
diethanolamine
aNH 2 ho yX ^ ^
OH + HO A/
phenoxazine
i\ +2H 2 0
§24=]
HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
447
,NH«
\J 0H W\J
\AsH HO^V
phenothiazine
.NH.
cno
+ 2S
+H2S
l:2:4:5-tetrazine; sym.-tetrazine
l:2:3:4-tetrazine; osotetrazine
READING REFERENCES
CHAPTER XIII
CH 2 Cl-CO a H + 2NH S —► CH 2
(NH 2 )-CO a H + NH 4 C1
[CH. XIII
\ ?^ 3
NK+BrCH-COiAHs-CO
CH a
aNCH-C0 2 C 2 H 6 -&&**
,C0 2 Na
'CO-NH-CH'C0 2 Na CH,
HCI
-A
C0 2 H
L1)co 2 h
+ CH 3 -CH(NH 2 )-C0 2 H
KCN \ CN
2 HCI
r 3"
CH 2 (C0 2 C 2 H 6 ) a -^> R-
CH(C0 2 C 2 H 6 ) 2 -^> R. C H(C0
2 H) 2 -^
EX
(ii) HCI
R-CBr(C0 2 H) 2 -^> R-CHBr-C0 2
H -^> R-CH(NH 2 )-C0 2 H
Cystine.
CgHg-CHjiSH + HCHO + HCI
benzylthio]
CH 2 (C0 2 C 2 H 5 ) 2 -^ 5 -*-
CHBr(C0 2 C 2 H 5 ) 2
-*"C 6 H 5 CH 2 -S-CH 2 C1
benzylthiomethyl chloride
0c> K
CO
N-CHtCOAHs),
CO
CNa(C0 2 C 2 H 5 ) 2
C.Hp-CHs-S-CHaCl
CO \
N-C(C0 2 C 2 H 5 ) 2 O CHa-S-CHjj-
QsHs
§2]
COgH
(ii) HCI
C0 2 H
NH 2 CH-CH 2 SH
451
S- benzyl cysteine C0 2 H C0 2 H
NH 2 - CH-CH 2 S- S • CH 2 - CH-
NH 2
(±) -cysteine
Proline.
N-C(COAH 6 ) 2 CO CH 2 -CH 2 CH
2 Br
;N-0Na(CO 2 0 2 H i ) 2 +-Br(CH 2 )
3 Br ■
^N-C(C0 2 C 2 H B ) 2
CH 2 -CH 2 CH 2 0-CO-C!H3
CH 2 CH -GOgH
CH a (CO a C a H 6 ) a -2%
HON=C(C0 2 C a H 6 ) a . H *
NH a -CH(CO a C a H B ) a -^^
CH 3 -CO-NH-CH(CO a C a H 5 ) a
C ' H ' OTa > ethyl
acetamidomalonate
RBr
HBr
CHa-CO-NH-CR^OaQjH^a > R-
CH(NH a )-CO a H
The following acids may be
prepared by this method: serine,
leucine, valine, methionine, lysine,
glutamic acid and ornithine.
Ccr
CH 2 -0(CO 2 C 8 H 5 ) 2 (;) Na OH.
NH-COC.H,
(ii) HCI
CH 2 -CHC0 2 H
I NH,
tryptophan
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIII
X
ssg
S o y o ""
Ocn I XX
XX iuo
u
'S 'o
\'H ;&.§
ooInd
fa'a
do
'£i
•M .^h P*
j <-> ST-
f, "^
n -flu « g^
2 •§,&
sa
Soj.8 aa.aa.
•ta < l t I
ooooo
'a 1 'a 11 a
vj i i i i i i i vu
"S»«88S88
a a ^a ga s
gllskS
hoouA
l?a§\lra
■in■i
oo9oo
a a <? a a
aa-T-a a
8 8 ffl 8 8
©■ _g '55
8
-M
o .g
•!°
* a ?. <?
J' 8
4 a .3.3 2^
<u
.s
g&
0)
I—I
.§
.3
aa.
8
^ si*"
-52
-PI
*& ■ .9 -H r3 »
(H Mi
00'
So-—•
toll S '—' S -M
- -M d S o
•3 a
5 .S o •-
d ^J *Tj 4) .d
C m » & Iri
o bo o
t3 O
a! XI Ph
ft
M^
§2]
453
Km
w.8o
&W y -0 K
tij£66£
ooo°o ooffiWo
-s
•Sin
4-> _h -(-> 3 $ 3
aaaSSa
8 8 8 8a
"S
'o
" a rt s
.S3
ss
'o °o o o 3 3 » w O O
aa
1'S
*—« too H
^0 OS aj
"S a 8 gl
.a o x b y sea p '2
3 3 43 ^.g
oo
C3^H j_j
gag
os
"C 6 .2 §
£is
O3
a 60
.a g
•*|
88
g ■a'cii
"* p<
o»oo
HN
ni T3
o'g 'BJ-
^1
<o bo
B,
/ C0 * K N H
CO2C9H5
CH 2 (C0 2 C 2 H 6 ) 2 c * H R ° Na
> R-CH(C0 2 C 2 H 6 ) 2 ^^*- R-
CH( -^*-
C0 2 K C0 2 H C0 2 H
CN CN ON
\>0 2 C 2 H 5 X CO 2 0 2 H 6
CONH-NH 2
CN CN
N CON 3 N NHC0 2 C 2 H 6
/ C0 2 C 2 H 5 C0 2 C 2 H 6
CO-NH 2 NH 2
CN /CN
N C0 2 C 2 H 5 C0 2 C 2 H 6
CN R-CH 2 CH 11?) hci*°" * * R-
CHg-CHfNHjJ-COjH
CON 3
R-COCO a H + NH 3 M
H » .-•
ROC0 2 H"
II NH
R-CH(NH a )-C0 2 H
CH 3 -COCHR-CO a C a H 5 +
RONO -±->
Zn—CjH.OH
R-OCO a C a H 5 + CH 3 -CO a H +
ROH
II NOH
COCH 3
CH 3 -CO a H + CH 3 -C-CO a C a H
5
II N-NH-C 6 H 5
CH 3 -CH-CO a C 2 H 5 J^^Lt. CH 3
-CH(NH a )-CO a H
NH a
H SO
CH 3 -COCHR-CO a C a H 5 + HN 3
-^-4-
CH 3 -CONH-CHR-CO a C a H 6 +
N,-^^% R-CH(NH a )-CO a H
rr
IC6H5
This reaction is usually referred to
as the Erlenmeyer azlactone
synthesis. Aceturic acid
(acetylglycine) may also be used
instead of hippuric acid.
Furthermore, it has been found that
aliphatic aldehydes may condense
with hippuric acid to form
azlactones if lead acetate is used
instead of sodium acetate (Finar et
al., 1949).
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
CeEt-CH^ CO C 6 H 5 -CH=C • C0 2
H
N^ 0 NH-CO-C 6 H 5
[CH. XIII
CgIi5*CPl2' CH'COgH
NH-CO-C 6 H 5
HCI
C 6 Hs CeHj-CHg-OEKNH^-COaH
+ C 6 H 5 -C0 2 H
-NH
+ T >co-
CH 2 -NH
hydantoin
(CH 3 -CO).jO,
CO-NH
CH=C—NH I >
CO-NH
;co
CH 2 -CHC0 2 H
NH,
CO—NH
I >»
CH—N-CO-CHj
acetylthiohydantoin
RCHO + HCN
RCH— CO
NH—CO
>NH
HCI.
R-CH(NH 8 )-C0 2 H
/C0 N /CO
\o' CO
HI
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIII
C0 2 H
HO-
C0 2 H
-H -*^-H-
Me
C0 2 H
-H -%+■ NH;
C0 2 H
Me
cat.' -""j
Me Me
l(+) -alanine
C0 2 H
NH 2
CH 2 OH
l(— )-serine
MeOH , HC1 :
ClNHg"
C0 2 Me H
PCI.
ClNHs
C0 2 Me
CH 2 OH
CH 2 Cl
(!) NaOH
C0 2 H j -H
NHr
Me i !.(+) -alanine
C0 2 H C0 2 H C0 2 H C0 2 H
IL
CH 3 CH S CH 3 CH ;
L(-)-threonine D(+)-threonine L-
atfothreonine D-a/Zothreonine
RCH(NH-COCH 3 )-C0 2 H + CH s -
C0 2 H
NH 2 -CH 2 -C0 2 H + C 2 H 6 OH +
HC1-* C1{H 3 N-CH 2 -C0 2 C 2 H 5
+H20
„ / (CHj-CO)aO /
C0 2 H COCH 3
CH 2 -C0 2 C 2 H 5 NH 2 /CH 2 -
CO\
I + I *- NH NH + 2C 2 H s OH
NH 2 C 2 H 5 0 2 OCH 2 XJO-CH^
RR
II
CH-C0 2 H /C C=0
N N0 X N O
+-
\co
C0 2 H CO—NPh
CO
2NH,
thyronine
NH,
III
*3 bronze
CH 3 0<^>-0-^>C0 2 Ha ^
CH 3 0<3-0-<3cH3-^ H0<^O^3cH
3
II
II
I I NH 8
IV
thyroxine
Clj-HCl
C 5 HuONO-HCr
II
azlactone
CO—O
CCjHs
II
" NH * noT ^
L-tyrosine
N°* /COAH 5
L-thyroxine
C0 2 H NH 2
PROTEINS
Peptones ~\
,J, phate.
Simple peptides
Amino-acids
I H " I I H tl
I I H II l„
RHOR
\/\
7\/
\/
Nil NH
CO CO
CH-CH 2 -S-S-CH 2 — CH / \
NH NH
\/
jbv ix K
III
IIIII
III
It XV R
—CO—N— — C(OH)—NH— —
C(OH)—N—
I I II
—C(OH)—O— —C(OH)—S—
—NH —NH
X> x /CH«\ / OH
CH 2 CO NH 2 CH 2
II
III
NH« NH V /CO
X CH/
H0 2 C—A—NH—CO—B—NH a
NH CH 2 „.,
0H 2 NH \ c ^ glycylglycine
2:o-diketopiperazine
CH 3 -C 6 H 4 -SO a Cl + NH a -CH
2 -C0 2 C 2 H 5 >
NH.-CH.-CO.C.H,
heat
CH 3 -C 6 H 4 -SH + NH 2 -CH a -
CO-NH-CH 2 -C0 2 H
C 6 H 5 -CH 2 OH + COCLj--* C 6 H
5 -CH 2 OCOC1 + HC1
PCI
C 6 H 5 -CH 2 OCONH-CHR-C0 2 H
'->
C K H ,-CH,OCONH>CHR-COCl
B'-0H(NH,)-CO,H
NaOH
C fi H s -CH„0-CO-NH-CHR-CO-
NH-CHR'-C0 2 H
H 2 —Pd
C 6 H 5 -CH 3 + C0 2 + NH 2 -CHR-
CO-NH-CHR'-C0 2 H
C B H s -CH,0-CO-NH-CHR-CO-
NH-CHR'-CO„H
C 6 H B -CH 2 Br + COg + BrNH 3 -
CHR-CONH-CHR'-C0 2 H
CO
O+NHjj-CHR-COjjH
'v PCX
N-CHRCOaH1 ^ /
N-CHRCOC1
NH,-CHR-CQ 2 H^ Mg(5 *
CO
N-CHRCONH-CHR-COgH
(i)NaH 4 -C 2 H 5 OH fii) HC1
+ NH 2 CHRCO-NHCHR-C0 2 H
CH,-CH(NH,)-C0 2 H
C1CH,-CONH-CH 2 -COC1
x2
NH,
glycylglycylalanine
(v) A variation of the previous
method is to convert an amino-acid
into its corresponding acid chloride
by means of phosphorus
pentachloride in acetyl chloride,
and then to treat the acid chloride
with another molecule of an amino-
acid (Fischer, 1907). In the
formation of the acid chloride,
hydrogen chloride is also produced,
and this combines with the amino-
glycylglycine
co-CH 3
RCH[UH f yco^ c ^. G0 . o ^ r ^^
CH=c . c0 .' SH . GnR . c02H
NHCO-CH,
(ii)HCl \ / I
NH 2
NH 2 -CHR-C0 2 Na + CH 2 C1-CN
—>
NH,-CHE'-CO,H
NaCl + NH 2 -CHR-C0 2 CH 2 -CN -
NH 2 -CHR-CONH-CHR'-C0 2 H
NH 2 -CHR-CO-NH-CHR'-CO-NH-
CHR"-CO-NH . . . CONH-CHR"'-C0
2 H amino-end carboxyl-end
NHj-CHR-CO-NH-CHR'CO-NH -
OHR* C0 2 H
-i.-coci
|c,h,
C 6 H 5 -GONHCHRCONHCHR
CONHCHR-C0 2 H
C.H 5 -CO-NH-CHR-CONHCHll'-
CON CHR"
II SO ,00
!»
aOH \ N /
C,H 5 CO-NH-CHRCO-NH-CHR-C0
2 H+ NH—CHR
II SO CO
X NH
thiohydantoin
JBa(OH),
NH 2 CHR"C0 2 H
. . . NH-CHR-CO-NH-CHR'-CO a H
4.M1H. NH 2 -CHR-CONH-NH 2 +
NH 2 -CHR'-C0 2 H
phenyl zsothiocyanate i
C 6 H 5 -NHCS-NHCHRCO-NH-
CHR , CO-NHCHR ,,, -CO i! H
Ihci
i"
NH—CHR
I | + NHaCHRCONHCHR-CO^H
SC CO \ N /
IC6H5
thiohydantoin
Ba(OH) a
NH 2 -CHR-C0 2 H
N0 2 ROHNH,
+ f</_\no 2
CO-NHCHR'0O 2 H
N0 2 HF + R-CH-NH— ^ / NO;
CONHCHR'C0 2 H N0 2 R-CH-NH
— % >NO.
CO,H
NH 2 CHR'C0 2 H
H-Ala-(Gly-Val-Leu)-OH.
ENZYMES
cytochrome „ ,._ -.
oxidase
OO
II II
CH,—C—O ~ P—OH
I OH
CH 3 -CO-C0 2 H + C0 2 ^ C0 2 H-
CH 2 -CO-C0 2 H
+ NH 3
§i8]
Keto-acids produced by
deamination of amino-acids may
undergo further transformations,
one being their conversion into
amino-acids. This, however, occurs
by the process of transamination
under the influence of
transaminases, e.g.,
CH-NH.
CH 2
I CH 2 -C0 2 H
glutamic acid
CH 3
I + CO
transaminase ^-*
>I
CH
pyruvic acid
a-keto-
glutaric
acid
CH 3
I + CH-NH a
C0 2 H alanine
CHO
co 2 h c-op
OH,
CO„H
H-H-
-OH -OH CH 2 OP
HO-H-H-
C0 2 H CO H
OH
OH
(JH 2 OP
HO,, C0 2 H
0O,H
or" \y OH
OH
dehydroquinic acid
CO.H
\>H
HO-
OH
I OH
OH
PO'\/X>H OH
dehydroshikimic shikimic
acid acid
CH 2 C0CO 2 H
CH,CHNH,CO,H
H0 2 C, /CH2-CO-CO.JH
CH 2 COC0 2 H
phenylalanine CH 2 CHNH 2 C0 2
H
OH
OH
tyrosine
3-Deoxy-D-arabinoheptulosonic
acid has been isolated (Srinivasan
et al., 1959); in one stage (labelled
no. of steps), the nature of the
intermediates is not certain.
READING REFERENCES
CHAPTER XIV
ALKALOIDS
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIV
H.-Ni.
pyridine
/\ 2
CH2 ch
2 (i) CH,l
CH 2 XJHj
H piperidine
(ii) AgOH
/C H 2 CH2 *?Hjjf\
(CHsUfOH;
heat
(-H,0)
CH, CH
CH 2
CH,
(i) CH 3 ,
(ii)AgOH
N(CH 3 ) 2
CH 2 CH
CH,
heat
(-H.O)
CH 2
N(CH 3 ) 3 | + OH
*-(CII 3 ) s N+
/C H, CH CH
CH,
CH,
/°5 CH T!H
II I
CH 2 CH 3
piperylene
isoquinoline
H 8 (ilCH,^
NH
(ii)AgOH
l:2:3:4-tetrahydro-f'soquinoline
N(CH 3 ) 2 l OH
§4]
(-H a O)
Na-Hp
HjO-C.
ALKALOIDS
CH
CHij-N(CH3) 2
KIT CK
w " <K.
+ (CH 3 ) S N
487
nX oh„-nkih.u t
CH 2 -N(CH 8 ) 3 i + I
I'
cannot be used.
,CH 2 CH 2 \ CH 2 NR+BrCN
CH 2 'CH 2
CH,
CH 2 'CH 2
H 2 N N-Rl + _ ™, r >
X CH 2 -CH 2 / C N J Br
•CH 2 "CHjgv
CH, /
CH 2 CH 2
NH + CgHs-COCl
NaOH,
•CH 2 "CH 2
CH 2
\/
CH 2 CH 2
N-CO-C 6 H 5
PBrj-Bt*
yCHjj CH 2 V
CH 2 N-CBr 2 C6H 6
CIi2' CHg
—CHOH Ha so 4
—CH 2
(-H,0)
-CHC1 I CH 2
PHENYLETHYLAMINE GROUP
Wo
C 6 H 5 -CH 2 C1 + KCN -+ C 6 H 5 -
CH a -CN > C 6 H 5 -CH 2 -CH 2 -
NH 2
pVPhenylethylamine is a colourless
liquid, b.p. 197°.
C 10 H 15 ON -^> CH 3 -NH 2 + C 6
H B -COCH 2 -CH 3
NH-CH 3 I II
It has been observed, however, that
compounds of structure II undergo
the hydramine fission to form
propiophenone when heated with
hydrochloric acid. Thus II is more
likely than I. This is supported by
the fact that when subjected to the
Hofmann exhaustive methylation
method, ephedrine forms sym. -
methylphenylethylene oxide, III;
this cannot be produced from I, but
is to be expected from II.
C 6 H 5 -CHOH-CH(CH 3 )-NHCH 3
Jj^5jU
II
C 6 H 5 -CHOH-CH(CH 3 ).N(CH 3
) 3 }+OH- ^S
C e H 5 -CH-CH-CH 3 + (CH 3 ) 3 N
III
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIV
CH 3 -CHBr-CH;
OCH,
Br
CH.OH
>
HBr
£>CH,
C,H,MgBr
> CH 3 -CHBr-CH:
CH.-NH,
CBHB
,OCH„
ch 3 -ch-c:
<,
HI
NH-CH, CbH5
C 6 H 6 -CHOH-CH(CH ? )-NH-CH
3
CH,
CH 3
CH,
H-H-
-NHCH 3 -OH
CH 3 -NH-HO-
C 6 H 5 (—) -ephedrine
-H -H
CH 3 -NH-H-
CeH s (+)-ephedrine
CH 3
-NH-CH 3
H
H-HO-
C 6 H 5 (+)-«J> -ephedrine
c-ch 2 —nh 2 -
OH
C-'-OHj-NH 3 OH
^^ 0^-H
MeNH 2 HCl
CHO
ALKALOIDS
491
-NH, t
§10]
BH
\__\ -C-CHjfNH. OH
CH 2 -CH(CH 3 )-NH 2
•oO(
anisaldehyde
CH 3 0<^">CHO+ CH 3 -N0 2 W
*°">
CH 3 0 <^_ _\ CH=CH-N0 2
-^-CH s O
CH 2 CH 2 -NH 2 -
-O
CH 2 -CH 2 -NH 2
CH 3 0
C0 2 H CH3O
GH=CH 2
II
HO
(CH 3 ) 3 NH >
^^XcHijCHaOH -^^<^J>CH 2 CH
2 C1 2-phenylethanol
H 2 -Pd ^
BaS0 4
. (Rosenmund
OCH, 0CH ,3
OCH, OCH,
3:4:5-trimethoxy-to-nitrostyrene
OCH
Na-Hg
OCH 3 mezcaline
OCH 3 OCH 3
CH 3 0^^C0C1 SbSU- CH 3
0<^>C0CHN 2 " H ^°" S >
OCH 3 OCH 3
diazoketone
OCH 3 OCH 3
OCH 3 OCH 3
Adrenaline is a colourless
crystalline solid, m.p. 211°, and
dissolves in acids and alkalis (it is
insoluble in water); it is also
optically active, having a
lsevorotation.
OH OCH 3 OH
I OH
0" 0" 0
C0 2 H C0 2 H CHOH-CH 2 -NH-
CH„
I II III
OH
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
OH
OH
[CH. XIV
CH,-NH t>
catechol
Hj-Pcl
CO-CH 2 Cl io-chloro-3:4-
dihydroxyacetophenone
GO-CH 2 -NH-CH 3
OH
CHOH-CH 2 -NH-CH 3
(±)-adrenaline
OGO-CHj ^O-CO-CHj
CHO
diacetylproto-catechualdehyde
+ CH 3 -N0 2 -^ L >-
0-CO-CH 3 OCO-CH 3
CHOH-CfI 2 -N0 2
O-CO-CH,
Zii-CH 3 CO a H^ HCHO *
^0-CO-CH 3 hci
OH
-0
OH
(±)-adrenaline
CH 2 -NH-CH 3 HO-C-H
§12a. Noradrenaline
(Norepinephrine), C 8 H 11 0 3 N, is
also present in the adrenal medulla.
The natural compound is
laevorotatory, and this (—)-isomer
is the most powerful pressor-
compound known. The structure of
noradrenaline has been established
by analytical work similar to that
described for adrenaline, and has
been confirmed by various
syntheses, e.g.,
OH OH OH
0 OH —0 OH ^0 OH
(±) -noradrenaline
CH 2 -NH 2 HO—0—H
PYRROLIDINE GROUP
C g H 15 ONi°U 6 H u 0 2 N hygrinic
acid
I CH 3
(i)Ba(OH) v ^H, CH 2
(h)hci C h 2 CH -C0 2 H
CH 3 (+)-hygrinic acid
CH 2 — CH 2
II
CH 2 CH-CH 2 -CO-CH 3
[CH. XIV
CH,
CHVCH-CH 3 .
Flo
MgBr
OH 2 -CHOH-CH,
H 2 -Pt
CHo—CHn
II'
CH 2 CHCH 2 -CHOHCH 3 H
H-CHO
II
CH 2 CHCH 2 COCH 3
CH 3 (±) -hygrine
CH 2 -CH 2 C0 2 C 2 H 5
II+I
GH 2 CHO CH 2 COCH 3
NH
CH 3
pHl
II
CH 2 CHCH 2 COCH 3
I CH,
§15] ALKALOIDS
CH— CH 2
I I . COoEt C0 2 Et
CH 2 CHO +| I +
NH
CH,
CH 2 -CO-CH 2
CH 2 —CH 2
CHO CH 2
HN I CH,
497
PHT,
CH 2 —CH 2 CH 2 —CH 2
II II
CH,
CH,
cuscohygrine
CH 2 CH 2
CH 2 CH-COr
X 1T
(CH 3 ) 2
§14. Gramine has been found in
barley mutants; it raises the blood-
pressure in dogs when administered
in small doses. Gramine has been
synthesised by allowing indole to
stand in an aqueous solution
containing formaldehyde and
dimethylamine (Snyder et al.,
1944).
+ HCHO+(CH 3 ) 2 NH
GH,-N(CH,)»
+^0
PYRIDINE GROUP
^C0,H ch„i
C0 2 CH 3 _AgOH_
CO g H -h 3 q,. [|\C0 2
•N' I CH 3
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIV
§16. Ricinlne, C g H 8 0 2 N 2 , m.p.
201-5°, has been isolated from
castor-oil seed; it is not a very toxic
alkaloid. Degradative and synthetic
work led to the suggestion that I is
the structure of ricinine.
4 -chloroquinoline
CI (f\c0 2 H
*)C0 2 H
CC-NH 2
4-chloropyridine-2:3-dicarboxylic
acid
CI fjSc0 2 H
V NH °~
Brj-KOH
NaNOj H a S0 4
CI
C0 2 H poci 3
OH
II
HI
2-carbonamido-4-chloro-pyridine-3-
carboxylic acid CI CI
100°
2:4-dichloro-pyridine-3-
carbonamide
OCH 3
CH3OH
PC1„
OCH3
CN
:H s ON a> _ f ^
OCH,
CH S I
heat in vacuo
CI
CI
CI
CI
XN
^N
II a
III a
§17]
ALKALOIDS
499
Pd -BaS0 4
NO, O
NO.
OCH
OCH,
CH,
227
H,S0'
OCH.,
5|CONH 2
l'Cls
POCl 3
§17. Areca (or Betel) nut alkaloids.
The betel nut is the source of a
number of alkaloids which are all
partially hydrogenated derivatives
of nicotinic acid, e.g.,
CO,H
C0 8 CH 3
C0 2 H
C0 2 CH 3
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIV
CHO
CH + 2C 2 H 5 0H+HC1-
II
CH 2
CH(OC 2 H 5 ) 2
-CH 2 I CH 2 C1
II
CH 3 NHj
(C 2 H 6 0) 2 CH CH(OC 2 H 5 ) 2
CH 2 CII 2
,22
CH 2 CH 2
CH 3 III
HCl
CHO CHO
II
CH 2 CH 2
CH 2 CH 2
CH,
,CH
CH 2 C-CHOjj) NH2 o H ^ CH 2
CH 2 CH 2
I CH 3
IV
(ii) SOCIj
"cH,
- X>CN
CH 2
I CH 3
CH 2 N C-C0 2 H I I or
CH 2 CH 2
\ / N X I CH 3
VI
.CH
CH 2 N c-co 2
CH. CH,
CH 3 Via
C0 2 C 2 H 6 C0 2 C 2 H 5
CH +NH 3 + CH II II
CH 2 CH 2
ethyl acrylate
C 2 H50 2 C
COjAHs
CH 2 CH 2 I I
Cxig XvXA2
\'
NH
,C0 2 C 2 H 5 c 6 h,coci
H 3-carbethoxypiperid-4-one
C0 2 C 2 H 5 Hj-Ni
CO-CgHs
(Dieckmann reaction)
SCO2C2H5
CO-C 6 H 5
iC0 2 H
>C0 2 H
H guvacine
CH 3 arecaidine
§18]
ALKALOIDS
601
§18. Hemlock alkaloids. The most
important alkaloid of this group is
coniine; it was the first alkaloid to
be synthesised. Oil of hemlock was
drunk by Socrates when he was
condemned to death in 399 B.C.
'CH=CH-CH 3
Na ^_ 9 Ha I *
2-propenyl-pyridine
(±) -coniine
H2
CH 2 CH 2
.HI
CH 3 CHgCHgCHgCHj H 2
n -octane
CH^'CHs CHg
KMnOi ,
^CM2"CIi2"Ofi3
conyrine
C0 2 H
pyridine-2-carboxylic acid
EtBr
CH,Li
EtOH
\ n 2 R0 \ r 2
H,
IT H
is
CH2' Oxi2*Cri3
[CH. XIV
Y-comceine
conhydrine ^"Conhydrine
pelletierine
CH, methylzsopelletierine
wopelletierine
HH2
N CH 2 -COCH 3
-CH—CH 2
II
n-ch s co
CH 2
CH 2 I 2 CH 2 —CH—CH 2
pseudo-pelletierine
CH(OC 2 H 5 ) 2
C 6 H B Li s
CH 2 CH 2 -CH(OC 2 H 5 )2
^CH 2 CH 2 CH(OC 2 H 6 ) 2
(±)-form
H,C
/$
CH,
H,C
2|
HaC
Cja ;
■2
CH,
CHCH 2 CH 2 CHO
H 2 C CH 2
H 2 C CH
N CH,
II
HOCH—CH 2
C 17 H 18 0 8 N + N a O J-C^oO* +
C5HUN
C 8 H 6 0 4 + H 2 0 -^ piperonylic
acid
HO(f\cO,H
11+ H-CHO HO
V
protocatechuic acid
CH 2 I 2 -^>
hut
piperonylic acid
CH,
piperonal
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIV
the structure of piperic acid, then
all of the foregoing products of
oxidation may be accounted for.
,CH'
=CH-CH=CHC0 2 H I
[o]
C0 2 H
+ H0 2 C-CHOH-CHOH-C0 2 II
This has been confirmed by
synthesis (Ladenburg et al., 1894);
piperonal (prepared via the Reimer-
Tiemann reaction) is condensed
with acetaldehyde in the presence
of sodium hydroxide (Claisen-
Schmidt reaction), and the product
(a cinnamaldehyde derivative) is
then heated with acetic anhydride
in the presence of sodium acetate
(Perkin reaction).
+ CHO,
NaOH
CHO CH a(a
NaOH % QIl£.Q|
catechol
CH;
CHO
!lCH=CH- CH=CH- G0 2 H
^--O r r\cH=CHCH=CHCOCl
,CH 2 CH 2 v
+ HN. CH.
\/
Gfi2*CH 2
x^ / .CH 2 -CH 2 v.
-<AJ
piperine
PYRROLIDINE-PYRIDINE GROUP
C 10 H 14 N 2 nicotine
KWnO t .
§21]
ALKALOIDS
505
NN
'COjH
CO,H
C0 2 H
w
"N
NH.
CHjOH
,CO,H CO s H
Co] H0 2 C
CHjOH
+ GHOH -NH 2 I
CHjOH
H a SO,
C°] .
HO s C<*
nicotinic acid
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIV
[o].
CO,H CO.H
quinoline
to].
MOquinoline
quinolinic acid
C0 8 H C0 2 H
cinchomeronic acid
CO,H
nicotinic acid
CO>H
wonieotinic acid
C 5 H 10 N
C B H 10 N
CH,
or
\,
-CH—CH. ' I , Of
CH 2 CH 2 a-/
I CH S
C 5 H,„N
C-C
+ C-C
^N (oxalic acid)
(3-acetylpyridine)
I —N-CH 3
(methylamine)
§21]
ALKALOIDS
507
C 5 H 10 N
+ C-C-C + —N-CH 3
C-C-C-C
+ — N-CHs
rV<
CHg CH 2
CH ^CHj
-CHBr
(I J N (ii)H,SO,
•N'
CII,
Y
CO
CH 3 dibromocotinine
H a SO»
l0 OCH s+ CO 2 H + CO a H
3-acetylpyridine CHsr-CH 2
,fV- CH CH,
X 1T
I CH S
Brj
HBr
X N'
CH,
dibromoticonine
jCOoH
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIV
The most direct analytical evidence
for the presence of the pyrrolidine
nucleus has been given by Karrer
(1925, 1926); nicotine hydriodide
forms nicotine isomethiodide when
warmed with methyl iodide and
this, on oxidation with potassium
ferricyanide, is converted into
nicotone which, on oxidation with
chromium trioxide, gives hygrinic
acid (§13).
CH 3 }V nicotine /somethiodide
CH 2 —CH 2 H0 2 CCH CH 2
I CH 3
hygrinic acid
CH 2 -CO' succinimide
CH 2 CO' 2-pyrrolidone
(ii)
|| / \C0 2 C 2 H 5 + CH 2 -CH 2 C2
H 6 oNa > /\-0O-GH— CH S
\r
CO CH,
CHs
\r
CO CH 2
V
CH.,
HCl
COCHCH 2 CH 2 NH-CH 3 C0 2 H
(5-ketonic acid
u a NH
-^(X
^N
Zn dust
CjHjOH-NhOH
CH,
-CH.
CHOH CH 2 NH CH,
VN
CH 2 —CH 2 II CHI CH.
NH
CH,
NaOH
CH 2 -
ov
N CH 3
(+)-nicotine
CH 2 I CH 2
§22]
Craig (1933).
ALKALOIDS
509
nicotinonitrile
NHjOH
+ BrMgCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OC 2 H 5
Y -ethoxypropyl-magnesium
bromide
CH 2 —CH 2
a CO CH 2 OC 2 H 5
|| | 2 CH 3 -CO a H ] | |
NOH OC,H 5 H. J NH 2 OC 2 H 5
CH 2 —CH 2 CH 2
HBr
150-155°
CHo CHg
-a
CHg 'CHo
CH CH. H
2 (i)CH 3 l
(ii) NaOH
VY
N CH 3
(±) -nicotine
C 6 H 5 CH=CH-C0 2 H I
C 6 H 5 -C-COi,H CH 2 II
OH H
II
C e H 6 — C-C0 2 H C 6 H 5 — C—
00,-H
CH 3 CH 2 OH
III IV
CH2 * "
>MgCl .CH 2 OH
C,H 6 -CH 2 -C0 2 H (CH3) '
CHMgCI > O.H.-OHr 2L£^C 6 H 6 -
Ch(
X C0 2 MgCl \:o 2 H
H—
Ph
—C0 2 H CH-OH
hydrochloride C 7 H 1S N iml C 7
H,N
C 8 H 15 ON-^V C 8 H 13 0 4 N
tropine (^-tropinic acid
I I I or I I I
CH 3 -N fa* CH 2 CH S -N CHOH
CH 2
C 8 H 16 ON C 8 H 13 ON C 8 H 1S
04N
CH 2 —CH—OH,,
NCH 3 CHOH I I
CH 2 —CH—CH 2
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIV
CH 2 — CH—CH 2
NCH 3 CHOH I I
tropine
Hr
[H]
HCI
*-CH 3 Cl +
11
NH CH 2
CHg—CH CH 2
dihydrotropidine (tropane)
/CHo'OHfl
CH 2 CH 2 CH 2
Kordihydrotropidine 2-
ethylpyridine
NCH 3
CH 2 —CH—CH 2 CH 2 — CH—CH
2
tropinone
c«h b -cho
NCH, CHOH92 ^
2 -CH-<
CH 2 —CH—C=CHC 6 H5 NCH S
CO
CH 2 —CH—C=CHC 6 H 5
dibenzylidenetropinone Formation
of tropilidene from tropine. CH 2 —
CH—CH„ CH 2 —CH—CH 2
CH 2 —CH=CH
NCH 3 CH-|^>
distillation
MCH^CH-CH 2 —CH CH
CH 2 —CH CH 2
-UI
HON(CH 3 ) 2 CH CH 2 —CH CH
CH 2 —CH=CH
CH
II CH=CH—CH
tropilidene
I NCH 3
CH 2 —CHC0 2 H
(i) CH 3 I (ii)AgrOH
HONtcHs), CHg—CH-C0 2 H
N(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 —CHC0 2 H
CH=CHC0 2 H
ALKALOIDS
513
\so^m+
(ii) HI
CHg* GHg'GHg
CHI - K ° H - >
CjH B OH
suberone
CH ~^^
0x12*0x12" CH 2
CHI I CHjj-CHj-CHBr
CHBr (£^2V
CH,- CIV CH
II CH
exhaustive s methylation
II CH
Br a ,
CH 2 -CH2-CH-N(CH 3 )2
CH 2 - CH=CH cyc/oheptadiene
CH 2 -CH 2 - CHBr
I
CH II CHjj-CHBr-CH
(l:4-addition)
CH r -CH=CH
quinoline 150°
I HBr
CH *-
CH=CH—CH
cyc/oheptatriene
(tropilidene)
CH2-CHBrCH2
CH II CH=CH—CH
(CH 3 ) 8 NH ,
CH2—CH-
-CH
CH 2 -CH=CH
CH 2 — CH CH 2
N(CH 3 )2 I warm in „
Br yH* ether
CHj—CH CHBr
CH,-CH CH 2
CH 2 —CH-
-QH,
CH*—CH-
-CHBr
BrN(CH3) 2 CH CH 2 —CH CH
(•)Kl(Br->.I) (ii)AgCl(I-*C1)
CH»—CH-
-CH2
CHg^GH"" —■ CH2
CH,—CH-
-CH
CHj—CH CH
tropidine
CH 2 — CH CH 8
NCH 3 CHBr I I
CHg—CH——GHg
Cxi2~~* CH~~~ GH2
H3SO4.
200°
Zn
| x OH CH 2 —CH— CH 2
iji -tropine
CH 2 --CH—CH 8
NCH 3 GO HI -
CH 2 —CH—CH 2 tropinone
CHj—CH—CH,
I I .-OH
NCH 3 C I |Sl
CH2—GH— CHg
tropine
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIV
Robinson's synthesis.
CH 2 — CHjO
—h
+ NCH 3 +
, —I- *l
CH 2 —OHIO H HiCHj
HiCH 2
..J,
CO
-*-2H 2 0 +
CH,-
CH 2
• CH— CH 2 NCH 3 CO
.Ah- '
-CH,
CH 2 -CHO CH 2 -C0 2 ca
+ CHs-NHjj + CO >-
CH 2 -CHO CH 2 -C0 2 ca
CH— CH
CH-C0 2 ca I I
NCH 3 CO
II
C%- CH—CH-C0 2 ca
HCI
CHjj—CH—CH 2
NCH 3 CO I i
CH 2 —CH—CH 2
H,CHO
CH 3 NH 2 HCI
XT
CHj-CH CH,
II
NCH 3 CO
CH—CH CH,
■2
CH 2 —CH—CH 2
•C0H5
NCH 3 CHOH + HO,C-CH
HCI,
CH 2 —CH—CH 2
CH,OH
NCH 3 CHO-CO-CH
CbHr
CH,
13
II
gi— CH— CH 2
atropine
"t!H 2 OH
§22]
ALKALOIDS
515
acid, the best combination being
zinc dust and hydriodic acid; or by
means of electrolytic reduction. On
the other hand, reduction with
sodium amalgam converts
tropinone into y-tropine. According
to Mirza (1952), lithium aluminium
hydride reduces tropinone
quantitatively to y-tropine, but
according to Beckett et al. (1957), 54
per cent, of y-tropine and 45 per
cent, of tropine are obtained. A
larger yield of the former (69 per
cent.) is obtained with sodium
borohydride, and reduction with
sodium and wobutanol (in toluene)
gives the maximum yield of y-
tropine (88 per cent.).
CH;
CH-
/
CH
NCH,
CH 2 I ,OH
,CH,
CH,
CH'
CH-
NCH,
HO'
CH'
(a)
CH 2
.cT
^CH,
CH-
(b)
Fig. 14.1.
/CH 3 H N >—i
(b)
tropine
Fig. 14.2.
|I
NCH 3 CHO-0O-CHOH-C 6 H 6
1I
CH 2 —CH— CH 2
homatropine
CH—CH CH 2 CH 2 0H
NCH 3 CHO-CO-CH — ^-
CH—CH CH 2 C6Hs
<
li3'oscine CH—CH CH,
CH 2 OH
NCH 3 CHOH + C 6 H 5 CH
CH-CH—0H 2 COzH
O
,CH—CH—CH 2 CHOH—CH CH,
\ II I
m_ ch— c
NCH 3 CH-,
CH 2 CH CH— CH 2
Io
scopine
oscine
It is interesting to note, in this
connection, that the action of
ethanolic sodium hydroxide on (—)-
hyoscine at room temperature
causes the latter
NMe
(— )-Cocaine, C 17 H 21 0 4 N, m.p.
98°, occurs in coca leaves; it is
sparingly soluble in water, but its
hydrochloride is quite soluble and
is used as a local anaesthetic. When
heated with water, cocaine is
hydrolysed to methanol and
benzoylecgonine.
C 17 H 21 0 4 N + H 2 0 -> C 16 H 19
0 4 N + CH 3 OH cocaine
benzoylecgonine
C 16 H 19 0 4 N + H 2 0 7MSSB)t >
C 9 H 15 0 3 N + C 6 H 5 -C0 2 H
benzoylecgonine ecgonine
NCH 3 OHOH I I I
GH2— CH—CH 2
CH 2 - CH—CH-COjCHs
NCHj CHO-COC 6 H5 I I
CHr- CH—CH 2
cocaine
H.o
CH 2 —CH— CH-C0 2 H
II
CH 2 -CH—CHj
benzoylecgonine
Ba(QH)»
CHj—CH
CH-C0 2 H
CHj-CH—CH,!
ecgonine
CH—CH—CHCOjH
NCH 3 CO I I
CHj—CH— CHz
CrO,
CH 2 -
NCH 3 CO-I I
CHj—CH—CH 2
tropinone
NCH 3
^CHj
CHj—CO
ecgoninic acid
CHa—CH—3CH-COjjH
NCH,*CHOH
Is /I CHr-CH— 4 CH 2
§23]
II
NCH3CO
II
CHj—CH—CH 2
tropinone
CHj—CH —CH-C0 2 Na
NCH 3 CO I I
CH—CH—CH 2
ALKALOIDS
CHg—CH—CH
519
NCH 3 CONa -^ CHj—CH—CH 2
Na-Hg acid
CH 2 —CH—CH-C0 2 H
II
NCH 3 CHOH
II
CH—CH—CH 2
a (±)-ecgonine
sodium tropinonecarboxylate
CH 2 CHO H CH 2 C0 2 C 2 H 5
II
+ NCH 3 + CO
CH 2 -CHO H CHj-COaH
KOH .
II
NCH 3 CO
II
CH 2 — CH— CH-C0 2 H
CH 2 —CH—CH-C0 2 C 2 H 5
NCH 3 CO I I
CHg— CH—CH2
CH 2 —CH—CH-C0 2 H I I
NCH 3 CHOH
(ii) hydrolysis | I
CH 2 — CH—CH 2
(0 [H]
The final product was shown to be a
mixture of three racemates, (±)-
ecgonine, (ij-y-ecgonine and a third
pair of enantiomorphs (Willstatter
et al., 1923). The racemic ecgonine
was resolved, and the (—)-form
esteri-fied with methanol and then
benzoylated; the product was (—)-
cocaine.
CHg—CH— CH-C0 2 H I I
NCH 3 CHOH
(OCH3OH-HC1.
(ii)C«H»-COCl
CH 2 —CH— CH2 (-)-ecgonine
CH 2 -CH— CH-C0 2 CH 3 I I
NCH 3 CHO-CO-C 8 H 5
CHr-CH—CH 2 (-)-cocaine
Nil*
OR
§23a. Tropacocaine, C 15 H 19 O a
N, m.p. 49°, occurs in Java coca
leaves. When heated with barium
hydroxide solution, tropacocaine is
hydrolysed to y-tropine and benzoic
acid; thus the alkaloid is benzoyl-y-
tropine.
NCHsCHO-CO-Cft^^ 1 — lM
tropacocaine t{<-tropine
H HCH 2
2CH3-CO-CH3+NH3—^H^O+NH
CO ch 3 -ch(qc 8 h 5 ) 3 ^
II
(CH 3 ) 2 C CH 2 n
yn 3
CH 3 -CH— CH 2 CH—CH Z
2C 2 H 5 OH + NH io i;;^. coc? ^
)cHO-CO-C 6 H 6
(CH 3 ) 2 C CH 2 C-— CH,
NH 2 <^_^>CO-OCH 2 CH 2 -N(C
2 H 5 ) 2 procaine
QUINOLINE GROUP
§24]
ALKALOIDS
521
0 19 H 17 O 3 N
KOH
,OH
CO.H
C 19 H 17 0 3 N -^i*.
C0 2 H
OCH 3
O—CH 2
SHa-CHr^f ^-0
O— CH 2
O -^V
4-methoxy-2-methylquinoline
piperonal
OCH,
1 ^~f 2
OCH,
O—CH,
■CH 2 —CH 2
cusparine
Galipine, C 20 H 21 O 3 N, m.p.
113°, contains three methoxyl
groups (Zeisel method). When
oxidised with chromic acid, galipine
produces 4-methoxy-quinoline-2-
carboxylic acid and veratric acid.
Thus the formula of the alkaloid is
probably:
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIV
OCH,
OCH 3
N /-CH—CHr-/^\oCH 3
galipine
This has been confirmed by
synthesis (Spath et al., 1924).
OCH 3
OCH3
>CH 3 + OCH^^OCHr^^
veratraldehyde
OCH,
NCH-^V
CH=CH-
OCH3
CHf-CH :
galipine
0CH3
OCH,
Galipoline, C 19 H 19 0 3 N, m.p.
193°, contains two methoxyl groups
and one phenolic group. When
methylated with diazomethane,
galipoline is converted into galipine.
Thus one of the methoxyl groups in
the latter is a hydroxyl group in the
former. The position of this
phenolic hydroxyl was shown to be
in the quinoline nucleus by
synthesis (Spath et al., 1924).
O-CHj-CeHs
(i)C,H t CH 8 QNa (ii)H 2 -Pd-C
OCH,
rcH.V 7 "^
c^-chK7och s je ^
§25a]
ALKALOIDS
523
CO,H
,H lg ON
C 19 H M ON s + 4[0]
KMnO,
> C 18 H ao 0 3 N ! , + H-C0 2 H
cinchotenine
OH
N CH=CH 2
cinchonine
KOH
CjH„OH
PCI„
! 8 H 11 N-CH=CH i!
H 3 PO« ( + 2H a O)
+ C 9 H 16 0 2 N meroquinene
cinchene
lepidine
Meroquinene (meroquinenine) is
also obtained, together with
cinchoninic acid, wjien cinchonine
is oxidised with chromic acid
(Konigs, 1894).
C 9 H 15 O a N ™*S C 8 H 13 0 4 N
+ H-C0 2 H meroquinene ' *
cincholoiponic acid
chain in meroquinene. The
presence of this group has also been
demonstrated by the ozonolysis of
meroquinene; formaldehyde is
produced (Seekles, 1923). Oxidation
of cincholoiponic acid with acid
permanganate produces loiponic
acid, C 7 H 11 0 4 N (Konigs, 1890).
This is also a dicarboxylic acid, and
since it contains one methylene
group less than its precursor
cincholoiponic acid, this suggests
that the latter contains at least a
side-chain —CH 2 -CO a H.
^ 240° *
C2H5
CH,
H a SO t heat
(iii) Loiponic acid -. :—>-
isomenses
co s
.CH CH 2 x CH-C0 2 H
CH,
CH,
II
hexahydrocin chomeronic acid
The structure of
hexahydrocinchomeronic acid is
known from its synthesis (cf. §21).
CI
/°\
C C—C—0
\N/
} +c
The problem then is to find the
position of the remaining carbon
atom. This carbon atom cannot be
an JV-methyl group, since all three
acids are secondary bases. As we
have seen, meroquinene contains a
—CH=CH 2 group in the side-chain.
A possible position for the extra
carbon atom is the side-chain
containing this unsaturated group,
i.e., the side-chain is an allyl group,
—CH a -CH==CH 2 . All the
foregoing facts can be explained on
this basis, but the following fact
cannot, viz., that reduction of
meroquinene gives cincholoipon, C
9 H 17 0 2 N, a compound which
contains one carboxyl group and
one ethyl group. Thus the
unsaturated side-chain cannot be
allyl (this should have given a
propyl group on reduction); the
side-chain is therefore vinyl. This
leaves only one possible position
for the extra carbon atom, viz., 4;
this would give a —CH a -C0 2 H
group at this position, and the
presence of such a group has
already been inferred (see above).
All the reactions of meroquinene
can therefore be explained on the
following structures:
CH 2 -C0 2 H CH 2 -C0 2 H
CH
?H 2 X CH-CH=CH 2 „" * - CH 2 N
CH-CH 2 -CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH
2
HH
meroquinene cincholoipon
i CO] CH 2 -C0 2 H C0 2 H
/( U + H-C0 2 H-I°1^ /( !3 H
CH 2 X!H-C0 2 H CH 2 X CH-C0 2
H
II 'I
HH
GH(OC 2 H 5 ) 2 2 0H 2 ■ + NH S -
0H 2 C1 p-chloropropionacetal
CHO
I CH 2
CHO
CH 2
\V
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
(C 2 H s O) 2 CH CH(OC 2 H 6 ) 2 -
> CH 2 CH 2
CH 2 / CH 2
NH iminodipropionacetal
[ch. XIV
HCI
y CH CH 2 C-CH O (i)NHgOH CH 2
CH 2 W*** :
.CH
/ "^
CH 2 C-CN
■I I
CH 2 CH 2 \ N / H
CH(C0 2 C 2 H 5 ) 2
CH 2 CH'CN
CH a ( CQ 3 C 3 H») a - C a H»ONa
CH 2 -C0 2 H
CH 2 N CH-C0 2 H
»-l I
CH 2 CH 2
.CH
7 ?H* CH-CH-CH=CH 2 ^
8 CH 2 6 CH*j.CH 2 3-
vinylquimielidine
CH.
CH
H,S0 4
CH L
I II
C0 2 H CH 2 ^CH 2
CH'CH=CH,
meroquinene
§25a]
ALKALOIDS
527
-CO
Ah-,
R-CO—i HO-
-CHR 2 --NO
^r__CO + CHR 2 -^^CR
OH NO
II
NOH
/CH
CH 2 ch 2 CH-CH=CH 2
CrQ 3
CH CH 2 C H^CH-CH=CH 2
I I I CO—CH CH 2 CH 2
cinchonine
Tf
cinchoninone
CO,H
acid
•N'
cinchoninic acid
.CH
H 2 nwNH-CH=
CH 2C H 2
amide
CH=CH 2
CH 2 ch^CH-CH^H,
I « I HON=C ch 2 CH 2
X N^
oxime
.CH CH 2 CH 2 CH-CH=CH 2
CO,jH CH 2 CH 2
HN^^ meroquinene
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIV
CH 2 CH^OH-CH=CH 2
I I I CHOH-CH CI^CH 2
CH3CO2H ^
.CH
V^N
VAn
cinchonine cinchotoxine
CH 2 CH 2 CH-CH^H,
O—CH 2 CH 2/ cH 2 HN
NaOBr
CH 2 CH, CII-OH=CH 2
I 'I
CO—CHBr CI *^CH 2
HN
cinchotoxine
NaOH
{-HBr)
OH 2 ci^CH-CH=CH 2
I I I CO—CH ^^CHj
Al
C 2 HjONa-CjH 5 OH
cinchoninone CH CH 2 CH^CH-
CH=CH 2
CHOH-CH 9 H 2^CH 2
quinine quininone
20 H 24 O 2 N 2 quinine
CrO,
H.SO,
> C u H 9 0 3 N quininic acid
C0 2 H
C0 2 H
quininic acid
[Q] > H0 2 C H0 2 CH
pyridine-2:3:4-tricarboxylic acid
C0 2 H
CH s O
^CH 3 C1+
C0 2 H HOrNf ^ _co, HO
W
quininic acid
6-hydroxyquinoline
CH3O,
0H 3 0,
CH,0,
+ CH 3 -CO-CH 2 C0 2 C 2 Hb-
CHjO,
•0
CH,
CHjO
)qI CH 3 -COjH
CH^-CHO^ CH 3°|
ZnCU
CH—CH' C0H5
KMnQ 4 ,
CH3O
C0 2 H
■If
CH 2 c H2 N CH-CH=CH 2 GHOH-
CH °Hs CH 2 CH,0^ w xx
quinine
§25b]
u+
I
ALKALOIDS
531
NH 2 -OH 2 -CH(OC 2 H B ) 2 II
H,SQ 4
III
CH 2 -C5H 10 N
axo—-
IV
CH 3
CHs
separated ^
VI
CH 3
H VII
*r
Vr H °
VY N-CO-CHs CjHtONO C0 2 C 2 H
5 f N-CO-CH 3 Jh]_
Vila
CH,
I ' OH
VIII
CH 2 V IX
.CH
CHs CH 2 CH 2
C0 2 C 2 H B N^ CO-CHj IX
CH 2 CH 2 CHCH=CH 2 CH 2 CH 2
CH 2
C0 2 H HN X
.CH
CH 2 CH 2 CH'CH=CH 2
(i)CaH 8 OH-HCl,
"CH, CH 2 ch.
COC 6 H 6 XI
CH 3 0
CH 3 0
CH,0
XII
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
+ CH 2 L
I/W
I COC 6 H 5
XI
CH. XIV
CO-CH— CH 2 -CH
C0 2 C 4 H 5 C!^CH-CH=CH 2
/ \ \ CH 2 c H . CH-CH=CH 2
I I * I CO—CH 2 9 H 2 CH 2
HIT
C 3 H e ONa
HC1
resolved
■>- (+)-isomer
(i)NaOBr (ii)'NaOH
XIV
(±)-quinotoxine
CHjO
.CH CH 2 CH^CH-CH=CH 2
co— ch C ^y^h
Al
C2H 5 ONa-C 2 H 5 OH
CH,0
(+)-quininone
.CH CHac^CH-CH^CH,
CHOH—CH CH 2 C h 2
(±)-quinine
resolved
*-(-)-quinine
•W
ISOQUINOLINE GROUP
§26. Papaverine, C 20 H 21 O 4 N,
m.p. 147°, is one of the optically
inactive alkaloids; it does not
contain any asymmetric carbon
atom. The structure of papaverine
was established by Goldschmiedt
and his co-workers (1883-1888).
Since papaverine adds on one
molecule of methyl iodide to form a
quaternary iodide, the nitrogen
atom in the molecule is in the
tertiary state. The application of the
Zeisel method shows the presence
of four methoxyl groups; the
demethylated product is known as
papaveroline.
(C 19 H 19 0 4 N)CH 2 -£L> (C 19 H
19 0 4 N)CHOH -£L> (C 19 H 19 0 4
N)CO papaverine papaverinol
papaveraldine
ch 3 i ^
0H NaOH „ A 0CHs
OCH3
veratric acid
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIV
different monoesters. Thus II is
metahemipinic acid; I is actually
hemi-pinic acid (this isomer was
known before metahemipinic acid).
CO-0
I CO
C0 2 H (CH.-CO) l0 ^ do/V-.
hemipinic acid
CH 3 0 CH,0
P<K.
:o
metahemipinic acid
G0 2 H
6 : 7-Dimethoxyisoquinoline-l-
carboxylic acid. The usual tests
showed that this compound
contains one carboxyl group and
two methoxyl groups. On oxidation,
this acid forms pyridine-2 : 3 : 4-
tricarboxylic acid; when
decarboxylated, the acid forms a
dimethoxywoquinoline which, on
oxidation, gives metahemipinic
acid; thus the structure is
established.
KMnO,
C0 2 H
pyridine-2:3:4-tricarboxylic acid
C0 2 H
6:7-dimethoxy-isoqainoline-1-
carboxylic acid
CaO^
KM.O,, CI^o/Sco,!! CH 3 ol|JcG 2 H
metahemipinic acid
papaverine
[CH. XIV
[O]
CH 3 0
CH 3 0
[O]
H0 2 C H0 2 C
OCH 3
0 CH s o/%,CH 2 Cl
H a -Raney Ni
CH 2 -CH 2 -NH 2
(i)HCl (ii)PCl,
CH 3 (. CH 3 v.
iOjjXcHii-COCl
homoveratrylamine
homoveratroyl chloride
papaverine
§27] ALKALOIDS
537
CH 3
CH 3 .
,or Y
CH,
GH 2 CH,
CH3O1/Y
laudanosine
laudanine
narcotine
hvdrastine
PHENANTHRENE GROUP
(-)-Morphine, C 17 H 19 0 3 N, m.p.
254°, is the chief alkaloid in opium,
and was the first alkaloid to be
isolated (Serturner, 1806). The
usual tests show that the nitrogen
atom is in the tertiary state, and
since morphine forms a diacetate
and a dibenzoate, two hydroxyl
groups are therefore present in the
molecule. Morphine gives the ferric
chloride test for phenols, and
dissolves in aqueous sodium
hydroxide to form a monosodium
salt, and this is reconverted into
morphine by the action of carbon
dioxide; thus one of the hydroxyl
groups is phenolic (Matthiessen et
al., 1869). The second hydroxyl
group is secondary alcoholic, as is
shown by the following reactions.
Halogen acids convert morphine
into a monohalogeno derivative,
one hydroxyl group being replaced
by a halogen atom. When heated
with methyl iodide in the presence
of aqueous potassium hydroxide,
morphine is methylated to give (-)-
codeine, C I? H 21 0 3 N, m.p. 155°
(Grimaux, 1881). Since codeine is
no longer soluble in alkalis, it
therefore follows that it is only the
phenolic hydroxyl group in
morphine that has been
methylated. Furthermore, codeine
can be oxidised by chromic acid to
codeinone, a ketone (Hesse, 1884).
Thus the hydroxyl group in codeine
(and this one in morphine) is
secondary alcoholic, and so codeine
is the monomethyl (phenolic) ether
of morphine.
(-)-Thebaine, C 19 H 2 i0 3 N, m.p.
193°, produces two molecules of
methyl iodide when heated with
hydriodic acid (Zeisel method);
hence thebaine is a dimethoxy
derivative. When heated with
sulphuric acid, thebaine
-OH f—OCH 3
C 16 H 16 ON<; C 16 H 16 ON
CHOH I—CHOH
IA.I
morphine codeine
f—OCH3 f—OCH3
C 16 H 16 ON^ C la H 15 ON
—co L—00CH3
I II
codeinone thebaine
I—CHOH L—CHOH
i 1 'n
C 16 H 12 0 2 + (CH 3 ) 2 N-CH 2 -
CH a OH III IV
§27]
ALKALOIDS
539
CH 3 0 CII3O
,CH«
HOjjC
CHO
(CH 3 -C0) 2 O
N0 2
3:4-dimethoxy-2-nitro-
benzaldehyde
dimethylmorphol
Ill
methylmorphol
The formation of
ethanoldimethylamine (IV) from a-
methylmorphimethine indicates
that there is a >NCH 3 group in
codeine (only one methyl iodide
molecule adds to codeine to form
codeine methiodide; it has also
been shown above that this
nitrogen is in a heterocyclic ring).
When j8-methylmorphimethine is
heated with water, the products
obtained are trimethylamine,
ethylene and methylmorphenol
(Vongerichten, 1896).
Demethylation of this compound
with hydrochloric acid produces
morphenol, a compound which
contains one phenolic hydroxyl
group and an inert
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIV
CH 3 0
*-0
methylmorphenol morphenol
morphol
C 18 H 19 0 3 N (CH3,CO)2O > CH
3 -NH-CH 2 -CH 2 OH + codeinone
§28]
ALKALOIDS
541
CH 3 o
\ XJ" CH
\ /|\14/ N
morphine
codeine
CH,
CH
o/\
CH.
o/N
o
HO
CEfc
/NCHs Y Y^ / NOH 3
CH
thebaine
phenolase
HO ° 2 HO
HO^_\cO-CH(NH 2 )-C0 2 H
HO<^J%CO-CH 2 -NH 2
HO HO
HO^^ScHOH-CHg-NHa HO<f
^>CHOHCH 2 -NH-CH 3
noradrenaline adrenaline
Leete et al. (1952-) have shown,
using labelled compounds, that
phenylalanine, tyrosine and 3,4-
dihydroxyphenylalanine are
precursors for the alkaloids of the
phenylalanine and woquinoline
groups (see also later).
II 2 2 | I 2
H 2 C X CHO + CH 3 CO • CH 3 +
CHO CH 2
NH
H 2 C CH 2 ^ H 2 C CH 2 ^ H 2 C
CH 2
III
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
hygrine cuscohygrine
/\ 2 cr
H 2 C V CHO
+ CO NH, CH 2 C0 2 H x CH 2
COOH 3 n CH 2 CH 2 CH 3
wpelletierine coniine
/CHO CHO
CH 3 CH3CHO H 2 C CH 2 CHO
CHO CH 2 0 H 2 C CH 2
NH„
7
0H 3 CH 3
[CH. XIV
CH-NH 2
OCH Q
OCHo
CH,
READING REFERENCES
CHAPTER XV
ANTHOCYANINS
flavylium chloride
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XV
OH
HO
+ H0 2 C
o«
OH
cyanidin chloride
§3]
ANTHOCYANINS
547
OG
OG
HO
,OG
OG
OH
OH
OCH3
cT OCH3
01}
Ba(OH) g
atmosphere of Ha
CH3O
+ H0 2 C
OCH3 OCH3
0CH3
OCH3
OCH3
*-
OH HO OCH,
+ HO
OH
!C <3
0CH3
0CH3 0CH3
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XV
CH 2 OOH 3 QCH
cH 3 (y
oh 3 o
o
3
OCH 3 OCH3
nci
§4]
ANTHOCYANINS
549
O-C0-C 6 H 5
0CHO + CH 2 0-COCH 3 ^^
OH CO—^^^>0-COCH 3
0-CO-C 6 H 5
OCH 3
HCl
OH OCH3
V" n s ) HO
peonidin cliloride
to : 3 : 4-Triacetoxyacetophenone.
OH OH
o™-
catechol
CH 2 C1-C0 2 H
pocis
O-CO-CH,
OH
CO-CH 2 Cl
0-CO-CH 3
O-CH 2 0-C0-CH 3
to : 4-Diacetoxyacetophenone.
OCH3 OH
anisole
0-CO-CH 3
CO-CH 2 Cl
to : 3 : 4-Trimethoxyacetophenone.
0CH 3 OCH 3
[CH. XV
OCH.
s socia
OCH
3 CH a N 2
OCH 3 OCH 3
C0 2 H veratric acid
aqueous H-CO-H
COC1
OCH,
OCH;
3 (CH 3 ) 2 S0 4
NaOH
COCH 2 OH to : 4-
Dimethoxyacetophenone.
CO-CH 2 OCH 3
cyanodimethyl ether
OCH 3
OCH,
MgBr
CO-CH 2 OCH 3
HO,
to : 3 : 4-Triacetoxy-5-
methoxyacetophenone.
O C(C 6 H 6 ) 2
OH Mi I I
C0 2 H
gallic acid
O C(C 6 H 5 ) 2
-O _HcipH 3 0|| ^OH (i )(CH,-co) a
o C0 2 CH 3
C0 2 CH 3
C0 2 CH 3
(CH 3 )
,so 4 CH 3 0|
NaOH
OH
(ii) SOCI2
CO,H
0-CO-CH 3
0-CO-CH 3
(ii)CH 3 -CO,H
COCl
C0-CH 2 0-C0-CH 3
§5] ANTHOCYANINS
2:4:6-Trihydroxybenzaldehyde
(phloroglucinaldehyde).
OH OH
551
HO
HolJ JoH
phloroglucinol 2-Hydroxy-4: 6-
dimethoxybenzaldehyde.
OH 0C0C 6 H 5
HO
phloroglucinaldehyde
KOH
HOll JoH
(CH 3 ) 3 SO t NaOH
0-C0-C 6 H 5 if%CHO
2 -benzoylphloroghicin-
aldehyde-(2-benzoyloxy-
4:6-dihydroxybenzaldehyde)
OH
CH
hvdrolvsis
piy
OCH,
CH 3 0
§5. Cyanidin chloride, C 15 Hu0 6
Cl. Cyanin chloride, on hydrolysis
with hydrochloric acid, gives
cyanidin chloride and two
molecules of D-glucose.
C 27 H 31 0 19 C1 + 2H 2 0 -^i> C
16 H U 0 6 C1 + 2C 6 H ia 0 6
OH
HO
OH
+ H0 2 C
Cl> OH
cyanidin chloride
<3oH OH
This structure has been confirmed
by synthesis (Robinson et al.,
1928): OCH 3
CHO OH
OCH
CH 2 OCH 3
CO (^ ^OCH 3
OCH,
(i)HI
CH3O
OH
OCH 3 (ii)HC1 HO
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XV
The formation of phloroglucinol
and protocatechuic acid by the
alkaline fusion of cyanidin chloride
suggests a relationship to quercetin,
since the latter also gives the same
fusion products (see §14).
OH
HO
OH
HO'
Oxonium salt
Red in acid solution
HO
OH
HO
OH
OH
pseudo-base
OH
§6]
ANTHOCYANINS
553
(i)
HO
C 6 H 10 O 4 -O-COCH 3
CHO OH
+ (CHs-COOVCeHTOBr £2H*-
II
HO
(ii)
CHjjOH CO
O-CO-CHs
O-CO-CH,
IV
O-CO-CHs
(iii) III + V
HO
OC a Hi 0 O 4 -O-CO-CH 3
OC 6 H 7 O(O-C0-CH 3 ) 4
0-CO-CH 3
0-CO-CH 3
HO
0-C 6 H u 0 5
O-C 6 H ai 0 5
OH
VII
C 27 H 31 0 15 C1 + 2H 2 0 -^>
C^H^OsCl + 2C 6 H ia 0 6
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XV
+ H0 2 C
OH
pelargonidin chloride
0-CO-C 6 H 5
NaOH
HO
OH (inNs) HO
UL co
OH
OC 6 H n 0 5
CeHnOs
HO
O-C 6 H 10 O 4 -O-CO-CH 3 (f
^CHO
OH HO 11 JOH II
GH 2 OC 6 H 7 0(0-CO-CH 3 ) 4 CO
— ^ \o-CO-CH 3 III
§8]
ANTHOCYANINS
555
§7. Delphinidin chloride, C 18 H U 0
7 C1, is obtained, together with two
molecules of glucose and two
molecules of />-hydroxybenzoic
acid, when delphinin chloride is
hydrolysed with hydrochloric acid.
net
C0 2 H
OH
KOH .
OH
HO
OH
delphinidin chloride
OH
+ H0 2 C
OH
OH
C28H 33 0 16 C1 + 2H 2 0 >
C^gHijOgCl + 2C 6 H 12 0 6
OH
KOH
OH HO
OH
+ H0 2 C
OH
OCH,
OCH,
peonidin, chloride
OCHiA
OC 6 H 7 0(OCO-CH 3 ) 4
(| AjCHO
HO II JOH II
CH 2 0-C 6 H 7 0(0-COCH 3 ) 4 CO
—? n»OCO-CH,
OCH 3 III
C 29 H 35 0 17 C1 + 2H 2 0 -^> C 17
H 15 0 7 C1 + 2C 6 H 12 0 6
Malvidin chloride contains four
hydroxyl groups and two methoxyl
groups. When degraded by boiling
barium hydroxide solution in an
atmosphere of hydrogen, the
products are phloroglucinol and
syringic acid (4-hydroxy-3 : 5-
dimethoxybenzoic acid). Thus:
HO
H0 V^ 0H
+ H0 2 C
OCH3 OH
OCH,
malvidin chloride
OC^A
O0 6 H n O 5
OCH 3
OH
CH 2 0-C 6 H 7 0(0-CO-CH 3 ) 4 I
OCH 3
CO— 4( \,0-CO-CH 3
OCH 3
OCH,
II
HCl
C 3 oH 37 0 17 Cl + 2H 2 0 > C 18 H
17 0 7 C1 + 2C 6 H 12 0 6
Hirsutidin chloride contains three
hydroxyl groups and three methoxyl
groups. Its structure is shown from
the fact that on hydrolysis with
barium
§11]
ANTHOCYANINS
557
hydroxide solution in an
atmosphere of hydrogen, the
products are mono-
methylphloroglucinol and syringic
acid. The formation of these
products
CH 3 0
OCH3 Ba(OH) 2
OH
CH30
OCH3
+ HO,C
OH
cr; 0CH3
hirsutidin chloride
OCft
0-COC 6 H 5 CH0 . C0 . CH
0CHO I OCH
OH CO-^ "\
OCH3
0-CH 2 -C 6 H 5
HCl
CH 3 0
OCO-C 6 H 5
OH
(in N»)
OCfcH,A
CH30
pC 6 H u 0 6
OCH3
CI J" OCH3
hirsutin cliloride
FLAVONES
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XV
flavone
CkH s
'QH 2 OH COC 6 H 5
II
COpH
+ CH 3 -CO-C 6 H 5
IV
COCH 3
+ C 6 H 6 -C0 2 H »H VI
a
J00 2 GH 3
CH 3 _^^
^OCH 3 + C °C ° H * ~^
CH 2 OCH 3 COC 6 H 5
CH
OH ^J-CaH, HO
CnHn
v\
CH 3
+ (C 6 H 6 -CO) 2 0
CnHe-COgNa
180 s '
GeH
OH3O
CO-CH,
OCH,
OCH3 CO-C 6 H 5
+ C 6 H 5 -00 2 C 2 H 5
HO
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
HO
Na 2 C0 3
CO-CH,
C 6 H S - COO
[CH. XV
„CO-CH 3
POOC-CgH,
rv°-
G 6 H 6 -C00kji0H CO-C 6 H 5
CH,
HO
A recent method for synthesising
flavones is by the ring expansion of
2-benzylidenecoumaran-3-ones
(Wheeler et al., 1955), e.g.,
C,H,OH
Most flavones are yellow solids
which are soluble in water, ethanol
and dilute acids and alkalis. The
oxonium salts are usually more
highly coloured than the free bases;
the flavones do not occur naturally
as salts (cf. antho-cyanins). The
structure of flavone salts is not
certain; VII, VIII and IX are
possibilities, and according to
calculations of charge distribution
(in y-pyrone salts), IX appears to be
most likely (Brown, 1951).
CGHS
VII
VIII
IX
CbH s
KOH
COH
a■
HO
CO-CH 2 OH
+ C 6 H 5 -C0 2 H
§13]
ANTHOCYANINS
561
CH C 6 H 5
HCl in C 2 H B OH
H 2 SO,
o
OH
C6H6
CfiH 5
flavone
aCO-CH 3 + C 6 H 6 -OH
„ TT „ NaOH
6 xi 5 CHO »■
CO-
O|65
COCH 3 Br
CHBr koh in
C«H,
+ C 6 H 5 CHO
NaOH in C,H 5 0H
C6H5
§14. Quercetin, C 16 H 10 O 7 ,
occurs as the glycoside quercitrin in
the bark of Quercus tincioria;
quercitrin appears to be the most
widely distributed natural pigment.
On hydrolysis with acids, quercitrin
forms quercetin and one molecule
of rhamnose.
TTPI
C 21 H 20 O u + H 2 0 > C 15 H 10
O 7 + CH 3 -(CHOH) 4 -CHO
Quercetin contains five hydroxyl
groups; no methoxyl groups are
present; on fusion with potassium
hydroxide, phloroglucinol and
protocatechuic acid are obtained (cf.
cyanidin, §5). Also, when quercetin
is methylated and the product,
pentamethylquercetin, boiled with
an ethanolic solution of potassium
hydroxide, 6-hydroxy-cu : 2 : 4-
trimethoxyacetophenone and
veratric acid are obtained. These
results suggest that quercetin is 3 :
3': 4': 5 : 7-pentahydroxyflavone.
CH s O
fuse
OH HO
CH 3 0
quercetin
[(CHjJjSOi
3H 3 0
OCH,
OCH,
OCH,
Or
OH
OH
+ H0 2 C
KOH
CjH«OH
CH 2 OCH s
+ H0 2 C
<z.
OH
OCH,
OCH,
OH
HCI
OCH 3 CH3O
OCH3O
HaSO,
OCHgO
CH s O
HI
OCH, HO
OCH,
OH
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XV
HO
4? &
OH
OH
Ho \Ao^-0 OH
OH
HO
H OH
OH
-V^AoH HC1
quercetin OH
HCl
HO
OH
cyanidin chloride
§14a]
ANTHOCYANINS
565
(i)Zn-AcOKa; Ac 2 0 ... ,, .,
quercetin : > cyanidin chloride
ISOFLAVONES
ttoflavone
naturally, but are not so widespread
as the flavones; they occur either in
the free state or as glycosides. The
general method of ascertaining the
structure of woflavones is similar to
that used for the flavones (see §§3,
11). Thus fusion with potassium
hydroxide breaks down the
molecule into two fragments, and
hydrolysis with ethanolic potassium
hydroxide permits the isolation of
intermediates. This may be
illustrated with daidzein (Walz,
1931):
+ HCO a H
HO
/>
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
fCH. XV
'CH
I 2 +H-CO»0„H.-OH C K H S 2 2 5
O5
acid
Na
°6 H 5
/>*. '
CO
O
OH CHONa
HO
^\/ C0 \
OH
H C0 2 C 2 H 5
OH
^\
HO'
^OH
B
>OH
HO
OH
OH OH
C, C, C 16
Me
CH 3 -C0 2 H
lC0 2 H > OH
DEPSIDES
— 'n
If n is zero, then the molecule is a
didepside; if n is 1, then a
tridepside; etc. The main sources of
the depsides are the lichens.
3H 0—CO
HOff N*OH HOf]
+ C0C1 2 >-
0'
C0 2 H C0 2 H
■*~ CH S
CHsOjC-O-CjHi'COCI + HO
CH s 0 2 COC,,H 4 COO<
OC0 2 CHj
OCOjjCHj CHO
READING REFERENCES
6, 169.
CHAPTER XVI
CH N=CH
purine
C 5 H 4 O s N 4 + H 2 0 + [O] ^X C
4 H 2 0 4 N 2 + NH 2 -CONH 2
Structure of alloxan, C 4 H 2 0 4 N 2
. When hydrolysed with alkali,
alloxan produces one molecule of
urea and one molecule of mesoxalic
acid.
C 4 H 2 0 4 N 2 + 2H 2 0 ^> NH 2 -
CONH 2 + C0 2 H-COC0 8 H
NH 2 H0 2 C HN / Y°
CO + .00 —*■ I [+21^0
NH 2 H0 2 C
0^ N A) H
alloxan
PhCHO
CH-Ph
CrO,
HN
A. AcOH
uA
barbituric alloxan
acid monohydrate
CO /CO x
NH CH-0-C(OH) NH |l II
CO CO CO 00
X Nrf NH
alloxantin
0NH 4
KH C=N—CH ^H NH C=N— C NH
II
Cp CO CO CO CO CO CO co K 1}6 X
NH NH S NH
C 5 H 4 0 3 N 4 + H 2 0 + [0] -* C 4
H 6 0 3 N 4 + CO,
Structure of allantoin, C 4 H 6 0 3 N
4 (Baeyer, 1861-1864). When hydro-
lysed with alkali, allantoin forms
two molecules of urea and one
molecule of glyoxylic acid.
C 4 H 6 0 3 N 4 + 2H 2 0 -> 2NH 2 -
CONH 2 + CHOC0 2 H
C 4 H 6 0 3 N 4 + [O] ^X NH 2 -
CONH 2 + C 3 H 2 0 3 N 2
Now parabanic acid, on hydrolysis,
gives urea and oxalic acid, and since
there are no free amino or carboxyl
groups present in the molecule, this
suggests that parabanic acid is
oxalylurea.
^NH-CO y NH 2 H0 2 C
CO + 2H 2 0 ** CO +
V NH -CO N NHi, H0 2 C
parabanic acid
CO + I »- CQ^ I + 2HC1
X NH 2 CICO NH-CO
Hydantoin, on controlled
hydrolysis, gives hydantoic acid
(ureido-acetic acid) and this, on
further hydrolysis, gives glycine,
ammonia and carbon dioxide. These
results suggest that hydantoin is
glycollylurea.
CI ^ _NH \ HO CIVNH-CO-NH, CH
2 -NH 2
CO -NIT C °2 H C °2 H
CH 2 -NH 2 CHjj-NH-CO-NHjj CH
—NH
C0 2 H C0 2 H CO—NH
CHf-NH Oil NH
I /» ^ I yCOH
CO—NH C(QH)-N /
NH 2 NHs! NH 2 .
NH 2 CO-NIT NH—CH-NH NH 2
CHj-NH
allantoin
|h 2 o
/NH 2 C0 ,H NH K
CO + I + £0
X NH 2 GHO NH /
NH 2 NH 2
CO C0 2 H NH 2 \ CO CO—NH N
I + I + CO >- | | 00+2H.0
NH 2 NH 2
CO CO—NH CO C(OH)-NH.
II >o ^ I II >
00 NH NH-
1 K if > L
NH
I
CO CO
/ I.
NH-C NH
§2]
/ NH 2 C.HAC
CO + ,CH
n — T _ „//
NH,
HO-C CH 3
ethyl aceto-acetate
HgSQ 4 , heat
NH
CO
CH
fuming
CO C-CH S
4-methyluracil
hno 3
NH C\N0 2
I II
CO C-C0 2 H \ / NH
5-nitrouracil
-4-carboxylic
acid
boil in H3O
NH
NO
If
CO CH 5-nitrouracil
2 Sn-HCI
NH C-OH
CO CH N Nll
5-aminouracil 5-hydroxyuracil
/ C °\ NH C-NH 2
IH
CO CH \ / NH
C=NH I .CH,
c=o
I
CH,
C-OH
.CH
! <l
C'OH Brj-H 2 0
l-OH
NH
CO CH X NH 5-hydroxyuracil 4:5-
dihydroxyuracil
NH COH
CO h-<L \ / NH
heat with urea in H 2 S0 4
rs
CO C-
n6
,NH (
-ss.
CO
uric acid
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XVI
00
NH 2 H0 2 C
/0 ^
H C=NOH
NH t HS
CO CO
N NH
CO JDO
barbituric acid
NH violuric acid
.CO / \
C °>_
CO CO mH '° CO y CO
N NH 4>-uric acid
NH
uramil
r?f
CO C NHs \rfl OH
J\ .NH
^rsv
°Q ^n/
NH
X NH 2 X NH
«thyl
NH,
cyanoacetate
.CO / \
cyanoacetyl-urea
/°°.
__ NH CH hno, ^ NH C-NO
CO JC-NH 2
NH 4 HS
CO CNH 2 X NH
CO
NH C-NH 2 C i-co a c a H 6
CO. ^C-NHa
X NH 4:5-diamino-uracil
NaOH
§3]
575
CO
/\
NH C-NHj
cv
NH
/ NH 2 CO 2 NH.
CO NH
NH C \ •
] || CO + 2NH 3
NH NH
/r
HO X N
NH \
AA /C
COH
&
NH
NH
CO
2:6:8-
2:6-
HO
HN
2:8-
/N H^
CO ..
*/ \ /
NH C
I II "CO
CO C •
NH NH
CO,H
.I
NH—C—NH
CO I \»
\« I /
NH—C—NH
OH II
NH 2
CO CO
.1 I co
NH—CH / N NH
3\
Ilia
^NH
NH
2
L. 0^
CO CO
II
CH—NH
/ NH
lit b
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XVI
/ C °N NH C
I II
CO /!,
"^NH
.NH
OH
/ -NH
CO
S\ ^NH
N V^
"ho^JL^ 0 ^
2:6:8 -trichloropurine
"2: 6 -di-iodopurine
NH
boiling k
purine
PURINE DERIVATIVES
NHCHO
NH,
This synthesis leads to the
preparation of purines that are
unsubstituted in position 8. This
type of purine may also be prepared
by heating a 4 : 5-
diaminopyrimidine with
dithioformic acid in the presence of
sodium hydroxide solution, and
then heating the product with a
methanolic solution of sodium
methoxide.
»0t
R
NH,
H-CS 2 Na
NH,
nAt-™
^\/NHCHS
N ff CH 3 ONa
§5]
577
heating. Finally,
diaminopyrimidines may be fused
with urea to produce 8-
hydroxypurines.
NH-C0 2 C 2 H 5
/v NH *
R, Uk
NH
NNH,
■^Vn
Co
R'
■i T ^
COH
(-2nh 3 )
o-Aminohydroxypyrimidines may
be used instead of o-
diaminopyrimidines (cf. Baeyer's
synthesis of y)-uric acid, §2).
;C—Me
N X NH 2 HjlT
E,
vv
>Me
CH,
H 2 NOCv,N
H^l/^N
//
,CH+(C 2 H 5 0) 2 CO
NH 2
NH.
<o-~oo
2:6:8-trichloro-purine
adenine
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
.NH,
CN
(£ " + W-^221*.
NH,
Ci*
(i) HNO a
[CH. XVI
NH 2 A/NH 2
hs VAnh 2
NH,
(i)H-COjH
NH 8 CN ci + >N=N-C 6 H B fgg^
v—
- 7T>^ if /
NH \
NH CN
formamidine phenylazo-
malononitpile
S\ ,N=NC 6 H 5
N Y H,-RaneyNi_
\kS*h.
100 , pressure
[•CS,H N
NH-CHS
NH,
CI
OH
OH
i3c>^<c>—Co
hypoxanthine
.CH
,NH 2 QjHsOjC^
H-CO»H
hs a nA
OH NHCHO ^k^NH
/V
NH
CH
/ C0 \
h 2 n/ Y h 2 n/ x
/NH,
OH g
+ 2HC(OEt),
NH»
§7. Xanthine (2 : 6-
dihydroxypurine), d. above 150°,
occurs in tea extract and in animal
tissues. When oxidised with
potassium chlorate in hydrochloric
acid solution, xanthine forms
alloxan and urea; these products
show the relationship of xanthine
to uric acid, and its structure has
been established by synthesis.
01'
CI
CD
NH
X^CjH.ON,
OCjHg
SW
CjH,
NH V
CC1
HI
JSTHj OjHgOjC. CO +
Nth,
NC
fH 2
POCI.
N^
NH CH 2
CO ON S NH a
heat
HO-
OK
CO-
xanthine
NaOH
HO
OH
Hott
NH.
N x N NH,
HO
OH
NH \
CH
*N'
s
Xanthine is the parent substance of
a number of compounds (see later).
OH
0O
NH \
.001
NH 8
in CjHjOH
A^ HI Ar
NH \
guanine
(ii) Tra*be (1900).
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
HN=C +
N NH guanidine
NH, 0 2 H 5 O 2 C C3HsONa
NC
.CH,
[CH. XVI
0)HNO 3 (ii) NH 4 HS
NH 2
OH
L [I H-CO,Na+H-CO,H 11/
H.n'StAnH, H^^N^N^
NH
XANTHINE BASES
Three important methylated
xanthines that occur naturally are
caffeine, theobromine and
theophylline. All three have been
prepared from uric acid by Fischer
and all have been synthesised by
means of the Traube method.
PIT '"NT CO
\N/
CH 3
,C V
CH.
O' N N V ^ CH 3
Position of the methyl group. As we
have seen above, the oxidation of
caffeine gives dimethylalloxan and
methylurea. Fischer, however, also
iso-
CH 2 —N-CH 3 CH 2 -NHCH 3
\ co -££»» | + NM3 + co 2
GO—Mil C0 2 H
It therefore follows that caffeine
contains two ring structures, that of
di-methylalloxan and that of
methylhydantoin. The following
two skeleton structures for caffeine
are both possible, since each could
give the required oxidation
products. Actually, the isolation of
methylurea suggests I or II;
c ilc
CH,
W Ks^
CH 3 CH 3
I II
CO ^3 CH ^
CH 3 -N 2 \ CH.-N X C^ \
3 I || CH 3 | I CO
CO C. </ CO c. /
CH 3 CH3
III IV
C 8 H 10 O 2 N 4 C 8 H 9 0 2 N 4 C1
Na0H C 8 H 9 O a N 4 .OCH 3 taU
Oxycaffeine + CH 3 C1 C 8 H 10 O 3
N4
OH.
s .a
I II COCH s or | | C
CH 3 ^
V methoxycaffeine v
CH 3 9H CH S
I | COH or | | CO
^N /
CH, CH ;
—NH—C=0 ^ —N=C—OH
CH 3 -N (K \ CH 3 -N Y \
I U CH I XIC1
co c s co a S
V^NVN
CH3 CH3
IX X
caffeine chlorocaffeine
583
I II y oo
g H uric acid
ch 3 i.
NaOH
CO CHj-N'' C-
CH 3
Vn
CO
PC1»
POCI3
CH 3 l:3:7-trimethyluric acid
CH 3 -N
CH
CH3
chlorocaffeine
CC1
Ht
CH 3 N c-
CH 3
CH 3 caffeine
CH
CH 2
I ON
NaNHg in xylene
Z0^
CH 3 -N CH " CO
Zn
HjS0 4
CH 3 -N
* Jo
II
NH,
CH 3 .CO
p-NH 2
hno s CH 3 -N C-NO
co c-:
CH,
l-NH,
CH 3 N h-co„h r 1
/ V.^
reflux
V' N NH 2 CH 3
CH,
QH 3
CO
CO c J'
CH 3 theophylline
.CH
CH S 1 in C 3 H,OH 1 equivalent of
CHgONa
CH
CH3
caffeine
£!0
CH,
CH 3 -N N C \
HI
~y
CH
/C 0 HN C
CHj
or
CH,
II ^CH
CO c0
f + T* CO L * Jo J**^ 5 ^
CH 3 NH CN \u \f
CH 3 CHs
prr
ou I reflux CO 1/ C W
6h s ch,
theobromine
N CH,
,<% g .CD § CO g
H CH 3 CH 3
CH 3 CH 3
585
HN
HH
q HCONHj
/NH-CONH.;
:/\.
NHCHO
caffeine ■< — * *
j NaOH
xanthine
Me 2 SO«-NaOH
15 ^^_ r theobromine
+ AcONa
§11. Theophylline (1: 3-
dimethylxanthine), m.p. 269-272°,
occurs in tea. Its structure has been
deduced from the fact that it is
converted into caffeine on
methylation, and that it forms
dimethylalloxan and urea on
oxidation. Thus theophylline is 1: 3-
dimethylxanthine, and this
structure has been confirmed by
synthesis.
I- 0 VS> I II .CO
NaOH co a /
N H CH 3
1:3-dimethyluric acid
.CD
CD C. /
N fr
Hn
uric acid
POCIj
CO H CH S -N \r \ CO I /
CH 3 chlorotheophylline
CI
CO H CH 3 -N \K \
co a y
CH, theophylline
CH
N NHCH 3 50_7 °
/X) co
CH 3 -N CH 2 aqueous Na , co , GH
3 -K CH (i)HNOi| CO CN 70 80 °
CO C-NH 2 (»)Zn-H j0 v
NH N N /
CH 3 GH 3
_ / C Q ^NH 2 / C P .NH-CHO
cp c HaSO * cp a
CH 3 CH 3
HOP—o—p—o ^°\ H
O O K?HH>
H 1 I CH 2 OPO s H 2
.HH.
<K H
/NHX Jl J*.
§13a]
587
hypoxanthine
NUCLEIC ACIDS
, > Nucleotides
. , enzymes (nucleinase)
Nucleic acid-
> Nucleosides + H 3 P0 4
Inorganic acid
Sugar + Purines + Pyrimidines
ribose 2-deoxyribose
The nucleic acids are classified
according to the nature of the sugar
present: the pentose nucleic acids
or ribonucleic acids (R.N.A.), and
the deoxypentose nucleic acids or
deoxyribonucleic acids (D.N.A.).
Ribonucleoproteins are
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XVI
Nil,
adenine
OH
CH
H,
LH
guanine
HO
OH
Nl 5
HO
uracil thymine cytosine
NH 2 NH 2
jjAyCH, N ^VCH 2 0H
HO' \V/
5-methylcytosine 5-
hydroxymethylcytosine
HO' ^/
HN C-NH-NH-C 6 H 6
I II
CO C-NH-NH-C 6 H S
C5H9O4 I
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XVI
<X.
NH 2
+ CHO-(CHOH)3-CH 2 OH NH 2
ArN a Cl.
NH-C 5 H 9 0 4
(i)(CHyco) a o
JH 2
0(0-CO-CH 3 ) 3
NH 2
(i)H-CS,Na
(ii)CH a ONa-C a H e OH
C5H 9 0 4
adenosine
§13c]
591
present as the furanose form, e.g.,
methylation of a pyrimidine
riboside, followed by hydrolysis,
gives a trimethylribose which, on
oxidation, forms
dimethylmesotartaric acid. This
product shows that the ribose ring
is furanose; had the ring been
pyranose, then the final product
would have been trimethoxyglutaric
acid (c/. §§7a, 7b. VII).
-O
>N 3 —CH-CHOH-CHOH-CH-CH 2
OH
(CH,) s SO, Y
rO1
acid
-o
[O]
r01
H10 t
CH g OH
9-p-D-manno-pyranosidyladenine
CHO
,H1Q«
CHO I CH—
CHgOH dialdehyde
CH 2 OH adenosine
H— C—CI
H— C— O-CO-CH3
I H—C—OCO-CH 3
H—C
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY NH 2
CC1-
[CH. XVI
CI
CH 2 OCO-CH 3 II
NH,
C:-H
I H— C-O-COCHs
H—C-0-CO-CH 3
H— C-
NH,
-N.
NH 3 in
^ "UT"
CH 2 0-CO-CH 3
OH OH adenosine
^CHOH H— C—OH
CHjjOH
I H—C—OH
H—C—OH
..I
5 CH 2 -
I H—C—OH
CH 2 OH
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XVI
o /x o
II
Base—CH— CH—CH-
I o—
■CH—CHoOH
have also isolated thymidine-3': 5'-
diphosphate and deoxycytidine-3':
5'-diphosphate from herring sperm
deoxyribonucleic acid.
VH
CH 3 OH
Base • CH ■ CH-CH • CH • CH 2 OH
OH
i X OH
-O-
L_ 0 —I
NH 2
NH.
AcOHjO
AcOH 2 C ^O
.VHH
H\| KH
AcO OH
AcO O—P:
/OCHjPh o X O0HjPh
OH 0-PO,H 2
0—P-O—R—Uracil
0—P—O—R—Guanine
f/ OH I
O—P—O—R-Cytoaine
0 / OH
D.N.A.
READING REFERENCES
CHAPTER XVII
VITAMINS
VITAMIN B COMPLEX
C 12 H 18 0N 4 C1 2 S + Na 2 S0 3 -
> C 6 H 9 ONS + C 6 H 9 0 3 N 3 S +
2NaCl
AB
N OCH 3 N C-CH 3
II II II II
CH C-COjjH CH CCH,-CH,OH
I II
CH 3
(i) I CH 3
?°_ ++Br CH 2 -CH 2 OC 2 H 5 — I
?°°°^ ^£V
CH Na CO-CH-CH 2 -CH 2 OC 2 H
B
C0 2 C 2 H,
CH 3 CO 2 0 2 H 6 "ketonic CH 3
CH + C-CH 2 -CH 2 OC 2 H 6
\ •/ N C-CH 3
SIS Clj II It
N C-CH, N C-CH 3
_HO^ |, y « J^^. || |,
-CH
n n a. CH " CH » CH*-
V/ CH 3 HOI * CH 2 OH COCH 3 *~
CH 2 C-CH 3
CHj— CHCI N nCH,
Compound B, C 6 H 9 0 3 N 3 S.
This was shown to be a sulphonic
acid, e.g., when heated with water
under pressure at 200°, B gives
sulphuric acid; it also forms sodium
sulphite when heated with
concentrated sodium hydroxide
solution. On treatment with nitrous
acid, B evolves nitrogen; thus B
contains one or more amino-
groups. Analysis of the product
showed that one amino-group is
present in B (the product contained
only one hydroxyl group).
Furthermore, since the evolution of
nitrogen was slow, and the reaction
of B with benzoyl chloride was also
slow, this suggests that B contains
an amidine structure (Williams et
al., 1935). Williams et al. (1935)
then heated B with hydrochloric
acid at 150° under pressure, and
obtained
C 6 H 9 0 3 N 3 S + H 2 0 -^> C 6 H
8 0 4 N 2 S + NH 3 B C
NH 2 (WV3 N^\CH 3
acetamidine formylpropionic
ester
NH 2
(i) POCla > N |JCH 3
(ii) NH 3 - C 2 H,OH CH I JJ
Thus B is 6-amino-2 : 5-
dimethylpyrimidine with one
hydrogen atom (other than one of
the amino-group) replaced by a
sulphonic acid group. When
thiamine is treated with sodium in
liquid ammonia, one of the
products is the diamino derivative
D, C 6 H 10 N 4 (Williams et al.,
1937). Compound D was identified
as 6-amino-5-aminomethyl-2-
methylpyrimidine by comparison
with the absorption spectra of
methylated aminopyrimidines of
known structure (Williams et al.,
1937). This is confirmed by the
synthesis of Grewe (1936);
Williams et al. had arrived at their
conclusion independently of
Grewe's work (see below for this
synthesis). Thus, in compound D,
there is an amino-group instead of
the sulphonic acid group in B.
Williams therefore concluded that
the sulphonic acid group (in B) is
joined to the methyl group at
position 5. This was confirmed (in
1937) by treating 5-ethoxymethyl-6-
hydroxy-2-methylpyrimidine (see
the synthesis described for
thiamine) with sodium sulphite,
whereby 6-hydroxy-2-
methylpyrimidyl-5-
methanesulphonic acid was
obtained, and this was shown to be
identical with compound C.
hCH 2 OC 2 H 5 Na , S Q, -.
rtCHii-SOaH CH^
.0'
•NH 2 CN ^'/ \ rN
%H C ^V
acetamidine C 2 H 6 0 H
6-amino-5-cyano-ethoxymethylene-
2-methylpyrimidine malononitrile
NH 2 NH 2
CH 2 NH 2 (;)HNOj N^CH 2 Br
NaHS0 , H^W-ayi
("'"^^CHs^ /
so.
6-amino-5-aminomethyl J$
2-methylpyrimidine
NH 2 HC1 _ r
HT Y-CH—N CCH 3
I II II
CH 3 L II CH ,CCH 2 -CH 2 OH
II II
OH C
§5]
VITAMINS
603
COjAHjs nh,
C0 2 C 2 H 6 Na J^ t ^ ^ tt
CH,'C=NH
(0 I
CH 2 -CH 2 OC 2 H 5 | C,H„ONa
CHO
CH
OH NH 2
NH 2 -HBr
(ii, -U
OH C-CH 2 -CH 2 OH
CH
KJ
CH / 0-CH 2 -CH 2 0H
AgCI in CH 3 OH
NH 2 -HC1 CI
nAp CH 2 —N C • CH 3
I II II
3 ^ I) CH CCH 2 -CH 2 0H
N'T \g/
Co-carboxylase is
NH 2 CT
SrNr— CH 2 —N C-CH 3
CH 3 k 1J QH CCH 2 CH 2
OPO(OH)OPO(OH) 2
CH 2 -CH 2 OH
-■ thiochrome
NaOH „ _ „ Ba(OH) s
C 17 H 20 O 6 N 4 Hght > C 13 H 12
02N4>
lactoflavin lumi-lactoflavin
„ ,, acid
CO(NH 2 ) 2 + [C 12 H 12 0 3 N 2 ]
_ co > I
II III
NHCH 3 /V /NHCH 3
IV HI
must be accounted for. This can be
done by assuming the presence of
an ethyl group or of two methyl
groups in the benzene ring. Kuhn et
al.
§6]
VITAMINS
605
',00
NaOH
1??
CH;
CH
a
NH-CHj
H0 2 C I OCH
II
III
CH 3
-co 2
/!-C0 2 H
II
CH 3i 9 M^O
C-0O 2 H
+ ,00
NH,
/K
lumi-lactoflavin
OH;
CH,
(X
CH 3 NH
HO
Side-chain of lactoflavin
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XVII
•NH V
lumichrome
CH 2 -(CHOH) 3 -CH 2 OH N N
NH
O lactoflavin
, OH OH OH
I I I „ _ „„ (i) condensation
+ cho-c-c-^-ch^H (ii) H ,_ Pd
HHH
OH OH OH
NOj^^NjCl
§6]
VITAMINS
607
CH 2 -(CHOH) 3 -CH 2 OH H
N=n_^ XnO,
pressure
NIL,
hoj^ N Y°
Js. NH
H 3 BO s
CHj^CHOHJs-CHitOH
/yv 0
.V 1
+ C1-C0 2 C 2 H 5 >
•NH,
HNOj
NH-C0 2 C 2 H 6
■NO,
NH-C0 2 <
H a -Pd ^^3
D(— )-ribose
NH00 2 C 2 H 5
N=CH-(CHOH) 3 CH 2 OH NHC0 2
C2H5
CH 2 -(CHOH) 3 -CH 2 OH NH
alloxan
CH 2 (CHOH) 3 -CH 2 OH
Hg-Ni CH 3 ^ f NaOl^
*"ch 3 L A
N^/ x NHC0 2 C 2 H 5
^ 2 ^ 2 n.5
CH 2 (CHOH) 3 -CH 2 OH
HjBOj
NH„
HC1
C 9 H 17 0 5 N > C 3 H 7 0 2 N + C 6
H 10 O 3
I II
- + (actually present as the
hydrochloride, Cl{H 3 N*CHyCH 2
'C0 2 H). On the other hand, when
hydrolysed with alkali, pantothenic
acid forms /S-alanine (I) and the
salt of an acid which, on
acidification, spontaneously forms
the lactone II. Thus the free acid of
II is probably a y- or (5-
hydroxycarboxylic acid; also, since
the rate of lactonisation is fast, II is
more likely a y-lactone than a ^-
lactone (cf. §7c. VII). As pointed out
above, pantothenic acid contains
two hydroxyl groups. One of these
has now been accounted for, and so
the problem is to find the position
of the second one. This was shown
to be a- by the fact that the sodium
salt of the acid of the lactone II
gives a canary-yellow colour With
ferric chloride (a test characteristic
of oe-hydroxyacids), and also by the
fact that II, on warming with
concentrated sulphuric acid,
liberates carbon monoxide (a test
also characteristic of <x-
hydroxyacids). Thus II is most
probably the y-lactone of an a-
hydroxyacid (R. J. WiUiams et al.,
1940).
CH 2 —C(CH 3 ) 2 —CHOH—CO =
C 6 H 10 O 3
1O'
II
CH 2 -C(CH 3 ) 2 -CHOH.CO m
™*« >
I ry I (■■) H,u
II
CH 2 OH-C(CH 3 ) 2 -CHOH-C(OH)
(CH 3 ) 2 (CH 'c0 ' ) ' Fb >
CH 3 -COCH 3 + CH 2 OH-C(CH 3 )
2 -CHO -^
CH 2 OH-C(CH 3 ) 2 -C0 2 H
III
CHO
zsobutyralrlehyde formalin
/ CH 2 OH / CH 2 O
CHOH-CN N CHOH—CO
(±)-lactone
CH g OH-C(CH 3 ) 2 -CHOH-CO-
NH-CH 2 -CH 2 -CO a H
pantothenic acid
HCl
lactonises
CH 2 -C(CH 3 ) 2 -CHOH-CO
1O'
CH 2 -C(CH 3 ) 2 -CHOH-CO + NH
2 -CH 2 -CH 2 -C0 2 C 2 H 5 i o 1
CH 2 OH-C(CH 3 ) 2 -CHOH-CO-
NH-CH a -CH 2 -C0 2 C 2 H 5
Ba(OH) a
CH 2 OH-C(CH 3 ) 2 -CHOH-CO-
NH-CH 2 -CH 2 -C0 2 H
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XVII
jH 2 N I
|2-amino-6-hydroxy-I pteridine
/>-aminobenzoic acid
■ pteroic acid-
glutamic acid
pteridine
B
§8a]
VITAMINS
611
C0 2 H
OHO
A*
1CH,
|AcH 3
h 2 n/\ n ^
VI
X NH,
Nc/
NH CH 2
0. /C=NH NH
HN^ V -
H2N
HNO,
>-
NH,
HoN
OH
NH 2
2:4:5-triamino-6-
hydroxypyrimidine
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XVII
CHBrCH.Br
A/ N +i +
(u) A A +CHO
HoN/ %/ n nh 2
NH*
CO-NH-CH-(CH 2 VC0 2 H C0 2 H
2:3-dibromo-propionaldehyde />-
aminobenzoyl-L(+)-
glutamic acid
ait jCH3'COaNa
l<
H
CO-NH-CH-CCHijJa-COijH C0 2 H
s isr n n'
xanthopterin
leucopterin
/CO
NH N NH Ba(OH), NH 2 NH 2
p-biotin diamino-compound
NH 2 NH 2
CH CH
II
III IV
It therefore follows that the w-
valeric acid side-chain cannot be
attached to a carbon atom joined to
an amino-group.
[CH. XVII
NH
Raney ,
Ni
NH
I CH-
CO.
CH-(CH 2 ) 4 -C0 2 H
CH,
p-biotin NHjj NH 2
HCl
GH-I CH S
HI0 4
NH I CH
CH 2 -(CH 2 ) 4 -C0 2 H
dethiobiotin
C0 2 H
thiophen
+ (CH 2 ) 3 ' O
CO
glutaric anhydride
Aicu
[1 < (i)(CH,),
HCl
NH 2 CH—
) CO-(CH 2 ) s -C0 2 H
NH, -OH
Zn-H : HCl
4-
8-(2-thienyl)-valeric acid
CH 2 CH-(CH 2 ) 4 -C0 2 H
The above structure for /3-biotin
has been confirmed by synthesis
(Harris et al., 1943, 1944).
NH 2
CH 2 SNa
Na salt of L-cystine
NH 2 •*- CH-C0 2 H
CH 2 yCH 2 'C0 2 H
NH-CO-C 6 H 6
CH-CO 2 0H 3 I CHj CHaCOjCHj
CH,ONa H
CHjOH
NH-CO-C e H 5 CONa
CH 2 G*C0 2 CH3
NHCO-C e H 5 CO
CH 2 0H 2
NH-CO-C 6 H s
CHO-(CH a ),-CQ 8 CH^ I (i)
NH.OH
CH 2 C=CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -C0 2 CH 3
NH NH H Pd NH NH
| I H '" Pd > I I
CH C CH—CH
I II II
CH 2 C-(CH 2 ) 4 -C0 2 CH 3 CKu
CH-(CH 2 ) 4 -C0 2 CH 3
NH NH
(ii) HjSO, | |
C0 2 H
H0 2 C
0OCH3
or
C0 2 H H0 2 C / ^OCH 3
Ho ° c V
CH 2 OH
CH 2 OH
/\
HOCH 2 f[ ^OH
HOCH 2
uyoH.
or
C0 2 H H0 2 C(f\oCH 3 JcH 3
C0 2 H HO,jC<f%OCH 3
v<
CH,
II
OCH,
OCH 3
0H 3 KMn0s H0 2 C ,N H0 2 C
C*jCH 3 H
CH 2 OH HOCH 2 f[ ^iOH
pyridoxin
CH 2 OC 2 H B CH 2 0C 2 H 5
CO OH 2 CN . . A . ff\cN
9 H 2 CO c 2 h„oh CH N J QH
CH 3 -CO " ^ W
H,*^
ethoxyacetyl-acetone
12
cyano-acetamide
CH 2 OC 2 H 6
CH 2 OC 2 H 5
CH 2 OC 2 H5
0 2 N CH 3
Pt+Pd-C
CH 2 OC 2 Hg H 2 N,f\cH 2 NH 2
hci
CH,
CH 2 OH CH 2 OH
H 2 Nff\cH 2 NH 2 HNO|)
HOr|^\cH 2 OH
V
CH,
pyridoxin
0'
C0 2 H
COCl
^0
CONH a C0(NH,
v
C0 2 H
§12. Vitamin B 12 ,
Cyanocobalamin. This is the anti-
pernicious anaemia factor, and has
been isolated from liver extract.
Folic acid (§8) also has anti-
anaemic properties. Vitamin B 12
has been obtained as a red
crystalline substance (Folkers et al.,
1948; Smith et al., 1948, 1949), and
the elements present have been
shown to be C, H, O, N, P, Co; this
vitamin is the first natural product
found to contain cobalt. The cobalt
has been shown to
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XVII
CH 3 - CHOH • CH 2 - NH 2
II
3- CH 2 OH
C'OH HO
I\/
KOH
Me
c6 x
m/
:c-
co
I
CHCH^CHo-COoH
III
IV
Me
Me
NH 2 -COCH 2 '
NH-CO-CH 2 -CH2
CH 2
I MeCH
Me Me/CHa-CONHj
>CH2-CH 2 -CONH 2
CH2CH2CONH2
• N YV
Vitamin Bj 2
A point of interest is that the
arrangement of the four pyrrole
nuclei is somewhat similar to that
in the natural porphin derivatives
such as haem and chlorophyll (§§2,
7. XIX).
A number of vitamin B 1S
compounds have now been isolated
which differ only in the nature of
the basic component of the
nucleotide. The remainder of the
molecule, which is referred to as
Factor B, is common to all the
members of the vitamin B ia group.
A partial synthesis of vitamin B ia
(starting from factor B) has now
been carried out by Bernhauer et al.
(I960).
NH,
HO
OH
OH
0O 2 H />-amino-benzoic acid
H OH
OH
myoinositol
VITAMIN E GROUP
§15. a-Tocopherol, C s9 H B0 O a .
When a-tocopherol is heated at
350°, duro-quinol is obtained
(Fernholz, 1937). On the other
hand, when heated with selenium,
a-tocopherol forms duroquinone
(McArthur et al., 1937). Finally,
when heated with hydriodic acid,
^cumenol is formed (John et al.,
1937).
C29H50O2 a-tocopherol
CH :
The formation of these products led
to the suggestion that a-tocopherol
was the monoether of duroquinol;
the possibility that it might be the
diether was ruled out by the fact
that a-tocopherol forms an
allophanate, which indicates the
presence of one free hydroxyl
group. This monoether structure
was shown to be incorrect by the
fact that the ultraviolet absorption
spectra of various monoethers of
duroquinol were different from that
of a-tocopherol (Fernholz, 1938).
0H V C^
C2 9 H 5( A -^^ If O + CaHaA
R' I R— OCHj-CHjj-CO
I01
''O'I
CH S (ii) QeHss-C/CHa-CHij-CO-^
1 ^ C 18 H 33 COCH 3
' O ' II
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
CH 3 -CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -
CH-(CH 2 ) 2 -C0 2 H
§15]
VITAMINS
621
HO CH 3
\Ao
,CH 2 X CH
CH,
.cr
CH,
,/ N C 16 H 33 CH 3 chroman
structure
.CH 2
CH 3
H0 | fl )3H-CH-C M H«
CH 3 coumaran structure
CH 3
HO, CH 3
0-
BrCH 2 CH
ZnClj
CH,
CH,
■C'CisH33
light petrol
OH .C CieHs3 CH 3
CH,
HO CH
rr
CH, CH 2
CH 3
CH,
CH,
O'
,/l
CH 3
(±) -a-tocopherol
CH 3
(i)
CH
CH 3
°r fi CH 2' CH 2° H
CH
(i)PBr.
OCH 3
(ii) Mgr
CH 3 CH,
CH,
CH 2 ; CH 2 MgBr OCH 3
CH,
CH.
HO
/V^i CHa-COjH* C jj
) VjisH 3;
CH 3
(±) - a-tocopherol
HO CH 3
2. H 3
OH 3 I
HO
OH
Ml
CH 3 II
CH,
HO
a
CH 2 \ CH.
CH,
CH,
3 QH 3
OI CH 3
p-tocopherol
CH 3 -COO
BrCH 2 + OH ? H 3 ? H 3
ZnClj
HO
CH S
CH 2
/C-(CH 2 ) 3 CH S
CH 3
CH 3 (CH 2 ) 3 -CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -
CH(CH 3 ) 2
§17. y-Tocopherol, C 28 H 48 0 2 .
This is isomeric with /S-tocopherol;
the only difference is the positions
of the two methyl groups in the
benzene ring, e.g., when heated
with hydriodic acid, y-tocopherol
gives o-xyloquinol. Thus y-
tocopherol is
HO CH 3
A CH.
CH 3
CH 2 0H 3 CH 3
y-tocopherol
§20]
VITAMINS
623
This structure has been confirmed
by synthesis, starting from the
mono-acetate of o-xyloquinol and
phytyl bromide.
CH 3 COO CH,
CH 3
BrCH
CH
C"Ci 6 H33
CH,
HO CH
CH
CH,
C'CxsHm ' CH 3
§18. 8-Tocopherol, C 27 H 4e 0 2 .
This was isolated from soya bean oil
by Stern et al. (1947); it is a yellow
oil, and is inactive physiologically.
The structure of ^-tocopherol is
/CHj
L II .C-(CH 2 ) 3 -CH-(CH !S ) S -
CH-(CH 2 )3-CH(CH S ) 2
CH ° H *
3 8-tocopherol
VITAMIN K GROUP
[CH. XVI
C31H46O0 *•
/\
CO,H
Ai
\/
CH,
\J C0 ^ VA/Wco 2 h
o
CH,
,-CH=C
CH,
CH 3 S 'CH-
§21]
VITAMINS
625
CH 3
CH 3 0H 3 --
+ OH 2 OH-CH=0-(CH 2 ) 3 -CH-
(CH 2 ) 3 -Ce-(CH 2 )3-CH(C!H3) 2
I
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
AgjO
CH 3 (?Hs CH 3
CH 3 Cl I=C-(CH.),-C]
CH 2 -CH=C-(CH 2 ) 3 -OH-(CH 2
)3-CH-(CH 2 )3-CH(CH 3 ) 2
(C0 2 H) 2
3 0H 3 CH 3 0H 3
+ OH 2 OH-GH=0-(CH 2 )3-CH-
(OH 2 ) 3 -CH-(CH 2 )3CH(CH 3 ) 2
§21. Vitamin K 2 , C 4J H 66 0 2 , is
a yellow solid, m.p. 54°; it is less
potent than vitamin K x . It was
shown to contain a 1 : 4-
naphthaquinone nucleus by the
facts that it is sensitive to light and
to alkalis, and that it has an
absorption spectrum similar to that
of vitamin K x (McKee et al., 1939).
When catalytically reduced, vitamin
K 2 adds on nine molecules of
hydrogen, and since three of these
are absorbed by the
naphthaquinone nucleus (see §20),
it therefore suggests that there is a
side-chain present which contains
six double bonds. Furthermore,
since vitamin K 2 does not form an
adduct with maleic anhydride, no
conjugation is present (McKee et
al., 1939). That these six double
bonds are ethylenic is shown by the
fact that on reductive acetylation,
vitamin K 2 forms the diacetate of
dihydrovitamin K 2) which can add
on six molecules of bromine.
CHyCHO
OCOCH 3
CH 3 CH 3
vitamin K 2
READING REFERENCES
CHAPTER XVIII
CHEMOTHERAPY
H 2 N— ^ ^-SO,j-NH 2
sulphanilamide 627
[ch. XVIII
CH.-CO-NH
CISO3H
>- CH s -CO-NH
S o 2 ci -^V
CH 3 -CO-NH
Sulphapyridine (ATMJ-
pyridylsulphanilamide) was the
first drug to effect cures of
pneumonia; it is more potent than
sulphanilamide. It may be prepared
as follows:
CHoOONH
SOj-NH-
NaOH „
Sulphathiazole (^ 1 -2-
thiazolylsulphanilamide) is more
potent than
NH,^~\sOr-NH-j|^ ^h
Sulphadiazine (iVMJ-
pyrimidylsulphanilamide;
Sulphapyrimidine) is less toxic than
Sulphathiazole; it is the most
widely used of the " sulpha " drugs,
its main use being for mild
infections. It is prepared in the
same way as the previous
compound, except that 2-
aminopyrimidine is used in this
case.
NH 2 <^ ^SO-NH-IJ^ J
Sulphamezathine (iV'-2(4 : 6-
dimethylpyrimidyl)-
sulphanilamide) is also used for
general purposes.
,NH J'
NH 2
NH 2 ^ >-2£=N-^ >S0 2 NH 2
NH,
Na0 3 sL 11 Js0 3 Na
CH 3 CO-NH^ >S0 2 H
^•-Aminobenzoic acid is an
essential growth factor for most
bacteria susceptible to the
sulphonamides. The theory of
action is that, owing to the
similarity in structure, bacteria
absorb a sulphonamide " by mistake
", and once this compound is
ingested, the bacteria cease to grow
in numbers (Woods, 1940). Thus
the sulphonamides are not
bactericidal but bacteriostatic.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XVIII
CH 3 0
CH3O
CH3O
CH 2 OH + CHOH CHjjOH
h„so« CH 3 0|
CeHn-NOj
CH,-CHBr'(CH,)»-N(C 4 H 5 ),
NH'CH(CH 3 ) -CHis-CHu-
CHa'NfCijHss),,
["].
02C2H6
CH s -CO-CH-CH i! CH l! -N(C 2
H6) 2
ketonic
hydrolysis
*- CH 3 -CO-(CH 2 )3-N(C 2 H 5 ) 2
NH«
H2 — Raney Ni
CH 3 ^H-(CH 2 )3-N(C 2 H 6 ) j!
§4]
CHEMOTHERAPY
631
(iii)
CH3O
CI
CH 3 NH-CH(CH 2 ) S -N(C 2 H 6 )
2
CH 3 0
CH„
NH-CH-(CH 2 ) 3 -N(C 2 H 5 ) 2
Ny N Chloroquine
CI ^ y^-WR- C -NH-C-NH-CH(CH 3
)2
NH.
NaNO, H,SO t
OH
HXQ 3? f\ m >_
NagSaOj^
As0 3 H 2
As0 3 H 2
A80 3 H 2
NH.
NH,
HO
As=^j
OH
Arsphenamine is an unstable
compound; it is stable as its
dihydrochloride which, however,
cannot be used as such but must be
converted into the soluble sodium
salt. Ehrlich (1912) overcame this
difficulty by preparing
neoarsphenamine (Neosalvarsan), a
soluble compound, which may be
produced by condensing
arsphenamine with sodium
formaldehydesulphoxylate, CH 2
OH-S0 2 Na.
Wit NH-CHjjOSONa
neoarsphen amine
Atoxyl is the sodium salt of ^>-
arsanilic acid (^-
aminophenylarsonic acid); it is used
in the treatment of sleeping
sickness. ^-Arsanilic acid may be
prepared by heating aniline with
arsenic acid at 200° (cf. sulphanilic
acid. Vol. I).
NH«
Ab0 3 H 2 + H 2 0
Tryparsamide is the sodium salt of
N-phenylglycineamide-^>-arsonic
acid; it is less toxic than Atoxyl, and
may be prepared by refluxing the
latter with chloroacetamide.
Commercial preparations of
penicillin contain one or more of
the penicillins in varying
proportions. It has been found that
the addition to the culture medium
of various compounds containing a
benzyl group, e.g., phenylacetic acid,
phenylacetamide, etc., increases the
total yield of penicillin, and also the
proportion of benzylpenicillin.
Similarly, the addition of
compounds containing the ^-
hydroxybenzyl group to the culture
medium increases the proportion of
^-hydroxybenzylpenicillin. On the
other hand, by adding various
compounds to the culture medium,
a number of " unnatural" penicillins
have been prepared (see §6b).
§6a]
CHEMOTHERAPY
633
C 9 H u 0 4 N 2 SR + 2H 2 0
HCl
C 8 H u 0 2 NS + C 3 H 4 0 2 NR
D-Penicillamine, C 5 H u 0 2 NS.
Since penicillamine gives the indigo
colour reaction with ferric chloride,
a test characteristic of cysteine, this
suggests that the amine is probably
a substituted cysteine. The
structure of penicillamine was
proved to be D-/3 : /9-
dimethylcysteine by synthesis, e.g.,
(CHjOsCH-CH-COijH NH 2 DL-
valine
(CHjJjjCH-CH-COjjH
NH-CO-CH 2 Cl
(CH s -CO),0
(CH 3 ) 2 C=C CO
H,S
C]
(aEW,0-C-00,H
N=C-SH I CH 3
azlactone
h„o
boil
(CH 3 ) 2 C—CHC0 2 H
(CH 3 ) 2 C CHC0 2 H
^H 3
2:5:5-trimethyl-2-
thiazoline-4-carboxylic
acid
(CH 3 ),jC—CH-C0 2 H
8H NH 2
DL -penicillamine
(CH 3 ) 2 C—CH-C0 2 H
I I SH NH 2
DL-form
H-C0 s H
II
SH NH-CHO DL-form
(i) brucine
(CH 3 ) 2 C—CH-C0 2 H
SH NH 2 D-penicillamine
Penilloaldehyde. On vigorous
hydrolysis, all the penilloaldehydes
give a substituted acetic acid and
aminoacetaldehyde. Thus the
penilloaldehydes are acylated
derivatives of aminoacetaldehyde.
R-CONH-CH 2 -CHO + H 2 0 -> R-
C0 2 H + NH 2 -CH 2 -CHO
R-CONH-CH 2 -CH(OC 2 H 5 ) 2 -
^> R-CONH-CH 8 -CHO
R-CONH-CH-CHO -^ C0 2 + R-
CONH-CH 2 -CHO
C0 2 H
penaldic acid
.g RCONHCHjCHO
R-CO-NH-CHVCH yCH^ H ,o ^ HS
+
j HjjN-CHCOijH
RCONHCH CH N C(CH 3 ) 2
I | | — >-mj 2 + i
00 2 H nh —CH-C0 2 H
II
/\
R-CO-NH-CH—CH C(CH 3 ) 2
Penicillin CH ' OH > C H,0 2 C Ah—
CHC0 2 H
HS H80 ^ R-CO-NH-CH-CHO N
C(CH 3 ) 2
h^ci,* C0 2 CH s H,NCH-C0 2 H
III IV
oxazolone structure (S-lactam
structure
RC' CHR
II
o c=o
oxazolone
[CH. XVIII
HO
,C-CH—CH G<
KS-
; (CH 3 ) 2 I CHC0 2 H
*C
tR
peniUic acid
[dilute | acid
RCONHCH
CO-
/\
H0 2 C NH CHC0 2 H
penicilloic acid
-co 2
RCONHCH 2 CH C(CH 3 ) 2
NH CHC0 2 H
penilloic acid
HaO-HgCla
-CH C(CH 3 ) 2
N-
peniciilin
CHCO.H
HS
R-CO-NHCH 2 -CHO +
penilloaldehyde
C(CH 3 ) 2
H 2 NCHC0 2 H penicillamine
methyl penicilloate
h 2 o-h s ci 2
R-CO-NH-CH-CHO I C0 2 CH 3
R.-C C=CHOR I I
O CO
§7]
CHEMOTHERAPY
637
Batchelor et al. (1959) isolated pure
6-aminopenicillanic acid from
fermentation liquors to which no
precursors had been added. This
acid had already been synthesised
by Sheehan (1958); it is the amino-
compound (I) with the RCO group
removed.
(i)
RCO-
^V
-NH- CH CH CMe 2
CO-j-N-(2)
-CHC0 2 H
RCO-
-NH-CH CH '^CMej
i: r-V" *l
CO-^-N* ?CHC0 2 H
cysteine valine
OH H
III
NH-OKHjj NH
The following is a very brief account
of the evidence that led to this
structure for streptomycin. The
molecular formula was shown to be
C 2 iH 39 0 1 gN 7 . Three nitrogen
atoms are strongly basic (the
molecule forms a trihydro-
chloride), and on mild acid
hydrolysis, streptomycin gives one
molecule of streptidine, C 8 H 18 0
4 N 6 , and one molecule of
streptobiosamine, C 13 H 23 0 9 N
(Folkers et al, 1946).
NH,
HO HO
OH
OH NH,
streptamine
a diaminotetrahydroxycyc/ohexane,
and examination of the oxidation
products of dibenzoylstreptamine
with periodic acid led to the
suggestion that streptidine is 1 : 3-
diguanido-2 : 4 : 5 : 6-
tetrahydroxycyc/ohexane (Carter et
al., 1946). Streptidine has been
synthesised from streptamine
(Wolfrom et al., 1948). Since
streptidine is not optically active,
the configuration of the molecule
must be meso, with the two
guanido groups cis (see unit III).
OH CH,
V
maltol
§8]
CHEMOTHERAPY
639
\ / C0 2 H
CH 2 CH„ X CHMe
I ' I CH 3 CH 2 C0 2 H
II
CH
CH, X CHMe
II
CH 3 CH 2 -CO-
tetrahydro-y -pyrone
C0 2 Et CO X C0 2 Et
mesoxalic ester
O
OH
C(C0 2 Et) 2
AcO x <>
AcO.
O-
N- bromo-
succinimide
lactol acetate
CO H
AcO O
AgOAo^
VSr
CH
T> OAc
AcOH-Ao 2 0
0 CO
.CH
O OAc
\A,H
patulin
§9. Chloramphenicol
(Chloromycetin). Chloramphenicol
is a laevo-rotatory compound that is
produced by Streptomyces
venezuelse (Carter et al., 1948); it is
very effective in the treatment of
typhoid fever, etc.
^* * CHoOH
^CH 2 OH
OmcO'CHCij CHOH-CH X CH 2 OH
NO,
: ^^ C0 .CH3^ N0,^3c0-0H 2 B r
iffSaSU »
NHCOCH 3 CH 2 OH NH-COCHs *
<n /MI*
* —^ /NHCOCHC1,
(ii)CHCI 2 -C0 2 CH 3
no 2 «: >CHOHCII
CH.OH
(—) -chloramphenicol
This structure has also been
confirmed by crystallographic
studies (Dunitz, 1952).
N0 2 <^ T -C —CCH 2 OH
OH H
READING REFERENCES
Advances in Enzymology,
Interscience Publishers, 1950, 10,
145. Birkinshaw, The Chemistry and
Biochemistry of Streptomycin and
Related Compounds,
CHAPTER XIX
HEMOGLOBIN, CHLOROPHYLL
AND PHTHALOCYANINES
HAEMOGLOBIN
644 CH 3 ,
C2H5
H
opsopyrrole
CH 3 , CH 3
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
CaH,
2-n-6
haemopyrrole II
H
cryptopyrrole III
CH 3 CH 3
[CH. XIX
C 2 H 6 'CH 3
phyllppyrrole IV
and a ketone containing an active
methylene group, i.e., a compound
containing the group —CH a -CO—.
The mechanism of the reaction is
not known; possibly the enol forms
are involved, and so we may write
the general reaction as follows:
RCO II'-CH
•NH, O'
H 2 CR C-R"
RCOH
,11 R-C
HCR
NH, HO'
C-R
**1
RC.
-C-R"
II . C-R
2H 2 0
CH 3 CO CH 2
CHj-CO-CIIs COC0 2 C 2 H 5
CH 3 -COH
HCCOCH 3
NH 2
CH
NH 2 HO
C-C0 2 C 2 H5
CH,
CO-CH 3 C0 2 C 2 H5
NsH,
CH,
H
C(=N-NH 2 )-CH 3 C0 2 C2H 5
C a H»ONa 160°
CH,
CHo* CH;
2 ^■" 3 C 2 H s ONa .
C02C2H5
CH,
\J
CH 2 CH3
H
opsopyrrole
§2]
HAEMOGLOBIN, CHLOROPHYLL
AND PHTHALOCYANINES
645
CH,CO
I C 2 H B 0 2 OCH
CH 2 C0CH 3 CO-CH 3
CHvCOH
HCCOCH3
CaHjjOaC-q
NH,
CH;
C2H5O2C
|COCH 3 (;) n 2 h 4 OH,
'NH, HO'
CH a
./
.C-CH 3
CH 2 OH3 'CH 3
cryptopyrrole
CH,
•N'
iCH 2 CH 2 C0 2 H
CH 3 CH 3
H opsopyrrole-carboxylic acid V
CH 2 'CH 2 C0 2 H
hseraopyrrole-
carboxylic acid
VI
CH<
CH 2 -CH 2 C0 2 H CH,
CH 3 CH,
H
CH 2 -CH 2 00 2 H 'CH 3
'N' H
cryptopyrroJe-carboxylic acid
VII
phyllopyrrole-
carboxylic acid
VIII
CH
O'
CH 2 CH 2 C0 2 H
C2H5
hsematinic acid IX
CH a
ethylmethyimaleimide
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIX
§3]
HAEMOGLOBIN, CHLOROPHYLL
AND PHTHALOCYANINES
647
68
XII
66
porphin XI
CH3C2H5
C 2 Hs CH 3
CH 3 C2H6
C2H5 CH 3
CH 3 C2H5
CH 3 C 2 H 6
setioporphyrins
CHj C 2 H 6
C 2 H 6 CH 3
C 2 H6 CH 3
CH,
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
fl n^"*
I JcH 3 +
V
H
Br 2
CH 3 Br
C 2 H 5 CH3
H H ,. H
H^ BF
CH 3 | Br
II
[CH. XIX
BT
C 2 H B CH 2 Br
-■2-US'
CH $
Br 2
C2H5
CH 3
^ 2 xi 5 CH 3
Br + BKmJMlBr
CH 3 CaHs —CH=
CH 3
Br
+ HBr
Br"
(ii) When pyrroles, in which the 5-
position is vacant, are coupled by
means of formic acid in the
presence of hydrobromic acid,
dipyrrylmethenes are produced (H.
Fischer et al., 1922); e.g.,
C 2 H 6 0 2 C CH,
1 n^"3 (
+ H-CO.H-H2V
C 2 H50 2 C
CH,
H
I nUH 3 UH 3 c=|i
qCOAHs
H Br~
C 2 H 6 0 2 C,
chJ
rCH 3 CH31 CH,
C0 2 C 2 H 5 Br2
CH S
CHji C 2 H 6 0 2 C
|C0 2 C 2 H 5 Bri ^ CH 3
_b^ CH 3 n n C 2 H 5 0 2 C\ J)
CH 3 n
C2H502C
C0 2 C2H 5 CH,OH
CH,
iCO^Hs boi ]
wate
J0H 2 Br
"^C 2 H 6 0 2 C^
C0 2 C 2 H 5 C0 2 C 2 H 5
CH 3
:h 2 -
HH
+ H 2 O+0H 2 O
C0 2 C 2 Hs
(i)NaOH
(ii)Brj-CH 3 C0 2 H
CH 3 Br
C0 2 H 0O 2 H
-CH=
CH,
H^ Br _
Ar
(i)
CH,
CH,
+ HCN+HC1
C 2 H CH 3
AICU w 2 n 6
>'
CH 8 CHO
(ii)
C 2 H 5 CH-
■-r-'+
Br"
CH 3 CH 3
CH 3 Br 1
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
riCgHj CH 8 j — 1C2H5
succinic acid ,
CHaBr
Br _ CH3 C 8 H 5
CH
C a H s CH3
•
N
<
CH=7 /
CH 3 C 2 H 5
■ CH
[CH. XIX
C 2 H B CH 3 setioporphyrin I
CH,
-CH,
4CH 2 0
NH
/■
HN
H
CH 2
-CHs
CH-
CH
-CH
H
CH
porphin
§4] HEMOGLOBIN,
CHLOROPHYLL AND
PHTHALOCYANINES
651
(i)
CH,
CH ;
>CH 3 H Br"
CH 2 C0 2 H CH»
(ii)
CH,
CjHsO^C
Br 2
y CH s
- CH3 n
C 2 H 5 0 2 cl| ])
CH 2 -C0 2 H CH 2
boil in
CHoBr
C0 2 H C0 2 H OH 2 CH 2 QH2 v-
Hg
H 5 o 2 cll JLcht-II /
H II
CH 3 C0 2 C2H5
(i) NaOH
C0 2 H C0 2 H CH 2 <J!H 2 CH,
0H 3 Br
2 V"^
I JUh=L J
X W X N)+
H HU
CH S Br HfBr"
II
CH.
CH-
CH,
180-190°
CH,
s
-CH
CH 2 I -CO.
CH 2 CO.H
CH,
=CH
CH,
deuteroporphyrin
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY CH 3
CH-
— \ ) ch
K-r.^N
C0 2 H
nrr.t=
CH 3
*CH
CH 2 CO a H
CH.
deuteroheemin
[CH. XIX
■cr
(CHj-COJjO
SnCU
CH 3 C O-CH 3 CH
CH—Jl I —
CH S
CH, CH 2 CO.H
CH 2 l='CH,
CH 2
C0 2 H
diacetyldeuterohsemin
CH, COCH 3
+
■ cr
CH-
CH 3 C OCH 3 —CH
CH,
HBr
CHj-COjH
,N
N„v
CH 2 CH 2 C0 2 H
H
CH 3 COCH 3
CH
CH.
CH
CH,
CH 2 I C0 2 H
diacetyldeuteroporphyrin
§4]
HAEMOGLOBIN, CHLOROPHYLL
AND PHTHALOCYANINES
653
CH 3 CH3CHOH
CH-
KOH
CjHjOH
FeCU
CH 3 -COjH
CH 3
CH S
CH 2 CO.
-CH
.N
H ™=( rvp-fc=
<
\
CH 3 CHOHCH3
CH, I CH 2
CH
CH*
C0 2 H
hjematoporphyrin
CH 2 CH3CH
CH-
■CH
CI I,
CH,
CH 2
C0 2 H CH=
N.
CH, CH=CH 2
=CH
en.
CH 2
CH 2
C0 2 II protoporphyrin
CH 2 CH, CH
C1I-
CH 3
COo
S N'
CH
|CH,
CH=CH 2
N CR=/ \=CH
CH,>='CH 3
CI"
CH I ' CH,
00 2 H
hsemin
C0 2 H C0 2 H
!2!2,2
CH 2 —COX
<Jh 2
H
C s OX CH 2 C0 2 H
N " NH 2
I II
CH 3 00 2 H CH 2 C0 2 H
+ I^OH
CH 2 -C0 2 H I^COjjH
COOOoH CH 2 C0 2 H
{> ! !•
\t i;
CH 2 -C0 2 H COC0 2 H
C0 2 + CH 2 -C0 2 H - CH 2 +C0 2
CH 2 -C0 2 H
C0 2 H C0 2 H
C0 2 H CH 2 CO.H CH 2
CH a CH 2 CH 2 CH
CH„ CO *~ 6 C —--^Protoporphyrin
. i j . ii «n
NH 2 -CH 2 -CO CH 2 NH 2 -CH 2 C
Jm
NH 2 ^N
porphobilinogen
CHLOROPHYLL
§6]
HEMOGLOBIN, CHLOROPHYLL
AND PHTHALOCYANINES
657
Willstatter et al. (1911) originally
gave chlorophyll the molecular
formula C 55 H 72 0 6 N 4 Mg, but
in 1912 Willstatter et al. showed
that chlorophyll, obtained from a
wide variety of sources, was a
mixture of two compounds,
chlorophyll-a and chlorophyll-6.
The separation was effected by
shaking a light petrol solution of
chlorophyll with aqueous
methanol; chlorophyll-a remains in
the light petrol, and chlorophyll-6
passes into the aqueous methanol.
Chlorophyll-a is a bluish-black
solid, giving a green solution in
organic solvents; chlorophyll-6 is a
dark green solid, also giving a green
solution in organic solvents. The
two components occur in
proportions of approximately 3 of a
to 1 of b in natural chlorophyll.
Winterstein et al, (1933) have
separated the two chlorophylls by
means of chromatography (on
sucrose as adsorbent). This
technique has been improved by
various workers {inter alia, Calvin
et al., 1962).
KO ^C 32 H 30 ON 4 Mg^
CO,H
.CO 2 0H 3
C 32 H 30 ON 4 Mg
C0 2 C2oH 39 chlorophyll-a
+ C20H40O+ CH s OH
CO,H
chlorophyllide-a
(COiH)s
CjHjOH
CsJUOK
,CO,CH,
CjaHajOjNaMg.
y C0 2 CH 3
COoCmHs,
C0 2 H
^^C^HagO.NiMg +- CsjoHmO +
CH 3 OH
C0 2 H II chlorophyllide-i
chlorophyll-6
C 3 H„OH * C 32H3o0 2 N^
.C0 2 CH 3
CO 2 C 20 H 39
IV
phytyl phfcophorbide-ft
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIX
CH;
CH 2 CH 2 -C0 2 H
CH
O n n -H
I
■A)
C 2 H,
2 "6
H II
Ao
CH31
CH3'
C 2 Hg
/
H III
CH 3 |
chJ
H IV
CaH 5 CH 3
CH
HV
C 2 H S •OH,
§7]
HEMOGLOBIN, CHLOROPHYLL
AND PHTHALOCYANINES
659
of the two groups been
interchanged in VI. It is also
necessary to fit a second carboxyl
group into this structure (VI), since
chlorophyll-a forms chlorophyllide-
a on hydrolysis (the latter
compound contains two carboxyl
groups). Furthermore, since
chlorophyllide-a, on further
hydrolysis, forms chlorin-e, a
tricarboxylic acid, some group must
be present which can give rise to
this third carboxyl group. Such a
group could be a lactone; it must be
cyclic since no carbon atoms are
lost after the hydrolysis.
Pyrroporphyrin, CgoHgaN^CO-jH,
has an absorption spectrum closely
resembling that of mesoporphyrin
(see §2); this agrees with the
tentative skeleton structure VI
proposed for chlorin-e.
Pyrroporphyrin, on bromina-tion
followed by oxidation with chromic
acid, gives bromocitraconimide, VII,
as one of the products (Treibs et al.,
1928). It therefore follows that at
least one of the pyrrole nuclei in
pyrroporphyrin has a free /3-
position available for bromination.
Synthetic work then showed that
pyrroporphyrin has structure VIII
(H. Fischer et al., 1929, 1930, 1933);
thus the positions of the four
methyl groups and the position of
the propionic acid group are now
established.
CH 3 C 2 H 5
V-
CH 3 C 8 H 5
CH-
SCH
V
VII
CH 3 CH 2
•N' H
85
CH(J
CH,
CH 2 C0 2 H
VIII pyrroporphyrin
Rhodoporphyrin, C 30 H 32 N 4
(CO 2 H) 2 , on heating with
sodium ethoxide, readily loses one
carboxyl group to form
pyrroporphyrin (VIII). From a
detailed study of the haemin series,
it was observed that a carboxyl
group in a side-chain of a pyrrole
nucleus was difficult to remove.
Hence it is
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIX
Phylloporphyrin, C 3] H 35 N 4 'C0
2 H, contains one CH 2 group more
than pyrroporphyrin, and may be
converted into the latter by heating
with sodium ethoxide. It therefore
follows that the alkyl groups in both
compounds occupy similar
positions. Synthetic work then
showed that phylloporphyrin
contains a methyl group attached to
the y-methyne carbon atom (H.
Fischer et ah, 1930, 1933).
CC
s/
ot
-c-
8C
,tt
Y
-C-I C
0c
C0 2 H
IX
cIc
VI
op
sK
\
CO,H C
can <** c
c
V
Aj
\.
cc
C CO 2 0H 3
CO
C0 2 H
XI
§7]
HAEMOGLOBIN, CHLOROPHYLL
AND PHTHALOCYANINES
661
C0 2 CH 3
4\
C0 2 C2oH 39
phytyt phasophorbide-o:
C0 2 CH 3
+ CgoH^O
C0 2 H phasophorbide-a
When phaeophorbide-a is treated
with hydriodic acid in acetic acid
and followed by atmospheric
oxidation, the product is
phaeophorphyrin-a 5 . This, on
further treatment with hydriodic
acid in acetic acid, forms
phylloerythrin, CsgH^OgN^ by loss
of the carbomethoxyl group;
phylloerythrin has the same
absorption spectrum as that of the
porphyrins, and so the porphin
structure is still present. Now both
phaeophorbide-a and phylloerythrin
contain a keto group (as is shown
by the formation of an oxime, etc.),
and so when the carbomethoxyl
group is hydrolysed, the elimination
of carbon dioxide can be expected if
the keto group is in the /9-position
with respect to the carboxyl group
(produced on hydrolysis).
Furthermore, the hydrolysis of
phaeophorbide-a with methanolic
potassium hydroxide gives chlorin-
e. In this reaction, apart from the
hydrolysis of the carbomethoxyl
group, the keto group is lost and a
carboxyl group is introduced
without the loss of any carbon
atoms. This may be explained by
assuming that this carboxyl group
(the third one in chlorin-e) is
produced by the fission of a cyclic
ketone, and not from a lactone as
suggested previously (see above).
Thus a possible skeleton structure
for phaeophorbide-a is XI; if the
ketone ring is opened, then the
formation of X can be expected.
Also, the hydrolysis of XI would
produce a /J-keto-acid, which can
be expected to lose carbon dioxide
readily to form phylloerythrin.
OH.,
CH 2 OH
^CH-
SNH
CH
CH
irrF
OHa O2H
SNH
2n5
CH
A=c-V^
CH yr
0H 2 | X CO
0H 3 C2H5
CH.
CH 2 C0 2 H
C0 2 CH 3
XII
pliajophorbide-a
CH Z C0 2 CH 3 C0 2 C2oH 39
XIII
phytyl phasophorbide-tf
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIX
Q2H5
<? 2 H B
CH
H'CH, | N CO~ CH 3 I C0 2 CH 3
CH 2
COjCaiHsg XV chlorophyll -b
Biosynthesis of chlorophyll.
Although the steps are not clearly
defined, Granick (1948, 1961) has
produced evidence to show that
chlorophyll is synthesised by green
plants from protoporphyrin (cf.
§4a).
PHTHALOCYANINES
§8]
HEMOGLOBIN, CHLOROPHYLL
AND PHTHALOCYANINES
663
metal phthalocyanines are
insoluble in water, and are used as
pigments. They are made water-
soluble by sulphonation, and these
soluble salts are used as dyes.
phthalocyanine
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
[CH. XIX
0CH 2 CN CH 2 -CN
VI
N—
VIII
VII
(C 8 H 4 N 2 ) 4 Mg -™2L+ (C 8 H 4
Na)4H8
§9]
HEMOGLOBIN, CHLOROPHYLL
AND PHTHALOCYANINES
665
(C 8 H 4 N 2 ) 4 H 2 + 7H 2 0 + [O]
-► 4C 8 H 5 0 2 N + 4NH 3
This agrees with IX, but had the
structure been X, then the molecule
would have required two atoms of
oxygen.
(C 8 H 4 N 2 ) 4 H 4 + 6H 2 0 + 2[0]
-► 4C 8 H 5 0 2 N + 4NH 3
Phthalocyanines.
INDEX OF AUTHORS
Names associated with reactions,
syntheses, etc., are not listed here ;
they are described in the Subject
Index.
Aaron, 162
Abderhalden, 473
Adler, 588
Akabori, 475
Aldrich, 493
Aldridge, 588
Alexander, 24
Almquist, 624
Altaian, 654
Ambrose, 469
Amos, 588
Andersag, 602
Anderson, 472, 595
Andriani, 49
Angell, 589
Angyal, 111
Anner, 400
Arago, 21
Archer, 516
Arens, 249
Armstrong, 184
Arshid, 8
Arth, 268
Asai, 476
Aschan, 279
Aston, 109
Attenberg, 266
Attenburrow, 334
Austin, 75
Babo, 503
Backer, 141
Badger, 148
Bahadur, 482
Balbiano, 421
Bamberger, 156
Banholzer, 492
Barber, 127
Barbier, 248
Barger, 492
Barnard, 250
Bartlett, 46, 65, 77, 290
Bastiansen, 139
Batchelor, 637
Bateman, 250
Battersby, 541
Bauer, 565
Baxter, 330
Beckmann, 149
Bednarczyk, 182
Beets, 602
Beevers, 216
Ben-Ishai, 472
Benkeser, 96
Bentley, 637
Bergkvist, 78
Bernhauer, 619
Beyerman, 473
Bide, 536
Bijvoet, 32
Biot, 8
Birch, 271
Birkinshaw, 639
Bischoff, 145
Black, 270
Blicke, 510
Blomquist, 132
Blout, 469
Boissonas, 474
Booker, 245
Bornwater, 571
Bose, 515
Bothner-By, 82
Bradley, 54
Braithwaite, 322
Braude, 386
Braun, 85
Braun, von, 487
Brenner, 470
Bretschneider, 508
Briggs, 303
Brigl, 216
INDEX OF AUTHORS
Brink, 638
Brockman, 387
Brockway, 139
Broome, 361
Browning, 133
Brownstein, 135
Bruce, 372
Bryan, 138
Bucher, 310
Buchner, 287
Bunn, 318
Burns, 214
Burrows, 164
Burwell, 48
Buser, 387
Butenandt, 368, 372, 395, 396, 398,
409,
Cahn, 35
Cantor, 182
Casanova, 55
Cavalieri, 575
Caventou, 656
Celmer, 140
Challenger, 174
Chapman, 157
Chargaff, 595
Chatterjee, 490
Chavanne, 100
Christie, 126
Clar, 348, 349
Claridge, 637
Clarke, 599
Cleeton, 148
Close, 438
Clusius, 575
Cohen, 167
Cole, 268
Cook, 349, 350, 367, 398, 399, 400,
404,
Dam, 623
Darmon, 468
Davies, 162
Davis, E. F„ 592
Davis, T. L., 85
Dawson, 543
Debye, 2, 11
Delahay, 182
Dewar, 422
Dhar, 139
Dimroth, 383
Djerassi, 379
Dodds, 408
Domagk, 627
Drew, 192
Drumm, 423
Dubrunfaut, 181
Dufraisse, 348
Dunitz, 641
Dunlop, 145
Dunn, 588
Dvoretzky, 425
Eaborn, 174
Eascott, 612
Easty, 54
Edman, 475
Eijkman, 598
Eiland, 198
Einhorn, 519
Eisenlohr, 79, 119
Ekenstein, 184
Elisberg, 398
Elming, 514
Elving, 124
Emden, 593
Erlenmeyer, 24
Eschenmoser, 299
Ettinger, 240
Evans, 235
Everest, 552
INDEX OF AUTHORS
669
Fisher, 258
Fittig, 572
Flavitzky, 275
Fleming, 632
Fleury, 216
Fonken, 360
Fowden, 427
Frankel, 471
Fraser, 469
Fredga, 50
Fresnel, 56, 57
Freudenberg, 9, 490
Friedmann, 493
Frolich, 209
Fulmer, 612
Funk, 598
Goodwin, 608
Goto, 182
Graebe, 6
Granick, 662
Green, 162
Greenberg, 586
Grewe, 602
Grignard, 250
Griins, 598
Grisebach, 566
Gross, 458
Guha, 277
Guiteras, 388
Gurnani, 449
H
Haller, 283 Hammett, 69 Hanby,
145
Iffland, 129
Ingram, 133
Isbell, 203
Isensee, 449
Ives, 24
Jackman, 81
Jahns, 499
Jamison, 53, 55
Jansen, 141
Jensen, 112
de Jong, 107
Joshi, 7
Jowett, 493
Kaczkowski, 543
Kamai, 164
Karabatsos, 160
Karagounis, 65
Kargl, 330
Karrer, 171, 172, 309, 313, 322, 323,
324,
K6tz, 269
Kraemer, 228
Kraft, 312
Krause, 159
Krebs, 480
Krfiger, 251
Kuehl, 638
Kuhara, 157
Kuhn, L. P., 15
Laiblin, 506
Lander, 140
Lapworth, 140
Laqueur, 396
Lee, 484
Leeds, 403
Lcuclis 54
Levy, 24
Lewinsohn, 174
Lewis, 516
Lichtenstadt, 150
Liebermann, 336
Liebig, 569, 570
Lindlar, 332
Lindsay, 354
Lipp, 288
LSfgren, 576
Lohmann, 603
Londergan, 600
London, 2
Long, 641
Lorentz, 7
Lorenz, 7
Loring, 593
Lucas, 76
LukeS, 496
Luttringhaus, 132
Lythgoe, 591
M
INDEX OF AUTHORS
671
McKenzie, 55, 81
Mackenzie, 510
Macleod, 6
McNutt, 607
McQuillin, 306
Magat, 64
Maitland, 139
Malaguti, 279
Malaprade, 198
Mamoli, 397
Manasse, 268
Manske, 490
Manson 592
Marckwald, 55, 79
Marion, 543
Markakis, 652
Marsh, 285
Martin, 457
Matthiessen, 537
Medicus, 572
Meerwein, 288
Meier, 79
Parikh, 458
Park, 316
Pascu, 182
Peck, 638
Pelletier, 656
Peppiatt, 380
Petuely, 212
Pickard, 52
Pinner, 506
Pocker, 24
Polanyi, 47, 72
Posternak, 619
Powell, 65
Prevost, 62
Price, 123
Pringsheim, 221
Pschorr, 639
Pummerer, 317
Purdie, 187
Quilico, 244
INDEX OF AUTHORS
Raper, 164
Rapoport, 544
Rappoldt, 385
Read, 268
Reid, 81
Richter, 579
Ried, 135
Riniker, 378
Roberts, 76, 98, 149
Robeson, 334
Schuetz, 380
Schultz, 126
Schwyzer, 474
Seekles, 524
Sela, 469
INDEX OF AUTHORS
673
Taylor, E. C, 499
Teichmann, 643
Theimer, 252
Tobie, 183
Underhill, 566
Veldestra, 419
Verley, 247
Verwoerd, 596
Vocke, 311
Vogel 460
Vogt, 259
Wackenroder, 321
Waksman, 637
Walden, 69
Wendler, 625
Wessely, 566
West, 571
Westall, 655
Westheimer, 136
Weston, 169
Westphal, 372
Weygand, 472
Whalley, 99
Whiffen, 202
Whitfield, 596
Whitmore, 288
Whittaker, 441
Whitworth, 141
Wibaut, 502
Wiberg, 99
Wicker, 380
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
Abietinol, 312
derivatives Acetonedicarboxylic
acid, 497, 514, 519 Acetophenone,
81, 430, 445, 446, 510, 548,
424 3-Acetyl-5:9-dimethyldecalin,
306 iV-Acetylglucosamine, 232 l-
Acetyl-2-hydroxynaphthalene-3-
Additive properties, 1, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10
Adenine, 577-579, 588, 589, 593,
595
Adrenaline, 493-494
Adrenosterone, 415
iEtiocholanone, 366
jEtiocholyl methyl ketone, 366
Albumins, 466
Allantoin, 570-572
Allose, 179-180
A Wothreonine, 459
Alloxantin, 570
Alloxazines, 448
Allylbenzylmethylphenylammonium
iodide, 144
Altrose, 179-180
Amidines, 441
4-Aminoimidiazole-5-carboxamide,
428
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
675
Atoxyl, 632
Atropine, 509-516
Aureomycin, 638
iodide, 144
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
Benzylethyl-l-naphthyl-«-propyl-
arsonium iodide, 164
Benzylethylpropylsilicyl oxide, 173
Benzylidene derivatives, 206, 511,
608 Benzylmethyl-1 -
naphthylphenyl-
alkaloids, 541-544
porphyrin, 654-655
purines, 586
Cadinene, 299-303
Calciferol, 384-386
Calciferyl-4-iodo-3-nitrobenzoate,
386
Campholide, 283
Camphoroxime, 50
bromide, 169
Carboxymethylmethylphenyl-
2-arsaindane, 166 ^-
Carboxyphenylmethylethylarsine
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
677
Channel complex, 55
Chemotherapy, 627-641
Chenodeoxycholic acid, 391 Chitin,
232
tetrahydroiso-arsinolinium
bromide,
boat, 109-112
2-decalols, 118-121
menthols, 268
pyranosides, 201-203
steroids, 380-382
26 Constellation, 28
Constitutive properties, 1, 6, 7, 10
Conyrine, 501 Copaene, 301, 303
Copper phthalocyanine, 663
Coprostane, 366, 377, 381, 392
Coprostanol, 359, 380, 381, 392,
393 Coronene, 354-357
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
Corticosterone, 416
Cortisone, 417-418
Coumaric acid, 92
Cram's rule, 84
Crocetin, 337
Crocin, 337
y-Cumenol, 619
Cuminal, 305
Cuscohygrine, 496-497
Cusparine, 521
11 -Dehydrocorticosterone, 416
Dehydrodeoxycholic acid, 370
Dehydroepiandrosterone, 396, 397,
411 Dehydrogenases, 477, 479, 480
Dehydrogenation (with metals),
307, 311,
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
679
Dihydrocarveol, 260-261
Dihydrocholesterol, see Cholestanol
9:10-Dihydro-3:4-5:6-dibeirzophen-
130 l:l'-Dinaphthyl-8:8'-dicarboxylic
acid,
130 a:y-Di-l-naphthyl-a:y-
diphenylallene, 139 a:y-Di-l-
naphthyl-a:y-diphenylallyl
Diphenyl compounds,
stereochemistry of,
126-139 Diphenyl-2:2'-disulphonic
acid, 128 Diphenylene disulphide,
127 Diphenylguanidine, 319 3:4-
Diphenyliso-oxazole-6-carboxylic
Ebonite, 319
Ecgonine, 517-518
y-Ecgonine, 519
Elastins, 467
Elbs reaction, 341, 351
634, 656
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
Erythro-3-bromobutan-2-ol, 76-77
Erythrose, 176-177 Essential oils,
242, 244
Fenchane, 271
oc-Fenchene, 293
a-Fenchocamphorone, 293
Fenchone, 293-294
Flavanone, 561
Flavins, 604
Flavone, 558-560
Flavones, 557-565
Flavonol, 560-562
Flexible molecules, 28
Fluorene, 340
l-Fluoro-2:4-dinitrobenzene, 459,
476
Four-centre reaction, 74
Frequency factor, 64
Friedel-Crafts reaction, 340
Galactans, 232
Galactose, 179-180, 182, 187, 191,
205,
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
681
Germanium compounds,
stereochemistry
Hydrocarbostyril-3-carboxylic acid,
54 Hydrogen bonding, 2-3, 4, 8, 15,
226,
468-469, 515 Hydrorubber, 317
Hydroxyaetiocholanone, see 5-
7soandro-
551 7-Hydroxy-l:2-
dimethylphenanthrene,
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
388 j8-Hydroxy-|8-phenylbutyric
acid, 81 17-a-Hydroxyprogesterone,
415 Hydroxyproline, 453, 455 a-
Hydroxypropionic acid, 75
Hydroxypyruvic acid, 216 5-
Hydroxyuracil, 573 Hygrine, 495-
496 Hygrinic acid, 495, 508
Hyodeoxycholic acid, 391 Hyoscine,
516-517 Hyoscyamine, 509
Hypoxanthine, 578-579
Idose, 179-180
Indazoles, 427
Indican, 235
Indoxyl, 235
Induced dipoles, 2, 12
Induction effect, 2
Inhibitors, 479
Inositols, 115
Intensity of magnetisation, 12
Inulin, 232
Inversion, see Walden inversion
2-Iodo-octane, 71
y-Ionone, 252
y-Ionone, 251
Ion-pairs, 67
Irone, 252
Zsoandrosterone, see
Epiandrosterone
Jsobornylane, 271
Isobutylethylmethylpropylammoniur
chloride, 144 isocamphane, 271
isocamphoric acid, 283 Jsocrotonic
acid, 90, 92 Isoelectric point, 461,
466 Jsoequilenin, 407
Zsoergosterone, 414 Jsoflavones,
565-566 Isogeroaic acid, 251, 327
Isohexyl methyl ketone, 364
Jsoindole, 664 Zsoleucine, 450, 452,
455 IsolithobiUanic acid, 393
Isomaltose, 230 Isomerism,
rotational, 28
isopelletierine, 502
isopentanethiol, 53
Jsopentyl carbamate, 49
654-655
Keesom forces, 2, 5
Ketoses, 180-181
Kinases, 479
Lactols, 182
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
London forces, 2
Lumichrome, 605-606
Lumi-lactoflavin, 604^605
Luminal, 439
Lumisterol, 384
Lycopenal, 328
Lycopene, 327-329
Lycophyll, 336
Lycoxanthin, 335
Lyxose, 179-180
M and B, 628
Macleod equation, 6
Magnetic induction, 13
Magnetic permeability, 13
Magnetic susceptibility, 12-13, 354
Malamic acid, 33
115, 116
JVfesoerythritol, 177
Mesomechanism, 62
Metalloproteins, 467
ester, 269 3-
Methylcyc/ohexylamine, 113 l-
MethyUycfohexylidene-4-acetic
acid, 140 l-Methykyc/opropane-
l:2:3-tricarboxylic
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
10-Methylphenoxarsine-2-
carboxylie acids,
a-Hydroxyethylbenzene
Methylphenylmethyl chloride, see
a-Chloroethylbenzene 3-Methyl-l-
phenylpyrazole, 422 5-Methyl-l-
phenylpyrazole, 422 3-Methyl-l-
phenylpyrazolone, 426
Methylphenyl-£-tolyltelluronium
iodide,
Neoprene, 320
Neosalvarsan, 631
Neovitamin a, 334
Neovitamin b, 334
Nerol, 252-253
Nicotinamide, 617
Nicotone, 508
Nitrogen compounds,
stereochemistry of,
143-161 o-Nitrophenylglyoxylic acid,
159 o-AT-Nitroso-TV-
benzoyltoluidine, 427
Nitrosolimonene, 262 5-Nitrouracil,
573
bay, 245
bergamot, 253
camphor, 279
caraway, 259
celery, 303
chenopodium, 266
cubebs, 299
fennel, 293
geranium, 255
ginger, 298
lemon, 260
myrrh, 297
pennyroyal, 269
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
685
pine needle, 266, 267, 272
spearmint, 259
Pantolactone, 608-609
Papain, 53
Papaveraldine, 533, 536
Papaverine, 533-536
Papaveroline, 533
Parachor, 6
Paramagnetism, 13
Patulin, 639-640
Pectin, 232
Pelargonidin chloride, 546, 553-554
Pelletierine, 502
y-Pelletierine, 502
Penicillins, 632-637
2:3:4:5:6-Penta-
acetylaldehydoglucose,
Pentan-2-ol, 54
Pentosans, 232
Peonin, 555-556
Perbunan, 319
Perhydrocrocetin, 337
Perhydrolycopene, 327
Perhydrosqualene, 313
Perhydrovitamin A, 330
339-345 Phenanthrene-l:7-
dicarboxylic acid, 312 Phenazine,
446 Phenobarbitone, see Luminal
Phenothiazines, 447 Phenoxazines,
446-447 Phenylalanine, 434, 450,
452, 454, 455,
456, 457, 489 Phenyl azide, 433, 436
Phenylazomalononitrile, 441, 578 2-
PhenylcycZohexanol, 123
Phenylcyc/ohexenes, 123 ^-
Phenylenebisiminocamphor, 54 o-
Phenylenediamine, 430, 434, 446,
604 iV-oc-Phenylethylacetamide,
157 j8-Phenylethylamine, 489 2-
Phenylethyl bromide, 344 a-
Phenylethyl methyl ketoxime, 157
2-Phenyl-2-£-hydroxyphenyl-
l:2:3:4-
tetrahydrowophosphinolinium
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
Phytosterols, 359
Pinane, 273
Pinol, 274
2-Piperidone, 155
Piperine, 503-504
Piperitone, 270
Plane of symmetry, 37
Polarisability, 12
Purine, 575-576
Pyrazole, 421-423
Pyrazole-3:4:5-tricarboxylic acid,
422
Pyrazole-3:4:5-tricarboxylic ester,
424
Pyrazolidine, 423
Pyrene, 353
Pyrethrosin, 299
Pyridine-2:3:4-tricarboxylic acid,
529, 534
Pyridoxin, 615-617
(iJ)-compounds, 36
Raffinose, 224
Reductones, 212
Refrachor, 7
Residual valencies, 2
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
687
SS)-compounds, 36
(Sg reaction, 60
Sn» reaction, 74
Sabinene, 272
Sabinol, 272
Salvarsan, 631
Santonin, 307
Sapogenins, 412
Saponins, 412
Scleroproteins, 466
Scopine, 516-517
Scyllitol, 115
Secondary valencies, 2
Sedoheptulose, 233
Selenium compounds,
stereochemistry of,
174-175 Selenium
dehydrogenations, 245, 252, 301,
174
Sobrerol, 274
Sobrerythritol, 274
Solubility, 4
Solvolysis, 65
Sommelet reaction, 426
Sorbitol, 213
Specific rotation, 9
Stachydrine, 497
Staggered form, 27
Starch, 228-231
allenes, 139-140
dianthryls, 130
dinaphthyls, 130
diphenyls, 126-139
dipyridyls, 130
dipyrryls, 130
diquinolyls, 131
phenylpyrroles, 130
spirans, 140-142
steroids, 376-381
sugars, 176-187
terphenyls, 132-133
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
Steroids, 358-418
Substances, F, H, M, Q, S, 416
Substrates, 477 Succinaldehyde,
514, 519 Succinic acid, 87, 94, 245,
298, 317, 343,
Tagatose, 181
Talose, 179-180
Taurine, 390
Tellurium compounds,
stereochemistry of,
l:2:3:4-Tetramethyleyc7obutane, 38
l:3:4:5-Tetramethylfructose, 194
l:3:4:6-Tetramethylfructose, 195,
215, 224 2:3.4:6-
Tetramethylgalactose, 222, 224
2:3:4:5-Tetramethylgluconic acid,
189, 223 2:3:5:6-
Tetramethylgluconicacid, 190, 220,
222 2:3:4:6-
Tetramethylgluconolactone, 188
2:3:4:6-Tetramethylglucose, 183,
187-189, 204, 215, 218, 220, 221,
223, 227, 228, 229, 230, 234, 235,
238, 239 2:3:5:6-
Tetramethylglucose, 190, 204
Tetramethylspiro-(l:l')-
dipyrrolidinium
Tetrazines, 447
Tetrazoles, 436
Tetroses, 176-177
Thebaine, 537-541
Thebenine, 538
Theobromine, 583-585
Thiazole, 431-432
Thiazoles, 431-432
Thiazolidines, 432, 634
Thiochrome, 603-604
Thioglucose, 240
Threo-3-bromobutan-2-ol, 76
Thujane, 271
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
689
a-Thujene, 272
Thujone, 272
Thujyl alcohol, 272
Thymidine, 589
Thyronine, 462
a-Tocopherol, 619-622
8-Tocopherol, 623
Tolan, 96
o-Toluenediazohydroxide, 427
TPN, 598
Trans-addition, 96-99
Transition temperature, 51
Transmittance, 14
Transoid form. 27
co:3:4-Triacetoxyacetophenone, 549
co:3:4-Triacetoxy-5-
methoxyacetophen-
Ultracentrifuge measurements,
228, 317, 466, 595
Umbelhilone, 272
Unimolecular mechanism, 60
Ureides, 438
cyclic, see Pyrimidines, Purines
Uridine, 589
Uroporphyrinogen, 655
Valeric acid, 79
Veratrole, 533
Vetivone, 307
3-Vinylquinuclidine, 526
Vitamins, 598-626
A a , 335
B complex, 598-619
Bj, 599-603
B„ 604-608
B 3 , B 4 , B 6 , 619
B 6 , see Pyridoxin
B 13 , B 14 , 619
Be, 610
D 3 , D 4 , 386-387
K x , 623-625
K a , 626-626
M, 610 Volatility, 3 Vulcanisation,
318
644
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
Xanthine, 579
Xanthopterin, 612
Xanthosine, 590
Xylans, 232
£-Xylenol, 622
Xylo-glucans, 232
o-Xyloquinol, 623
^-Xyloquinol, 622
Zeaxanthin, 336
Zingiberene, 298-299
Zoosterols, 359
Zwitterion, 460
Zymase, 237
Zymogens, 479